wmm 




iijwiwi Miwmwuuii 



ill )Jlll l lUIMUU I >MiiU I IIWilW 



n 



\ 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. 

Cliap Copyright No 

Slielf.3.._^_*=? -5 



UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, 



/> . 



SCHOOL GYMNASTICS 



WITH LIGHT APPARATUS 



BY 



JESSIE H. BANCROFT 

DIRECTOR OF PHYSICAL TRAINING IN THE PUBLIC SCHOOLS 
OF NEW YORK CITY, BOROUGH OF BROOKLYN 



BOSTON, U.S.A. 

D. C. HEATH & CO., PUBLISHERS 

1900 



r-." 



61397 






l^ibi^ry of Conv 

pv,u CDfiti *tai 
OCT 15 1900 

stcow conr. 

OftOiii DIVISION, 

OCT 18 lyuu 



&V4-S-? 



Copyright, 1900, 
By JESSIE H. BANCROFT 



TYPOGRAPHY BY J, 8. CUSTIING A CO., NORWOOD, MASS. 



PRE8SW0RK BY JI. M. PLIMPTON A CO., NORWOOD, MASS. 



Contents 



PAGE 

Publisher's Note ...,..,... 5 

Introduction 7 

Explanatory Notes : 

1. Period for exercise 10 

2. Each lesson for one week 10 

3. Place for exercise . . . . . . . .10 

4. Floor formation . . . . . . , . .11 

5. Position ; stretching 12 

6. Tactics (facings and marching) . . , . . .15 

7. Running .......... 16 

8. Breathing I7 

9. Commands 18 

10. Exercises in series ig 

11. Time ........... 20 

12. Music 90 

13. Leading 20 

14. New exercises . . . 20 

15. Progressive principles 21 

16. Effects of exercises 21 

17. Programmes for special exercises 23 

Course of Instruction 
FOR Boys and Girls : 

Eirst series, first school year, second half, dumb-bells, \ pound 25 

Second series, second school year, second half, wands, 3 feet . 57 

Third series, third school year, second half, dumb-bells, J pound 91 

Fourth series, fourth school year, second half, wands, 3^ feet . 133 



Contents 

PAGE 

Fifth series, fifth year, boys and girls, Indian clubs, J pound . 179 
Sixth series, fifth or sixth year, boys and girls, double series, 

wands, 4 feet . . . 215 

Seventh series, sixth year, boys, bar-bells, 4 feet . . . 253 

Eighth series, sixth year, girls, iron grace hoops, 1^ pounds . 297 

Ninth series, seventh year, boys and girls, Indian clubs, 1 pound 335 
Tenth series, seventh or eighth year, boys and girls, double 

series, dumb-bells, 1 pound 379 

Eleventh series, eighth year, boys, dumb-bells, 1 pound . . 419 

Twelfth series, eighth year, girls, dumb-bells, 1 pound , . 467 



Publisher's Note 

The course of lessons herewith presented for public school 
use is in two divisions — free hand and light apparatus exer- 
cise respectively. Each of these divisions is a complete course 
in itself, covering eight grades of work from the lowest primary 
to the highest grammar. The free hand work can be used 
in the regular classroom, though a special room is obviously 
desirable. The apparatus work necessitates free floor space. 

Each grade of work is arranged in eighteen lessons, extend- 
ing over half of the school year. This does not cover the 
entire term of most school sessions, as it is considered best to 
use review work during times of examination and promotion, 
rather than to tax pupils with new exercises at such times. 

While each course is complete in itself, the two kinds of 
work are designed to be interchanged — half of the school 
year to be devoted to free hand exercise and the succeeding 
half to the apparatus. 

In grading the exercises each free hand series is used as the 
foundation for the movements of the apparatus work for the 
same year, which in turn, in the greater variety and freedom 
of its exercises, forms an advance upon the last series of free 
work. 

Both courses prepare for the heavier work of the gymnasium. 



Introduction 



The course of school gymnastics with light apparatus here 
presented supplements the course of free gymnastics contained 
in School Gymnastics, Free Hand. The course of free work 
comprises eight series or grades of lessons, each covering 
one half of the school year. The completed plan uses appa- 
ratus for the second half of each school year. In the full 
course, therefore, the free work alternates with the apparatus 
work throughout the eight years of the elementary school. 

The reasons for this alternation lie in the superiority of free 
work for the correction of posture, which is the main object 
of school gymnastics, and in the superiority of apparatus work 
for physiological results, for the cultivation of skill, and for 
the holding of interest and attention. 

In free gymnastics the concentration of attention upon the 
muscular sense, and especially upon the strong resistance of 
antagonistic muscular groups, results in greater expansion of 
the chest, and better carriage of the shoulders, head, spine, etc., 
than is apt to come from apparatus work alone. Too much 
emphasis cannot be placed upon the question of posture in 
any exercise intended for schools. The constant conditions 
of school life are such as tend to cultivate and fix what has 
been called the fatigue position, — a position in which the 
chest is contracted and flattened, the shoulders rounded for- 
ward, and the head and hips protruded forward. This is the 
typical school attitude where corrective gymnastics are not 
taken. The habit of incorrect position implies in the child 
a distorted muscular sense — the habitual feeling of a dispro- 



8 Introduction 

portionate contraction and relaxation in opposing groups of 
muscles. A new adjustment of the muscles, and its main- 
tenance until correct posture becomes a habit, cannot be ac- 
complished without a conscious effort on the part of the pupil. 
This effort is better concentrated in free gymnastics. The 
limitations of free work are reached, however, when the pupil's 
interest flags because the work seems to him " too easy.'' 
The motor powers want instinctively some outlet requiring 
greater skill, more muscular strength, and greater range of 
movement than is possible without apparatus. By accustom- 
ing the body to correct form in typical movements without 
apparatus, the power of correct position may be used as a foun- 
dation for apparatus exercise without danger of cultivating 
incorrect positions. 

Apparatus work is advisable because it is more stimulating 
to the circulation, respiration, and other physiological processes, 
than free work. This effect comes partly through the resist- 
an<je of the Aveight to muscular action, which induces a greater 
activity in the processes of waste and repair, and partly through 
the greater range and more vigorous character of the move- 
ments. Apparatus work is also advantageous because of the 
greater control of the bodily powers gained in the skill required 
to handle the apparatus itself. All of these factors tend to 
increase the pleasure and the interest in exercise — features of 
the work that are of great importance. 

Fixed and heavy apparatus is not practicable for elementary 
public schools, where there are forty or fifty pupils in a class, 
only fifteen or twenty minutes for the entire lesson, and where 
special gymnastic dress is impossible. This reduces the avail- 
able apparatus to the lighter, movable pieces, such as dumb- 
bells, Indian clubs, wands, etc., etc. The course here presented 
differs radically from some features characteristic of most 
apparatus exercise. Excessive arm work is usually found in 
such exercise. In this course all-over work is a cardinal 
principle. Every exercise for the arms is combined with work 



Introduction 9 

for the legs or trunk. The " series '' form of exercise, used in 
a slighter degree in the free hand course, is used exclusively 
in this apparatus course. In this series work three exercises, 
as for the arms and trunk and their combination, are taken in 
rapid succession, without a pause for commands between them, 
so that a maximum of exercise is possible in a given period. 
By breaking the work into these series, instead of putting it 
into a longer, continuous drill, as is customary in apparatus exer- 
cise, the aiitomatic element, which leads to poor posture, and the 
strain upon the memory to recall " what comes next,'^ are done 
away with. By this series method progressive work from 
week to week is also possible, at least one new series being 
introduced into each lesson in place of the simpler one which 
prepared the way for it. The same general lesson plan is 
pursued as in the free work, the first series being for the 
extremities, the arms, legs, and their combination, the next 
for balance work, and the third trunk work. Provision is 
also made for running and for breathing exercises. The table 
thus forms a gradual progression to the work that makes a 
maximum demand upon the physiological powers. 

Gymnastic exercise of any description should never be con- 
sidered a substitute for a recess period. Active games in a 
recess period should be part of the physical training of every 
school child. 

In the sixth and eighth years of the course here presented, 
different series of work are given for boys and girls. An 
alternative, suitable for mixed classes, is also given. There 
is no reason why girls should not take the exercise designated 
for boys, if properly dressed for it. Many of the exercises, 
however, call for greater freedom of movement than is possible 
in the usual school dress of girls of the age implied. 



Explanatory Notes 



1. Period for Exercise. — The lessons are designed to occupy 
at least fifteen minutes daily. This period includes the time 
required for passing to and from the gymnasium. 

The most advantageous time for the lesson is in the middle 
of the afternoon session. Next to this in desirability is a 
period between the morning recess and the noon intermission. 

2. Each Lesson is to be used one week, that of the previous 
week being discontinued. AYhen the continuance of an exer- 
cise is deemed necessary for physiological reasons, it is included 
in the new lesson. No effort should be made to have the 
children keep in mind any exercises not so indicated. 

In conducting the lesson, the order in which the exercises 
are arranged should be strictly adhered to. 

The work will be greatly facilitated if the teacher will 
memorize the lessons. This is much less formidable than at 
first ajjpears, as the general order in which the exercises are 
arranged is the same in all lessons, and generally only one new 
series is introduced each week. The teacher will then be free 
to observe her class, and the rapid succession of the exercises 
will be more nearly assured. 

3. Place for Exercise. — The gymnastics with light apparatus 
are designed to be taken on free floor space. In primary grades 
each pupil should have at least sixteen square feet of space, or 
an area measuring four feet square ; in grammar grades each 
pupil should have at least thirty six square feet, or an area 

10 



Explanatory Notes 11 

six feet square. While a gymnasium is highly desirable, the 
exercise can be taken in corridors, assembly, and playrooms, 
where light, ventilation, and floor space are sufficient. In mild 
weather work in the open air is desirable. 

4. Floor Formation. — The manner of taking places on the 
free floor space is of much importance, as much time may be 
lost. Several modes are possible. A choice will depend largely 
upon the age of the pupils, the shape of the room, and the 
convenience with which the apparatus can be procured while 
passing to place. Floor marks should never be depended upon. 
The first lesson should be devoted entirely to drill upon floor 
formation. From the time the pupils stand in the class-room 
until they return to it again, all facings and marching should 
be according to the military tactics hereinafter described. 

The simplest method of floor formation is that in which the 
pupils march into the room in single file, each taking apparatus 
while passing to place. One line of pupils, still in single file, 
should march across the rear of the room and turn toward the 
front on the farther side. Each pupil in the line should pause 
at his own place, which should be more than arm's length from 
the pupil next in front, or according to the spacing indicated 
in the third note. This first line should serve as a guide for 
spacing to all other lines. The leaders of the successive lines 
should turn and march to the front at proper intervals from 
the lines preceding them. All should mark time at their places 
until the command to halt is given to the entire class. This is 
the simplest method of taking places upon the floor, and it 
is particularly adapted to the youngest pupils, though they 
can also be taught other formations. 

Another method of formation is for the leaders of each line 
to march across the rear of the room, face toward the front at 
the proper places for their lines, mark time until all of the 
leaders are in line, and then all march forward in rank to the 
front. Those whose places are next behind them in their 



12 Explanatory Notes 

respective lines should march in rank to their places in the 
same way, and so on until all are in place. 

By yet another method all pupils should march to the front 
in solid ranks of four or more, according to the number of 
lines. The different ranks should pause at the proper distance 
from the rank next in front. All should stop marking time at 
command, and orders should then be given for spacing sideways. 
For example, if pupils are in ranks of fours, the commands 
would be, "Inside lines one step, outside lines three steps, 
outward — March ! '' The teacher should then count for the 
marching, two counts for each step — one to place the foot, the 
second to put the heels together. 

Many other methods of formation are possible, ^one should 
be used which requires unnecessary time, such as those in which 
pupils have to number before marching to place. 

Classes should never face the light. The best position is 
with the side to the light. 

5. Position. Stretching. — A good standing position from 
which to take the exercises is essential for effective work. To 
assist the chest and spine to this position, every lesson begins 
with a preliminary stretching of the arms upward and side- 
ways, and it is repeated again at the close of the lesson after 
putting away the apparatus. This stretching is better for the 
purpose in many ways than the usual admonitions to throw the 
shoulders back and draw the chin in. Such directions make 
the child self-conscious ; they do not, in the youngest chiklren 
at least, produce the desired result, for such children are not 
capable of the isolated control of the parts named, and other 
faults of posture are produced — such as a sway-back attitude 
with protruding abdomen, etc. The stretching, by its straight 
pull in a line with the vertical and lateral diameters of the 
body, lifts and expands the chest and erects the spine without 
this painfully self-conscious effort. Moreover, such a general 
muscular tension, taking in both the flexors and extensors, is 



Explanatory Notes 



13 



apt to have a more lasting effect than a spasmodic effort of 
the will can produce. The one specific direction that can be 
given in this and in nearly all other exercises is to hold the 
head up. 

For the stretching, formal commands are omitted to save 
time. Upon being told to stretch the arms upv^ard, pupils 
should rise on tiptoe and reach up with both arms as high as* 





Incorrect Standing Position 



Correct Standing Position 



possible. The teacher is particularly requested to urge them 
higher, farther, etc., etc. The position should not he long sus- 
tained, and the arms should be dropped at the command down 
or position, following soon after the first direction. The 
upward stretching should be taken two or three times, and 
then the arms should be stretched sideways in the same man- 
ner. Avoid bending the body backward or the head forward 



14 



Explanatory Notes 



when the arms are up. Never stretch the arms forward in this 
prelirainari/ exercise. This stretching has been usied in some 

departments after every lesson 
throughout the day. It requires 
but a few seconds and is an admi- 
rable corrective of the injurious 
positions acquired in the seats. 

It should not be inferred that 
the stretching does away entirely 
with the necessity for calling for, 
or consciously assuming, an erect 
attitude. The teacher will have 
frequently to use the command 
position, When this command is 
heard, pupils should stand with 
heels together, toes turned out, 
chest and head erect, face to the 
front, and arms hanging easily 
at the sides. The direction " face 
to the front" does not mean that 
the gaze shall be fastened upon 
the head of the pupil next in 
front, or upon any other one spot. 
Such a practice is reprehensible in 
the extreme. The eye is an exceed- 
ingly restless organ, and should not be altogether deprived of 
its natural activity. The weight should be borne upon the for- 
ward part of the foot. A good test for correct poise, which 
should be frequently employed b}^ the teachers, is the ability to 
rise on the toes without having first to sway forward. In pri- 
mary classes attention may have to be frequently called to keep- 
ing the heels together and the head erect. The class should be 
called to position before marching from the classroom, again 
after the march before beginning the exercises, and at any time 
during the lesson when the attitudes become careless. 




Preliminary Stretching, 
Upward 



Explanatory Notes 



15 




Preliminary Stretching, Sideways 

6. Tactics 

a. Left — Face! 
Right — Face I 

Raise the left toe, and face to the left, turning on the left heel. 

The facings to the right are also executed u]3on the left heel. 

The heel is lifted in response to the word right (or left) ; the 
turning is executed in response to the command /ace. ^ 

Make clear to the children that four turns in the same direc- 
tion complete a circle, and when that is understood, vary the 
directions to make them alert and independent. This is an 
excellent means of rousing a sleepy class, and may be intro- 
duced briefly anywhere if the lesson is lagging. 

h. About — Face! 

Raise slightly the right toe, face to the rear, turning to the 
right on the right heel and the ball of the left foot ; replace 
the left foot beside the right. 



16 Explanatory Notes 

The heel is lifted in response to the word about ; the turning 
and replacing of the foot are executed in reponse to the com- 
mand face. 

c. Mark time — March ! 

As soon as mark time is heard, throw the weight on the right 
foot, being careful not to exaggerate the swing of the body to 
^ that side ; upon hearing march, lift the left foot forward, toe 
pointing downward, as though to step, but draw it back imme- 
diately to position, all in one count ; repeat with the right foot. 
Continue the movement with one foot and then the other alter- 
nately in the rhythm of w^alking, but without gaining ground. 
The feet should be placed firmly but without undue noise. 
The body will sway slightly from side to side, but should be 
held as steadily as possible, with no bending at the waist. 

d. Mark time — March! {during the march). 

On the executive command stop gaining ground and mark 
time in place. 

e. Class — Halt I 

The marking time ceases and the heels remain together on 
halt, which command may be given as either foot strikes the 
ground. 

To halt while marching, on the command halt, stop gaining 
ground and bring the rear foot up, placing heels together. 

/. Forivard — March ! 

When taken from a halt, in response to forward, throw the 
weight on the right foot as in marking time, but keep the heels 
firmly together until the executive command is heard; in re- 
sponse to march, step out j)romptly with the left foot. 

When taken from marking time, the words forward and 
march are given as the right foot strikes the ground; pupils 
start forward with the left foot. 

7. Running. — All running should be done on the toes. The 
fists should be closed and the arms bent at the elbow, and 
allowed to work freely. The extent of the run must be gov- 



Explanatory Notes 17 

erned by careful judgment on the part of the teacher. The 
run should be at least long enough to perceptibly quicken the 
breathing : how much longer will depeii 1 upon the endurance 
of a majority of the class, who should run until thoroughly in- 
vigorated, but by no means to the end of their strength. The 
weaker members of the class should step aside* as they feel 
fatigued, and walk until the order is given foi^ the class to 
march, when they should fall into their usual places. No rac- 
ing should be allowed; instead all of the runners should keep 
in line as for marching. Pupils having heart or lung troubles 
should not be allowed to run. PuidUs should never he called to 
a halt directly from a run, as that throws a distressing amount of 
work upon the heart and lungs. Normal action of these organs 
should he restored hy a march in common time immediately follow- 
ing the run, until the hreathing is normal. The command for 
this is ''In common time — March !^^ After this march in 
common time a breathing exercises should be taken as indi- 
cated in the lessons. 

8. Breathing. — Where the method of breathing is not 
specified, it is understood to be that last described in the 
lessons. 

The teacher should indicate in some way both the inhaling 
and exhaling, as by raising and lowering one hand, or by the 
words in and out at the beginning of the movements. In all 
respiratory exercises the children should be urged to a forced 
respiration, i.e., a deeper breath than the normal. Care should 
be taken to have the breathing slow and even, not a quick gasp 
or sigh, which may lead to dizziness. The exercises are for 
successive breaths ; do not pause for a normal breath between. 

At first the breathing may be very audible in the respiratory 
exercises, and in the lowest primary grade it may be found 
necessary to keep it so throughout the term to be sure the right 
thing is being done. But as soon as possible in other grades 
the breath, though just as deep, should be slower, in order to 



18 Explanatory Notes 

give strength and control to the respiratory muscles, and the 
breathing will then be quieter. 

In all cases an exaggerated lifting of the shoulders should 
be avoided. While the sternum participates in correct, and 
especially in forced, breathing, the main action is indicated by 
the expansion of the ribs and abdomen, and every exercise is 
designed to ciiltivate this intercostal and diaphragmatic action. 

9. Commands. — The psychological training and disciplinary 
features of the work will be found to rest chiefly upon the 
manner of giving the commands. There should be a distinct 
pause after the preparatory command, that pupils may grasp 
clearly just what they are to do, and also cultivate the inhibi- 
tory control necessary to hold the idea without yielding to 
the impulse to action. It should never be forgotten that the 
executive command is a signal, and as such it should always 
be given. Upon the manner of giving this command rests the 
minor result of united response from the class, and the more 
important one of quick, connected working of all of the powers 
included in motor response, from sense perception to muscular 
contraction. 

Most of the exercises are in measures of eight or sixteen 
counts. The teacher will, in repeating the exercise, continue 
the count to this number, rather than break into a repetition 
of one — tivo, one — two^ etc. The longer rhythm is less of a 
strain upon the child, and insures equal work for the two sides 
of the body. 

The figures after the command indicate how many counts 
are to be given to the exercise, three eights meaning one side 
eight counts, the other eight, and, in arm exercises, both arms 
together eight. In other than arm exercises, the third eight 
means to alternate the sides. This distribution of the counts 
should be strictly observed that the sides of the body may be 
equally exercised. 

Where an exercise, as for the arms, is taken first on one 



Explanatory Notes 19 

side, then on the other, then with both arms, those changes 
should be indicated in the counting, substituting the words 
riglitj left, change, or hath, for tlie last count before the change, 
thus : — 

Arm stretching sideicaf/s, right — One! — two, three, four. Jive, 
six, seven, left; etc. Here the word left is substituted for eight. 
This method of indicating changes applies also to exercises in 
series. 

Where the direction of an exercise is not given it is under- 
stood to begin to the right. 

10. Exercises in Series. — In almost every lesson of the free 
hand work and in all of the apparatus lessons, are to be found 
short series of exercises marked a, b, c. These series are 
always composed of one or two simple exercises, and then, in 
most lessons, of a combination of the two; as, for instance, an 
arm exercise, a foot exercise, and then the two taken together, 
indicated by the word combine. Wherever such a series occurs 
the change from one exercise to the next is to be made without 
breaking the rhythm, or pausing for a separate command. 
This is accomplished, as in the change of side above illustrated, 
by substituting some word or words for the last count before 
the change. When the change is a radical one, as from an 
arm to a foot exercise, it will be well, at least when the lesson 
is new, to assist the children's memory by substituting words 
for counts in the first few movements of the change, using counts 
again as soon as the pupils understand clearly what they are 
to do. To illustrate further, the commands and counts would 
be as follows for (a) stretching the arms forward and sideways 
alternately, (b) step position forward and sideways alternately, 
and (c) a combination of these two exercises, the three form- 
ing a series to be taken in unbroken rhythm : — 

Arm stretching forward and sideways alternately, right — One ! 
— tico, three, four, five, six, seven, left; one, tivo, three, four. Jive, 
six, seven, both; one, tiuo, three, four, five, six, seven. Foot! — 



20 Explanatory Notes 

» 

forward, place, side, place, jive, six, seven, left; one, tivo, three, 
four, five, six, seven. Combine!^ — forward, place, side, ^ylace, 
five, six, seven, change; one,^ two, three, four, five, six, seven, 
eight. 

Words, or cues, for these changes are given in the lessons, 
but any words may be used as cues which convey the idea, 
provided they do not interrupt the regular rhythm, or time, 
of the exercise. 

11. Time. — The time should be brisk and invigorating. 
While quick enough to be effective for hygienic purposes, how- 
ever, the movements should never be taken ivith a jerk, or so rap- 
idly that good posture cannot be maintained. A strong, steady 
stretch or flexion should be the aim, and this will be secured 
largely through the teacher's method of counting. 

12. Music. — Wherever possible it is highly desirable that 
the work be taken with musical accompaniment. In working 
with music the teacher will not count, but give merely the first 
command for each exercise and a cue for changes of side, etc. 
The pupils and music start together in response to the execu- 
tive command, and the music guides the rhythm. With many 
exercises the classes can sing, or one half sing or whistle 
while the other works. National airs and old ballads are 
especially suited to this purpose. 

13. Leading. — The teacher will lead in new exercises. 
After an exercise is once understood the pupils should not be 
dependent upon the teacher's leading. 

14. New Exercises are indicated by heavy type. The 
descriptive notes and illustrations follow the lesson. For any 
other exercises not understood, trace the command back 
through preceding lessons until its descriptive note is found. 
The notes are for the teacher, not for the children. No such 
formal explanation of an exercise should be given to a class. 

1 Right foot and both arms. 2 Left foot and both arms. 



Explanatory Notes 21 

Instead, the teacher should take the exercise herself and let 
the pupils catch it directly from imitation, working with her. 
The children should understand the postural effect of the 
various exercises as given in the notes, and work consciously 
on the parts mentioned. Older children should also understand 
how all e^^ercise affects the nutritive processes of the body. 

15. Progressive Principles. — The exercises in this work 
follow certain progressive principles which the teacher should 
understand in order to appreciate the relation of one lesson to 
the next. In trunk exercises the work is made increasingly 
difficult for the muscles near the waist by increasing the weight 
at the upper end of the working lever (near the shoulders or 
head) or, later, by lengthening this lever. These effects are 
attained through various positions of the arms. In balance 
exercises the work is increased in difficulty in two ways — by 
narrowing the base with different positions of the feet, and by 
raising the centre of gravity with different positions of the 
arms. Physiologically a progressive demand is made, among 
other ways, by more and more use of the large muscular groups, 
particularly those of the thigh and trunk ; by an increased 
number of exercises in each lesson ; and by a greater number of 
counts in each exercise. All this means a gradually increased 
demand upon the heart and lungs. The child's power of mus- 
cular coordination, as shown in his ability to take exercises in 
correct form, or with good posture, is considered by gradually 
leading up to those exercises whose execution is most prone to 
accompanying ^^ faults.'' With scarcely any exceptions the 
closing movement of each exercise is one that leaves the body 
in a good position. In the very few cases where this is not 
done, the succeeding exercise makes the correction. 

It will be seen that each exercise, each lesson, and each series 
of work prepares for that which comes after. 

16. Effects of the Exercises. — To get the full benefit from 
any exercise the teacher should bear in mind that strength and 



22 Explanatory Notes 

vigor of movement are positively essential. When an arm or a 
leg is extended, it should be stretched to the farthest extent; 
when the knee or the trunk is bent, it should be to the utmost 
degree compatible with good posture ; when a balance move- 
ment calls for rising on the toes, the heels should be lifted 
as high as possible ; in breathing exercises a very deep, full 
breath should be taken. In short, constant urging to vigor of 
execution is necessary. 

Both teachers and pupils should understand that all arm 
exercises are taken more for their effect upon the chest 
and shoulder blades than for the effect upon the arms. 
The arms should therefore be stretched to their utmost in 
all exercises calling for a straight arm position, whether as 
a terminal position or in transition to the terminal posi- 
tion. The lifting and expanding of the chest should be 
borne in mind in taking these exercises, and to that end 
the elbow should be straight. All movements of the legs 
should work upon the muscles around the hip, abdomen, and 
lower back, strengthening those muscles in their power to hold 
the trunk erect and to keep the body from awkward and 
fatiguing positions in walking and standing. Particularly 
effective in this way are the point step backward and the 
stretch steps and chargings. Especial care should be given, 
therefore, in the point steps to the full stretch from the hip, 
and in the charging and stretch steps to the length of the step, 
that it may be long enough to necessitate considerable contrac- 
tion of the thigh muscles ; attention should also be paid in the 
charging to keeping the trunk erect with the chest prominent 
and forward. Any tendency to a swayback position, which 
is especially liable to occur in these movements, should be 
avoided. It should be borne in mind also that all trunk ex- 
ercises, and all charging and other knee-bending exercises, are 
particularly useful for quickening the circulation, because they 
bring into action the largest muscular groups in the body. 
The trunk exercises have also a very stimulating effect upon 



Explanatory Notes 23 

the digestive organs. These effects will be lost unless the 
bending of the knee and the trunk is very pronounced. In 
exercises that call for rising on the toes, great care should be 
taken to keep the weight poised forward over the balls of the 
feet after the heels are lowered. This forward poise is part of 
a correct standing position, and helps to secure good posture 
of the upper part of the body. 

See also the note upon Progressive Principles. 

17. Programmes for Special Exercises, selected from the 
grade work, are given at the end of each series in the primary 
grades. In the grammar grades the material for special pro- 
grammes is so much greater that they can be easily made. 
The arrangement of the exercises in these special programmes 
is not the same as in the lessons. 

For exhibit purposes very pretty effects can be produced 
by trimming the light apparatus for the girls with ribbon 
bows or fringed papers. 



SCHOOL GYMNASTICS 

First Series 

First Year, Boys and Girls 
Dumb-bells, \ pound 

LESSON I 

Note. — For preliminaries, stretching, tactics, floor forma- 
tion, etc., see Explanatory Notes. The exercises in this series 
are very simple and are intended mainly to introduce the chikl 
to conscious muscular control. Plays and games should form 
a large share of the physical exercise for this year. 
Class — Stand ! 

1. Stretching. 

2. Left— Face! 
Right— Face ! 

Forward — March ! (Take the bells and march to position 
on the floor.) 

Bells on Hips — Place ! 

a. Clicking— One ! 8. 

b. Point step forward, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

c. Combine! 8 — 8. 

Position ! 

4. Forward — March ! (Keturn bells to place.) 
Class—Halt ! 

5. Stretching. 

6. Forward — March ! (to seats.) 

25 



26 



School Gymnastics 





Position for Bells while 
Marching to Place 



Bells on Hips 



3 a. CLICKING 



1, click the thumb ends of the bells ; 2, replace bell on hips. 
While clicking, the arms should be held in an easy position 
forward and downward, the elbows slightly bent. 



3 6. POINT STEP FOKWAKD 

1, extend the foot and touch the toe on a line directly forward 
of the position from which it started ; 2, heels together. Keep 
the shoulders (upper part of body) perfectly still and the knees 
stiff, that the exercise may lead to firm, erect carriage. Do 
not drag or scuff the foot over the floor. The weight should 
remain entirely on the stationary foot. 



First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 



27 



3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP 
FORWARD AND CLICKING 

1, click the bells and take the 
point step forward simultaneously ; 
2, hands on hips and heels together. 




28 



School Gymnastics 



LESSON II 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facing. 
Marching. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 
' a. Clicking — One ! 8. 
h. Foot ! — forward — place. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Point step forward with the right foot. 
I c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

4. Alternate rising on toes and clicking bells, four counts each 
— One ! Repeat four times. 

Position ! 

5. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 

6. Stretching. 

Arms folded behind — Place ! 

7. Breathing — Begin ! 

Position ! 



First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 29 

4. ALTERNATE RISING ON TOES AND CLICKING BELLS, 
FOUR COUNTS EACH 

1, rise on the toes ; 2. heels down, quietly and without jar- 
ring ; 3, rise again on the toes ; 4, heels down ; 5, click the 
thumb ends of the bells ; 6, click the little finger ends of the 
bells; 7, click the thumb ends; 8, click the little fiuger ends 
and return the bells at once to the hips. 

The rising on the toes should be as high as possible in order 
to make an effective balance movement. The return to position 
should not be made until the command for it is given. 



7. BREATHING 

Inhale a deep breath through the nostrils and exhale through 
the mouth. Repeat three times. 

The folding of the arms behind throws the chest forward 
and upward and keeps the shoulders from an exaggerated 
lifting or shrugging during the inhalation. 



30 



School Gymnastics 



LESSOI^ III 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 
' a. Clicking — One ! 8. 
h. Foot ! — side — place. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Point step sideways. 
I c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

Alternate rising on toes and clicking bells, four counts 
each — One ! Four times. 

Position ! 
Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 
Stretching. 
Running. 

Note. — See Reference Note 7. 
8. Breathing — Begin ! Three times. 



3. 



4. 



First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 31 



3 b. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS 

1, extend the foot directly 
to the side and touch the 
inner side of the toe; 2, 
heels together. The ex- 
tended knee and ankle 
should be stretched as 
straight as possible. The 
weight should remain en- 
tirely on the stationary foot. 
The shoulders should be im- 
movable, that the exercise 
may cultivate power of erect 
carriage. 




3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING 

1, click the bells and take the point step to the side simul- 
taneously ; 2, bells on hips and heels together. 



8. BREATHING 

Raise the arms sideways to shoulder level while inhaling; 
lower them to position while exhaling. The breath should be 
slower and deeper than the normal. 



32 



School Gymnastics 



LESSON IV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 
f a. Clicking — One ! 8. 

3. \ b. Foot !— side— place. 8—8. 
ic. Combine! 8—8. 

Position ! 

4. Swinging bell to chest, right— One! 8 — 8—8. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 

5. Alternate rising on toes and clicking bells, four counts each 

— One ! Four times. 

Position ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells 
to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Three times. 




4. SWINGING BELL TO CHEST 

1, bend the elbow and swing the 
forearm forward and upward un- 
til the bell touches the chest in 
a vertical position ; 2, return the 
bell to the side. Keep the shoul- 
ders squarely to the front during 
this exercise. When the bell is at 
the chest, draw the shoulders and 

elbows backward in order to counteract any tendency to cramp 

the chest. 



First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 33 



LESSON V 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Position ! 
' a. Swinging bell to chest, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
h. Foot ! — forward — place. 8 — 8. 
Note. — Point step forward. 
I c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

4. Raising bell sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 

5. Alternate rising on toes and clicking bells, four counts each 
— One ! Four times. 

Position ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP FORWARD AND SWINGING 

BELLS TO CHEST 

1, point step forward with the right foot, and swing both 
bells to the chest; 2, heels together and bells down to position. 



4. RAISING BELL SIDEWAYS 

1, raise the arm straight out sideways to shoulder level, the 
palm down and the bell horizontal ; 2, lower the arm to position 
at the side. 



34 School Gymnastics 



LESSON VI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Position ! 
r a. Swinging bell to chest, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

3. \h. Foot !— forward— place. 8—8. 
Ic. Combine! 8—8. 

4. Eaising bell sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
Bells on hips — Place ! 

a. Trunk twisting, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
With clicking ! 8—8. 

Position ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



=■ \i 



First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 



35 



ba. TRUNK TWISTING 




1, twist or rotate the trunk to 
the side ; 2, return to the forward 
position. The movement should 
be from the ankles, the feet re- 
maining firmly in place and flat 
upon the floor. The head should 
turn with the trunk, but no far- 
ther. There should be no bend- 
ing of the trunk sideways. 



5 h. TRUNK TWISTING WITH 
CLICKING 

1, twist the trunk and click 
the thumb ends of the bells in 
front as the body then faces; 
2, return to the front, bells on 
hips. 



36 



School Gymnastics 



LESSON VII 
Stretching. 

Facings. 

Marching. 

Position I 

' a. Raising bell sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

b. Foot ! — side — place. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Point step sideways. 

. c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 

i a. Trunk twisting with point step, right — One ! 8 — 8. 

\b. With clicking I 8—8. 

Position ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



4. 



First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 37 



3 c. COMBINATION OF 
POINT STEP AND 
RAISING BELLS SIDE- 
WAYS 

1, point step side- 
ways with the right 
foot and raise both 
bells sideways; 2, 
heels together and 
bells down to posi- 
tion. 

This is an excellent 
balance movement 
and will cultivate an 
erect carriage if the 
head is held erect 
and there is no weight 
on the moving foot. 



4 a TEUNK TWISTING WITH POINT STEP 

1, twist the trunk to the right and extend the right foot in 
front of the body as it then faces ; 2, return to the front, heels 
together. The left foot should remain firmly in place. 




4 ft. TRUNK TWISTING WITH POINT STEP AND CLICKING 

1, click the bells while twisting the trunk and extending the 
foot ; 2, face the front, bells on hips, and heels together. 



38 



School Gymnastics 



LESSON VIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Position ! 

3. Swinging bell to chesty forward and return^ right — One! 

8—8—8. 

' a. Raising bell sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8— 8. 
h. Foot ! — side — place. 8-^8. 
c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 
a. Trunk twisting with point step, right — One ! 8 — 8o 
h. With clicking ! 8—8. 

Position ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Peturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Punning. 

9. Breathing — Begin! Four times. 



First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 



39 



3. SWINGING BELL TO CHEST, FOR- 
WARD AND RETURN 

1, swing the bell to the chest as 
in previous lessons ; 2, stretch the 
axm forward at shoulder level, the 
bell still vertical; 3, return to 
the chest; 4, bell down to posi- 
tion. Be sure to extend the arm 
to its full length forward while 
taking the movement, that the 
arm and shoulder muscles may be 
well exercised. 




4D 



School Gymnastics 



LESSON IX 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Position ! 

3. Swinging bell to chest, forward and return, right — One! 
8—8—8. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 

4. Stepping forward and rising on toes, right — One ! 8 — 8. 

Position ! 

a. Alternate raising bells sideways and clicking, both — 
One I 16. 

b. Foot ! — side— place — twist — place. 8 — 8. 
Note. — Alternate point step sideways, and trunk 

twisting. 
, c. Combine ! 16—16. 

6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Punning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



5. \ 



First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 41 

4. STEPPING FORWARD AND RISING ON TOES 

1, step forward with the right foot, both feet flat upon the 
floor and the weight equal ; 2, rise on the toes ; 3, heels down ; 
4, heels together. 

Because of the elongated base the rising on toes is here a 
more difficult balance movement than when taken with the 
heels together. 



5 a. ALTERNATE RAISING BELLS SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING 

1, raise the bells sideways to shoulder level ; 2, bells down 
to position at the sides ; 3, click the thumb ends of bells in front 
of the body; 4, bells down to position at the sides. 



5&. ALTERNATE POINT STEP SIDEWAYS AND TRUNK TWISTING 

Ij point step to the side with the right foot ; 2, heels together ; 
3, twist the trunk to the right ; 4, return to the front. 



5 c. COMBINATION OF ALTERNATE POINT STEP SIDEWAYS AND 
TRUNK TWISTING, WITH RAISING BELLS SIDEWAYS AND 
CLICKING 

1, point step sideways and both arms raised sideways; 
2, heels together and arms down; 3, twist the trunk to the 
side (the heels remaining together), and click the bells ; 4, re- 
turn to the front, arms at sides. 



42 



School Gymnastics 



LESSON X 



1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 



4. 



Position ! 



r a. Swinging bell to chest, forward and return, right- 

I One ! 8—8—8. 

^ h. Foot! — forward — up — down — place. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Stepping forward and rising on toes. 
Combine ! 8—8. 

Alternate raising bells sideways and clicking, both- 
One ! 16. 
Foot ! — side — place — twist — place. 8 — 8. 



f a. 

I 



[c. Combine! ^—^. 

5. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 

6. Stretching. 

7. Running. 

8. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 



43 



3 c. COMBINATION OF STEPPING FOR- 
WARD AND RISING ON TOES WITH 
BELLS AT CHEST AND FORWARD 

1, step forward with the right 
foot and swing both bells to the 
chest ; 2, rise on the toes and 
stretch the bells forward ; 3, heels 





down and bells again to 
the chest ; 4, heels to- 
gether and arms down in 
position. The waist and 
head should be held 
firmly erect. 



7. BREATHING 



In this and succeeding lessons both the inhaling and exhal- 
ing should be through the nostrils. 



44 



School Gymnastics 



3. ] 



LESSON XI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Position ! 
f a. Swinging bell to chest, forward and return, right — 
One! 8—8—8. 

b. Foot ! — forward — up — down — place. 8 — 8. 

c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
a. Alternate raising bells sideways and clicking both — 

One ! 16. 
h. Foot ! — side — place — twist — place. 8—^8. 
. c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 

5. Alternate trunk bending sideways and clicking bells, right 
— One! Four times. 

Position ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 



4i5 



5. ALTERNATE TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING BELLS 

1, bend the trunk directly to the 
right side; 2, return to the erect 
position ; 3, bend to the left side ; 
4, return to the erect position ; 5, 
click the thumb ends of the bells; 

6, click the little finger ends ; 7, 
8, repeat the clicking and return 
the hands to the hips immediately 
after the last count. While bend- 
ing the trunk keep both feet flat 
upon the floor and the knees stiff. 
The head should remain in a 
straight line with the axis of the 
trunk. The bending should be to 
an obtuse angle and as far as can 
easily be done without strain. 
There should be no rotating of 
the trunk forward or backward of 
the lateral line. 




46 School Gvmnastics 



3. 



LESSON XII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Position ! 

^ a. Swinging bell to chest, sideways and return, right- 
One! 8—8—8. 
h. Foot ! — forward — up — down — place. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Stepping forward and rising on toes as in 
previous lessons, 
c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
f a. Alternate raising bells sideways and clicking, both — 

4. J ^'''- 

I 5. Foot! — side — place — twist — place. 8 — 8. 

I c. Combine ! 8—8. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 

5. Alternate trunk bending sideways and clicking bells, right 
— One ! Four times. 

Position ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 



47 



Za. SWINGING BELL TO 
CHEST, SIDEWAYS AND 
RETURN 

1, swing the bell to the 
chest as in previous les- 
sons ; 2, extend the arm 
sideways at shoulder level, 
palm to the front, bell 
vertical; 3, return the 
bell to the chest ; 4, arm 
down to position at the 
side. Keep the head 
erect. 

The stretching of the 
arms to the side should 
be vigorous (though with- 
out jerking), that it may 
lift and expand the chest. 




3 c. COMBINATION OF STEPPING FORWARD AND RISING ON TOES 
WITH BELLS TO CHEST, SIDEWAYS, AND RETURN 

1, step forward and swing the bells to the chest; 2, rise on 
the toes and stretch the arms sideways ; 3, heels down and bells 
again to the chest ; 4, heels together and arms down to posi- 
tion at the sides. 



3. 



48 School Gymnastics 



LESSON XIIT 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Position ! 
f a. Swinging bell to chest, sideways and return, right — 
One ! 8—8—8. 
h. Foot ! — forward — up— down — place. 8 — 8. 
c. Combine! 8 — 8. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 

4. Stamping and clicking, right foot — One ! Four times. 

5. Alternate trunk bending sideways and clicking bells, right 
— One ! Four times. 

Position ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. R/unning. 

9. Breathing^Begin ! Four times. 



4. STAMPING AND CLICKING 



1, stamp the right foot ; 2, heels together ; 3, stamp the left 
foot ; 4, heels together ; 5, click the thumb ends of the bells ; 
6, click the opposite ends of the bells ; 7, 8, repeat the clicking, 
and return the hands to the hips immediately after. 



First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 49 

LESSON XIV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Position ! 

3. Swinging bell forward to shoulder^ right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

f a. Rising on toes — One ! IG. 
I h. With arms ! 1(3. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 

5. Stamping and trunk bending alternated with the clicking, 
right foot — One ! Two or four times. 

Cues. — Stamp — heels — stamp — heels ; click, click, click- 
click ; bend — up — bend — up ; click, click, click, click. 

Position ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Punning. 

9. Breathing — Begin! Four times. 



3. SWINGING BELL FORWARD TO 
SHOULDER 

1, swing the bell forward the 
full length of the arm, and when 
it is at shoulder level bend the 
elbow and bring the hand to the 
top of the shoulder, the elbow re- 
maining pointed forward at the 
shoulder level; 2, swing the arm 
forward and downward to posi- 
tion at the side. Keep the head 
and trunk erect. This is an ex- 
cellent exercise for the arm and 
shoulder. 




50 School Gymnastics 

4«. RISING ON TOES 

1, rise on the toes ; 2, lieels down, quietly, and without 
jarring. _______ 

4 6. WITH ARMS 

While rising on the toes raise the arms straight out at the 
sides to shoulder level, palms down, bells horizontal ; arms 
down to position while heels sink. 



5. STAMPING AND TRUNK BENDING ALTERNATED WITH THE 

CLICKING 

1, stamp the right foot ; 2, heels together : 3, stamp the left 
foot ; 4, heels together ; 5, 6, 7, 8, click the bells, pJternating 
the ends beginning with the thumb ends ; 9, bend the trunk to 
the right side ; 10, resume the erect position ; 11, bend to the 
left side ; 12, erect position ; 13, 14, 15, 16, clicking. This 
succession of movements should be directed throughout by the 
cues as given in the lesson, at least when the exercise is new. 
Otherwise it may be unnecessarily difficult for the children. 



First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 51 



LESSOK XV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Position ! 
f a. Swinging bell forward to shonlder, right — One ! 8 — 

3 ! ^-^- 

j h. Stamping ! 8 — 8. 

I c. Combine ! S—^, 

{ a. Ilising on toes — One ! 16. 
4. ' 



\h. With arms! 16. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 

5. Stamping and trunk bending alternated with clicking, right 
foot — One ! Four times. 

Position ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



3 6. STAMPING 

This is the same as given in previous exercises. Stamp 
the foot on the first count and place the heels together on the 
second count. 

3 e. COMBINATION OF STAMPING AND SWINGING BELLS FORWARD 

TO SHOULDERS 

1, stamp the foot and swing both bells forward to the top of 
the shoulders ; 2, heels together and arms forward and down- 
ward to place. 



m 


School Gymnastics 




LESSON XVI 


1. stretching. 




2. Facings. 




Marching. 





3. 



Position! 
' a. Swinging bell forward to shoulder, right — One ! 

8—8—8. 
' h. Stamping! 8—8. 
^ c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

4. Swinging bell sideways to shoulder, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 

5. Stamping and trunk bending alternated with clicking, right 
foot — One ! Twice. 

Position ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 9. Breathing — Begin! Four times. 




4. SWINGING BELL SIDEWAYS TO 
SHOULDER 

1, swing the bell up sideways 
the full length of the arm, turn- 
ing the palm up as it moves; 
when at shoulder level bend the 
elbow and bring the hand to the 
top of the shoulder, the elbow 
extended horizontally at the side ; 
2, swing the bell out again to the 
side, the full length of the arm, 
and down to position, turning the 
palm in as it moves. 

If taken with vigor, this is an 
effective exercise for the side of 
the chest, for the top and back of 
the shoulder, and for the arm 
itself. 



First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 53 



LESSON XYII 



1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marcliinsr. 



'O' 



Position ! 
[a. Swinging bell sideways to shoulder, right — One! 
I 8—8—8. 

3. \ h. On toes ! 8. 

I XoTE. — Rising on toes. 

[ c. Combine ! 8. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 

4. Stamping and trunk bending alternated with clicking, right 
foot — One ! Four times. 

f a. Trunk twisting with point step, right — One ! 8 — 8. 

5. \ b. With clicking ! 8—8. 

[ i^OTE. — As in Lesson VII. 

Position ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND SWINGING BELLS 
SIDEWAYS TO SHOULDERS 

1, rise on the toes and swing the bells sideways to the top 
of the shoulders ; 2, heels and arms down. Keep the head 
erect. 

This is a comparatively difficult balance movement, requiring 
strong work of the ankle, hip, and waist muscles. 



54 



School Gymnastics 



1. 

2. 



3. 



5. 

6. 
7. 
8. 
9. 



a. 



LESSON XVIII 
Stretching. 
Facings. 
Marching. 

Position ! 
Swinging bell to shoulder, forward and sideways alter- 
nately, right — One I 8 — 8. 
Foot ! — forward — place — side— place. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Point step forward and sideways alternately. 
Combine ! 8—8. 
Rising on toes — One ! 16. 
With arms ! 16. 

XoTE.— As in previous lesson. 
Trunk twisting with point step, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
With clicking ! 8—8. 

Position ! 
Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 
Stretching. 
Running. 
Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 55 

Za. SWINGING BELL TO SHOULDER. FORWARD AND SIDEWAYS 

ALTERNATELY 

1, swing the bell forward to the top of the shoulder ; 2, swing 
it forward and downward to position at the side ; 3, swing it 
sideways to the top of the shoulder; 4, swing sideways and 
downward to position at the side. 



3 6. POINT STEP FORWARD AND SIDEWAYS ALTERNATELY 

1, point step forward ; 2, heels together ; 3, point step to the 
side ; 4^ heels together. 

3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND SWINGING BELLS TO 

SHOULDERS 

1, point step forward and swing both bells forward to the 
top of the shoulders ; 2, heels together and bells down through 
the forward position ; 3, point step sideways and swing bells 
sideways to the top of the shoulders; 4, heels together and 
arms down through the side position. 

In these exercises the stretching of the arms should be 
vigorous, and the balance firm on the stationary foot. Keep 
the head erect. 



56 School Gymnastics 

First Series 

Dumb-bells, \ pound 

PROGRAMME FOR SPECIAL EXERCISES 

Bells on hips — Place ! 
a. Clicking — One ! 8. Lesson I. 

h. Foot !— forward— place. 8—8. " I. 

[c. Combine! 8—8. " I. 

Position ! 
' a. Raising bells sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

Lesson V. 
h. Foot !— side— place. 8—8. " III. 

c. Combine! 8—8. " VII. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 

3. Rising on toes four counts and clicking bells four counts — 
One ! Four times. Lesson 11. 

' a. Trunk twisting w^ith point step, right — One ! 8 — 8. 

4. -! Lesson VII. 
h. With clicking ! 8—8. " VII. 

Position ! 
' a. Swinging bell to chest, forward and return, right — 
One ! 8—8—8. Lesson VIII. 

5. "! h. Foot ! — forward — up — down — place. 8 — 8. 

Lesson IX. 

c. Combine! 8—8. " X. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 

6. Stamping and trunk bending alternated with the clicking, 
right foot — One ! Four times. Lesson XIV. 

Position ! 

' a. Swinging bells sideways to shoulder, right — One ! 

8—8-8. Lesson XVI. 

h. On toes ! 8. " XVI. 

c. Combine! 8. " XVII. 



Second Series 



Second year, Boys and Girls 
Wands, 3 feet 

lesso:n^ I 

Note. — For details of preliminaries^ stretching, tactics, 
floor formation, etc., see Explanatory Notes. 
Class — Stand ! 

1. Stretching. 

2. Left— Face! 
Right— Face ! 
Forward — March ! (Take 

wands and hold '' at carry " 

while marching to position 

on floor.) 
Wand in position for work — 
One ! Two ! 

3. Raising wand to chest — One ! 
16. 
Wand at carry— One ! Two ! 

4. Forward — March ! (Eeturn 

wands to place.) 
Class— Halt ! 

5. Stretching. 

6. Forward — March! (to seats). 




WAND AT CAREY 

Hold the wand vertically in 
the right hand so that it rests against the right shoulder, the 
lower end held by the right foreflnger. 

67 



58 



School Gymnastics 




To return the wand 
to the carry position, 
command, " Wand at 
carry — One ! Two ! " 
Kaise the left arm on 
One ! as for position for 
work, and drop that arm 
to position at the side 
on Two! 



WAND IN POSITION FOR 
WORK 

In response to the first 
count of the executive 
command raise the left 
arm, with elbow bent at 
right angles across the 
forehead, palm out, and 
grasp the upper end of 
the wand with the left 
hand. In response to the 
second count bring the 
wand down to a hori- 
zontal position at arm's 
length in front. 




Second Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 



m 



4. RAISING WAND TO p 
CHEST r 

1, bend the elbows ■ 
and lift the fore- i 
arms upward until the 
wand rests horizon- 
tally across the chest ; 
2, lower the wand 
again to position. 

Draw the upper 
arm, including the 
shoulder, well back- 
ward, and close to the 
sides, that the shoul- 
der blades may be 
flattened by the move- 
ment and the chest 
expanded. Keep the 
head erect. 









60 School Gymnastics 



LESSON II 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Note. — The taking of the wands and the com- 
mand " Position for work — One ! Two ! '' will be 
omitted from succeeding lessons, those preliminaries 
being understood, 
a. Eaising wand to chest — One ! 16. 
h. Foot ! — forward — place. Eight 8, left 8. 
j Note. — Point Step forward. 

[c. Combine! 8—8. 

4. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

5. Forward — March ! (Return wands to place.) 

6. Stretching. 

Arms folded behind — Place ! 

7. Breathing — Begin ! 

Position ! 



3. 



3 b. POINT STEP FORWARD. 

1, extend the right foot forward and touch the toe on a line 
directly forward of the position from which it started ; 2, heels 
together. Keep the shoulders (upper part of body) perfectly 
still and the knees stiff. Do not drag or scuff the foot over 
the floor. The weight should remain entirely on the stationary 
foot. 

If correctly taken, this exercise cultivates an erect carriage. 



Second Series, IVamis — Boys and Girls 61 

3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP FORWARD AND RAISING WAND 

TO CHEST 

1, point step forward 
and wand raised to chest 
simultaneously ; 2, wand 
down and heels together. 

Do not interrupt the 
rhythm in passing from 
one of these exercises to 
the next. For the method 
of commanding for this 
series' work, see Refer- 
ence Kote 14. 




7. BREATHING 

Inhale a deep breath 
through the nostrils 
and exhale through the 
mouth. Eepeat three 
times. The folding of 
the arms behind throws 
the chest forward and upward, and holds the shoulders from 
an exaggerated lifting or shrugging during the inhalation. 



62 School Gymnastics 



LESSON III 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

r a. Eaising wand to chest — One ! 16. 

3. \ b. Foot !— forward— place. 8—8. 
ic. Combine! 8—8. 

( a. Trunk bending sideways, Right — One ! 8 — 8. 
• \b. With wand! 8—8. 
6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

Note. — See Reference Note 7. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Three times. 



Second Series, IVamis — Boys and Girls 



63 



4 a. TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 

1, bend the trunk from the Avaist directly to the side; 2, re- 
turn to the erect position. Keep both feet flat upon the floor 
and the knees stiff. The head should remain in a straight 
line with the axis of the trunk. The bending should be to an 
obtuse angle and as far as can easily be done without strain. 
There should be no rotating of the trunk forward or backward 
of the lateral line. During the bending the wand should be 
held at arm's length down in front. 



4 b. TRUNK BENDING SIDE- 
WAYS WITH WAND TO 
CHEST 

1, raise the wand to the 
chest as in previous exer- 
cises; 2, holding the wand 
in this position bend the 
trunk to the side ; 3, resmne 
the erect position, the wand 
still held at the chest; 4, 
wand down. 



9. BREATHING 

While inhaling, raise the 
arms sideways to shoulder 
level ; while exhaling lower 
them to position. 




64 



School Gymnastics 



lesso:n^ IV 



3. 



5. 
6. 

7. 
8. 
9. 



Stretching. 

Facings. 

Marching. 



4. \ 



Aiming, right — One ! 8 — 8. 

Foot ! — side — place. 8 — 8. 
Note. — Point step sideways. 

Combine ! 8—8. 

Trunk bending sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8. 

With wand ! 8—8. 
Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
Forward — March ! (Return wands to place.) 
Stretching. 
Running. 
Breathing — Begin ! Four Times. 



a. 

h. 

c. 

{a. 
b. 



Za. AIMING 

1, swing the wand up to shoulder level at the right side, the 
right arm extended at full length to the right, the grasp of the 
right hand loosened so as to allow the wand to slip through it 
and rest lightly in the crotch of the thumb ; the wand should 
be horizontal, and the left elbow lifted so that it is level with 
the wand ; 2, swing the wand down again to position, the right 
hand resuming its grasp. 

This exercise affects the shoulder and chest muscles and 
those of the arm. 



Second Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 65 

3 h. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS 

1, touch the side of the toe directly to the side, stretching 
the instep as straight as possible; 2, heels together. As in 
the point step forward, the weight should be held steadily 
on the stationary foot. Keep Jhe shoulders squarely to the 
front and the knees stiff. Like the point step forward, this 
exercise cultivates steady poise and erect carriage. 




3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND AIMING SIDEWAYS 

1, aim to the right and take the point step to the right 
simultaneously ; 2, heels together and wand down to position. 



66 ' School Gymnastics 



lesso:n^ V 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

r a. Aiming^ right — One ! 8 — 8. 

b. Eoot ! — side — place. 8 — 8. 

c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

r a. Rising on toes — One ! 8. 
• [h. With wand! 8. 

^ f a. Trunk bending sideways, right — One ! 8—8. 

""• \b. With wand! 8—8. 

6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



4 a. RISING ON TOES 

1, rise on the toes as high as possible; 2, heels down, quietly 
and without jarring. Keep the weight forward (i.e. avoid any 
swaying backward) when the heels are lowered. This should 
be the usual standing position, and no swaying forward should 
be necessary before rising on the toes. 



4 7>. RISING ON TOES WITH WAND TO CHEST 

1, rise on the toes and raise the wand to the chest ; 2, heels 
and wand down. 



Second Series, ]Vands — Boys and Girls 67 



3. 



LESSON VI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Swinging wand forward — One ! 8. 

h. Foot ! — forward — place. 8 — 8. 
Note. — Point step forward. 

c. Combine I 8 — 8. 
f a. Rising on toes — One ! 8. 
I h. With wand ! 8. 

r a. Trunk bending sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
I h. With wand ! 8—8. 

6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. E/unning. 

10. Breathing— Begin ! Four times. 



5. 



J 



68 



School Gymnastics 




SWINGING WAND FORWARD 



1, swing the wand forward and upward to shoulder level at 
arm's length; 2, return the wand to position. Keep the head 
and waist firmly erect, and correct any tendency to throw the 
hips forward or the shoulders backward. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP FORWARD AND SWINGING 

WAND FORWARD 

1, point step and wand forward ; 2, heels together and wand 
down. 



8. BREATHING 



In this and succeeding lessons the exhaling should be through 
the nostrils, the lips being closed. 



Second Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 69 



LESSON YII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

f a. Swinging wand forward — One ! 8. 

3. ] h. Foot 1— forward— place. 8—8. 
Ic. Combine! 8—8. 

r a. Rising on toes — One ! 8. 
'^' [h. With wand! 8. 

a. Raising wand vertically forward, right arm up — 
One! 8—8—8. 

5. \ b. Trunk !— twist— front. 8—8. 
Note. — Trunk twisting. 

;. Combine ! 8—8. 

6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Eunning. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



70 



School Gymnastics 

5 a. RAISING WAND VERTICALLY FORWARD 



1, raise the wand to a vertical position at arm's length in 
front ; 2, return to position. Right arm uppermost eight counts ; 
left eight ; alternate eight. 



5 6. TRUNK TWISTING 

1, twist or rotate the trunk to the side ; 2, return to the for- 
ward position. The movement should be from the ankles, the 
feet remaining firmly in place and flat upon the floor. The 
head should turn with the trunk, but no farther. There should 
be no bending of the trunk sideways. 




V^ITF^S^ 



5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWIST- 
ING AND RAISING WAND VERTI- 
CALLY FORWARD 

1, twist to the right and raise 
the wand vertically forward, the 
right arm up and the left down; 
2, return to the front, wand down 
to position. In twisting to the 
left, the left arm should be up. 



Second Series, IVands — Boys ami Girls 71 

LESSOK VIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a: Alternate swinging wand forward and aiming — One ! 
8—8. 

3. \ h. Foot! — forward — place — side — place. 8 — 8. 
Note. — Alternate point step forward and sideways. 

c. Combine I 8 — 8. 
{ a. Eising on toes — One ! 16. 
1^. With wand! 16. 

f a. Wand vertically forward, right arm up — One ! 
8—8—8. 

h. Trunk !— twist— front. 8—8. 
I c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Forward — March! (Eeturn wands to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



6. 



I 

I 



3 a. ALTERNATE SWINGING WAND FORWARD AND AIMING 
1, swing the wand forward at arm's length to shoulder level ; 
2, down to position ; 3, aim to the right side; 4, down to position. 



3&. ALTERNATE POINT STEP FORWARD AND SIDEWAYS 

1, point step forward ; 2, heels together ; 3, point step side- 
ways ; 4, heels together. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP FORWARD AND SIDEWAYS AND 
SWINGING WAND FORWARD AND AIMING 

1, point step forward and wand forward ; 2, heels together 
and wand down ; 3^ point step to the side and aiming to the 
same side ; 4,, heels together and wand down. 



72 School Gymnastics 



, ^. . . . LESSON IX 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Alternate swinging wand forward and aiming — One ! 

3. ^ b. Foot! — forward — place — side — place. 8 — 8. 
c. Combine! 8 — 8. 

a. Wand to chest, forward and return — One ! 16. 

b. Foot ! — forward — up — down — place. 8 — 8. 
Note. — Stepping forward and rising on toes. 

c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

a. Wand vertically forward, right arm up — One ! 8 — 
8—8. 

b. Trunk !— twist— front. 8—8. 
^c. Combine! 8—8. 

6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Return wands to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Eunning. 

10. Breathing — Begin! Four times. 



Second Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 



73 



4 a. WAND TO CHEST, FORWARD AND RETURN 

1, raise the wand to the chest ; 2, extend the wand forward 
arm's length at shoulder level; 3, wand agam to the chest; 
4, down to position. 

4 6. STEPPING FORWARD AND RISING ON TOES 

1, step forward, both feet flat upon the floor and the weight 
equal ; 2, rise on the toes ; 3, heels down ; 4, heels together. 



4 c. COMBINATION OF STEP- 
PING FORWARD AND 
RISING ON TOES WITH 
WAND TO CHEST. FOR- 
WARD AND RETURN 

1, step forward and 
raise the wand to the 





chest; 2, rise on the toes and 
extend the wand forward; 3, 
heels down and wand again to 
the chest; 4, heels together 
and wand down. 



74 



School Gymnastics 



3. \ 



LESSON X 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Wand to chest, vertical and return — One ! 8 — 8. 
Foot ! — side — face — front— place. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Point step sideways, face to the side and 
return. 

Combine ! 8—8. 

Wand to chest, forward and return — One ! 16. 
Foot ! — forward — up— down — place. 8 — 8. 
Combine ! 8—8. 
J a. Trunk bending sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
^' \b. With wand! 8—8. 

Note. — As in Lesson III et seq. 

6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Return wands to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



a. 
b. 



Second Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 76 

3 a. WAND TO CHEST, VERTICAL AND RETURN 

1, raise the wand to the chest ; 2, extend vertically forward ; 
3, return to the chest ; 4, down to position. 



3 6. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS. FACE TO THE SIDE AND RETURN 

1, point step sideways; 2, face to the side, the feet being 
then in the position of point step forward; 3, return to the 
front, the feet then being in the position of point step sideways ; 
4, heels together. 

3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND FACING SIDEWAYS AND 
WAND TO CHEST AND VERTICALLY FORWARD 

1, point step to the side and wand raised to the chest ; 2, face 
to the side and extend the wand vertically forward ; 3, face to 
the front and return the wand to the chest ; 4, heels together 
and wand down. In facing to the right, the right arm will be 
uppermost in extending the wand, and vice versa. 



76 School Gymnastics 



LESSON XI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Wand to chest, vertical and return — One ! 8 — 8. 
h. Foot ! — side — face — front — place. 8 — 8. 
c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

a. Aiming right and left alternately — One ! 8 — 8. 
h. Foot! — step — up, down; — step — up, down. Forward 
4. \ 8, backward 8. 

Note. — Stepping and rising on toes. 
. Combine! 8—8. 
fa. Trunk bending sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
I h. With wand ! 8—8. 

6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



Second Series, JVamis — Boys and Girls 77 

4 a. AIMING RIGHT AND LEFT ALTERNATELY 

1, aim to the right; 2, swing the wand down in front of and 
across the body to the left; 3, aim to the left; 4, swing the 
wand down and across to the right; 5, aim to the right; 
6, 7, continue to alternate the direction of the aiming, swing- 
ing the wand down in the transition ; 8 wand down to position 
in front. 



4 6. STEPPING AND RISING ON TOES 

1, step forward with the right foot as for walking ; 2, bring 
up the left heel beside the right, at the same time quickly 
rising on the toes and lowering the heels to position ; 3, step 
forward with the left foot ; 4, bring up the right foot, rise on 
the toes and lower the heels to position ; 5, step backward 
with the right foot; 6, draw the left foot back beside the 
right, rise on the toes and lower the heels to position ; 7, 8, the 
same with the left foot leading. Eepeat. 



4 c. COMBINATION OF STEPPING AND RISING ON TOES AND AIMING 

1, step forward with the right foot, rise on the toes, and aim 
to the right ; 2, swing the wand down across the body as the 
heels are lowered; 3, 4, repeat with the other foot leading 
and the wand swung across to the aiming position on that 
side. The combination of these two exercises will fall into a 
natural, swinging rhythm, the aiming and the rising on toes 
coming together and the downward motion of the wand and 
heels coinciding. Waltz time will facilitate the mastery of 
this rhythm. 



78 



School Gymnastics 



1. 

2. 



5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

10. 



LESSON XII 

Stretching. 

Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Wand to chest, vertical and return — One ! 

Foot ! — side — face — front — place. 8 — 8. 

Combine ! 8—8. 

Aiming right and left alternately — One ! 8 

Foot ! — step — up, down. 8 — 8. 

Combine ! 8—8. 

Wand over head — One ! 16. 

Trunk !— twist— front. 8—8. 
Note. — Trunk twisting. 

Combine ! 8—8. 
Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
Forward — March! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
Stretching. 
E/unning. 
Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



8—8. 



b. 
c. 
a. 
b, 
c. 
a. 
b. 

c. 



Second Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 



79 




5 a. WAND OVER HEAD 

1, raise the wand in a horizontal position directly over the 
head, the elbows straight and the head erect ; 2, wand down 
to position. 



5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING AND WAND OVER HEAD 

1, twist the trunk to the side and raise the wand over the 
head ; 2, return to the front, the wand down to position. 



80 School Gymnastics 



LESSON XIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Alternate wand to chest and aiming, right — One ! 8 — 8. 

b. On toes ! — up — down— side— place. 

3. j Note. — Alternate rising on toes and point step 
sideways. 

^ c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

f a. Aiming right and left alternately — One ! 8 — 8. 

4. \ b. Foot ! — step — up, down. 8 — 8. 
Ic. Combine! 8—8. 

( a. Wand over head — One ! 16. 

5. ] b. Trunk !— twist— front. 8—8. 
Ic. Combine! 8—8. 

6. Wand at carry — One 1 Two ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Eunning. 

Arms folded behind — Place ! 
10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



Second Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 81 

3 a. ALTERNATE WAND TO CHEST AND AIMING 

1, raise the wand to the chest ; 2, wand down to position ; 
3, aim to the right side ; 4, wand down to position. 



3 6. ALTERNATE RISING ON TOES AND POINT STEP SIDEWAYS 

1, rise on the toes ; 2, heels down ; 3, point step sideways ; 
4, heels together. 

3 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND POINT STEP SIDEWAYS 
WITH WAND TO CHEST AND AIMING 

1, rise on the toes and raise the wand to the chest ; 2, heels 
and wand down ; 3, aim to the right side and take the point 
step to the left ; 4, heels together and wand down. In aiming 
to the left take the point step to the right. 



82 School Gymnastics 

LESSON XIV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

r a. Alternate wand to chest and aiming — One ! 8 — 8. 

3. ^ h. On toes ! — up — down— side — place. 8 — 8. 
U. Combine! 8—8. 

a. Alternate point step and stepping and rising on toes, 

right — One ! Forward 16, backward 16. 
h. With aiming ! 16—16. 
a. Wand over head — One ! 16. 
h. Trunk !— twist— front. 8—8. 
c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Return wands to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Eunning. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



4. 



5. 



4 a. ALTEKNATE POINT STEP AND STEPPING AND EISING ON TOES 

1, point step forward with the right foot ; 2, heels together ; 
3, point step forward with the left foot ; 4, heels together ; 
5, 6, ^' step, up, down," with the right foot leading ; 7, 8, " step, 
up, down," with the left foot leading. Eepeat through 16 
counts ; on the second 16 step backward instead of forward. 



4 6. COMBINATION OF ALTERNATE POINT STEP AND STEPPING 
AND RISING ON TOES WITH AIMING 

During the stepping and rising on toes aim to the sides as 
in previous lessons. The wand remains down in front during 
the point steps. 



Second Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 83 



LESSON XV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

j- a. Alternate wand to chest and aiming — One ! 8 — 8. 

3. ] h. On toes ! — up — down — side — place. 8 — 8. 
ic. Combine! 8—8. 

a. Alternate point step and stepping and rising on toes, 

right— One ! 16—16. 
h. With aiming! 16—16. 

a. Wand to chest and over head alternately — One ! 16. 
h. Trunk ! — bend— up — twist — front. 8 — 8. 
6. \ Note. — Alternate trunk bending sideways and 

twisting, 
c. Combine ! 8^ — 8. 

6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



84 School Gymnastics 

5 a. WAND TO CHEST AND OVER HEAD ALTERNATELY 

1, wand to the chest; 2, wand down to position; 3, wand 
over head ; 4, wand down to position. 



5 h. ALTERNATE TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND TWISTING 

1, bend the trunk to the side ; 2, resume the erect position ; 
3, twist the trunk to the same side ; 4, face to the front. 



5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND TWISTING 
WITH WAND TO CHEST AND OVERHEAD 

1, raise the wand to the chest and bend the trunk to the 
side simultaneously ; 2, resume the erect position, wand down 
in front ; 3, raise the wand over the head and twist the trunk 
to the side ; 4, face to the front, wand down to position. 



' 



Second Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 85 



LESSON XVI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Aiming sideways, wand forward and return, right ! 
—One ! 8—8. 

b. Foot !— side — forward— side — place. 8 — 8. 
Note. — Point step sideways, forward, and return. 

c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

a. Alternate point step and stepping and rising on toes, 

4. ] right— One! 16—16. 

b. With aiming ! 16—16. 

f a. Wand to chest and over head alternately — One ! 16. 

5. ] 6. Trunk — bend — up — twist — front. 16 — 16. 
i c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Eunning. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



86 School Gymnastics 

3 a, AIMING SIDEWAYS, WAND FORWARD AND RETURN 

1, aim to the side ; 2, swing the wand from this to the for- 
ward position as in Lesson VI ; 3, aim again to the same side ; 
4, wand down to position. 



3 6. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS, FORWARD AND RETURN 

1. point step to the side ; 3, point step forward ; 3, point 
step again to the side ; 4, heels together. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND WAND, SIDEWAYS, 
FORWARD AND RETURN 

1, point step and aiming to the side ; 2, point step forward, 
and wand forward ; 3, point step and aiming again to the side ; 
4, heels together and wand down to position. 



Second Series. Wands — Boys and Girls 87 



3. 



LESSON XVII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Aiming sideways, wand forward and return, right 

_One! 8—8. 
h. Foot ! — side — forward — side — place. 8 — 8. 
c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

a. Wand forward twice and to chest twice — One ! 16. 
h. Foot! forward — place— change — place; twist — front 

— change — front. 16. 

Note. — Point step and trunk twisting. 
0. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
f a. Wand to chest and over head alternately — One! 8. 

5. \h. Trunk ! — bend — up — twist — front. 8 — 8. 
[c. Combine! 8—8. 

6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Eunning. 

10. Breathing — Begin I Four times. 



88 School Gymnastics 

4 a. WAND FORWARD TWICE AND TO CHEST TWICE 

1, raise the wand forward ; 2, down to position ; 3, 4, repeat ; 
5, wand to chest ; 6, down to position ; 7, 8, repeat. 



4 6. POINT STEP AND TRUNK TWISTING 

1, point step forward with the right foot ; 2, heels together ; 
3, point step forward with the left foot ; 4, heels together ; 

6, twist the trunk to the right and extend the right foot in a 
point step in front of the body as it then faces ; 6, return to the 
front, heels together ; 1, 8, repeat the twisting to the opposite 
side. 

4 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND TRUNK TWISTING WITH 
WAND FORWARD AND TO CHEST 

1, point step forward with the right foot and raise the wand 
forward ; 2, heels together and wand down ; 3, raise the wand 
forward again and take the point step forward with the left 
foot ; 4, wand down and heels together ; 6, twist to the right, 
the right foot extended in a point step and the wand at the 
chest ; 6, return to the front, heels together and wand down ; 

7, 8, repeat to the opposite side. 



Second Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 89 



LESSON XVIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Wand forward twice and to chest twice — One ! 16. 

b. Foot ! — forward — place — change — place ; twist — front 
— change — front. 16. 

c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 

a. Wand over head — One ! 8. 

b. On toes! 8. 
Note. — Eising on toes. 

c. Combine ! 8. 

a. Wand to chest and over head alternately — One ! 8. 

b. Trunk ! — bend — up — twist — front. 8 — 8. 

c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Return wands to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Eunning. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND WAND OVER HEAD 

1, rise on the toes and raise the wand over the head; 2, 
heels and wand down. Keep the head erect. 



90 School Gymnastics 



2. 



3. 



4. 



6 



Second Series 

Wands, 3 feet 
PROGRAMME FOE SPECIAL EXERCISES 

a. Aiming, right — One ! 8 — 8. Lesson IV. 

h. Foot! — side — place. 8 — 8. 
. c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

' a. Wand vertically forward, right arm up — One ! 
8—8—8. Lesson VII. 

] h. Trunk !— twist— front. 8—8. 
[c. Combine! 8—8. 

a. Wand to chest, forward and return — One ! 16. 

Lesson IX. 

b. Foot ! — forward — up — down — place. 8 — 8. 

c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

a. Wand to chest and overhead, alternately — One ! 16. 

Lesson XV. 
h. Trunk ! — bend — up — twist — front. 16 or 32. 



c. Combine I 8 — 8. 

a. Wand over head — One ! 8. Lesson XVIII. 
5. \ b. On toes ! 8. 

c. Combine ! 8. 

' a. Aiming right and left, alternately — One ! 8 — 8. 

Lesson XL 

b. Foot ! — step — up, down ; step — up, down. 8 — 8. 

c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 



Third Series 

Third year, boys and girls 

Dumb-bells, ^ pound 

LESSON I 

Note. — For details of preliminaries, stretching, tactics, 
floor formations, etc., see Explanatory Notes. 
Class — Stand ! 

1. Stretching. 

2. Left— Face! 
Right— Face ! 

Forward — March ! (Take bells and march to position on 

floor.) 
^ a. Raising bell forward, right — One ! Eight 8, left 8 
both 8. 

3. J h. Foot ! — forward — place. 8 — 8. 
Note. — Point step forward. 

c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

4. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 
Class— Halt ! 

5. Stretching. 

6. Forward — March! (To seats.) 



91 



92 



School Gymnastics 

3 a. RAISING BELLS FORWARD 



1, raise the bell at full arm's length forward and upward to 
shoulder level, the bell vertical ; 2, lower again to the side. 
Keep the head erect, and avoid any forward motion of the 
hips or backward inclination of the shoulders. 



3 6. POINT STEP FORWARD 

1, extend the foot forward, and touch the toe on a line 
directly forward of the position from which it started ; 2, heels 
together. Keep the body firmly poised, with the shoulders 
(upper part of the body) perfectly still, and the knees stiff. 
Do not drag or scuff the foot over the floor. The weight 
should remain entirely on the stationary foot. 




3 e. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP 
FORWARD AND RAISING BELLS 
FORWARD 

1, point step forward with the 
right foot and both bells raised 
forward ; 2, heels together and 
bells down. 



3. 



Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 93 

LESSON II 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Raising bell sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
h. Foot ! — side — place. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Point step sideways. 
c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

a. Clicking bells vertically forward — One ! 8. 
h. Trunk ! — twist — front — left — front. 8. 

Note. — Trunk twisting, right and left alternately. 

c. Alternate ! — twist — place — click — place. 16. 

d. Combine! 8. 

5. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 

6. Stretching. 

Arms folded behind — Place ! 

7. Breathing — Begin! 

Position ! 



RAISING BELL SIDEWAYS 



1, raise the bell at full arm's length sideways to shoulder 
level, bell horizontal ; 2, lower again to the side.* Keep the 
waist and head erect, and make the movement a strong pull 
throughout that it may lift and expand the chest. 



3 6. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS 

1, touch the side of the toe directly to the side, stretching 
the instep as straight as possible ; 2, heels together. As in the 
point step forward, the weight should be held steadily on the 
stationary foot that a firmly poised carriage may be cultivated 
by the exercise. Keep the shoulders squarely to the front and 
the knees stiff. 



94 



School Gymnastics 




3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND RAISING BELLS SIDEWAYS 

1, point step tio the side and both bells raised sideways; 
2, heels together and bells down to position. 



4 a. CLICKING BELLS VERTICALLY FORWARD 

1, swing the bells up to shoulder level at arm's length in 
front and click the four lobes together, the bells held verti- 
cally ; 2, lower the bells again to the sides. 

Avoid bending backward from the waist as the arms are 
stretched forward, and be sure that the chest is thrown well 
forward as the arms return to position at the sides. 



Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 



95 



4 h. TRUNK TWISTING, RIGHT AND LEFT ALTERNATELY 

1, twist or rotate the trunk to the right side ; 2, return to the 
forward position ; 3, 4, twist to tlie left side and return. The 
movement shoukl be from the ankles, the feet remaining firmly 
in place and flat upon the floor. The head should turn with 
the trunk, but no farther. There should be no bending side- 
ways at the waist. 



4 c. ALTERNATE TRUNK TWISTING AND CLICKING BELLS 

1, twist the trunk to the right ; 2, return to the front ; 3, click 
the bells forward ; 4, bells down to the sides ; 6, twist the trunk 
to the left ; 6, face to the front ; 7, click the bells ; 8, position. 



^d. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING 
AND CLICKING BELLS 

1, twist to the right and click the bells 
in front of the body as it then faces ; 2, re- 
turn to the front, bells down to the sides ; 
3, twist to the left and click the bells in 
front; 4, position. 



7. BREATHING 

Inhale a deep breath through the nostrils 
and exhale through the mouth. Repeat 
three times. The breath should be much - 
deeper than the normal. 

The folding of the arms behind keeps the shoulders from an 
exaggerated shrugging or lifting during the inhalation. 




96 School Gymnastics 



3. 



4. 



LESSON III 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Swinging bell forward to shoulder, right — One! 

8—8—8. 
h. Foot ! — forward — place. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Point step forward, 
c. Combine! 8 — 8. 

a. Eaising bell sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
6. On toes ! — up — down. 8. 

Note. — Rising on toes. 

c. Alternate ! — up — down — arms— down. 8. 

d. Combine! 8. 

a. Clicking bells vertically forward — One ! 8. 
h. Trunk ! — twist — front — left — front. 8. 

c. Alternate ! — twist — place — click — place. 16. 

d. Combine ! 8. 

6. Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

Note. — See Eeference Note 7. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



Third Series, Dumb-bells ^ Boys and Girls 



97 




Za. SWINGING BELL FORWAKD 
TO SHOULDER 

1, swing the bell forward and 
upward the full length of the 
arm as in the raising forward, 
and when at shoulder level bend 
the elbow and bring the hand 
to the top of the shoulder, the 
elbow remaining pointed for- 
ward at shoulder level ; 2, swing 
the arm forward and downward 
to position at the side. Keep 
the head and torso erect. Be 
sure that the arm is stretched to 
its full length in passing through 
the forward position. Avoid 
tipping the trunk backward by 
keeping the hips well back. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP FORWARD AND SWINGING 
BELLS FORWARD TO SHOULDERS 

1, point step forward with the right foot and swing both 
bells forward to the top of the shoulders ; 2, heels together 
and bells forward and downward to position. 



9. BREATHING 



While inhaling raise the arms sideways to shoulder level ; 
while exhaling lower them to position. 



98 



School Gymnastics 



46. RISING ON TOES 

1, rise on the toes as high as possible ; 2, heels down, quietly 
and without jarring. The return to position should not be 
made until the count for it is given, that the exercise may lose 
nothing of its power to cultivate good balance a,nd erect car- 
riage. Be sure that the weight is not allowed to sway back 
over the heels when the latter are lowered. 



4 c. ALTERNATE RAISING BELLS SIDEWAYS AND RISING ON TOES 

1, rise on the toes; 2, heels down; 3, raise the bells side- 
ways ; 4, bells down. 







4 d. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND RAISING BELLS SIDEWAYS 

1, rise on the toes and raise the bells sideways to shoulder 
level; 2, heels and bells down to position. 



I 



Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 99 



LESSON IV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Swinging bell sideways to shoulder, right — One 
8—8—8. 

3. \ b. Foot !— side— place. 8—8. 
Note. — Point step sideways. 

c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
f a. Raising bell sideways, right — One! 8 — 8 — 8. 
, ! b. On toes ! 8. 

I c. Alternate ! — up — down — arms — down. 8. 
[ d. Combine ! 8. 

a. Clicking bells vertically forward — One ! 8. 

b. Trunk ! — twist — front — left — front. 8. 

c. Alternate ! — twist — place — click — place. 16. 

d. Combine ! 8. 

6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



L«rc. 



100 



School Gymnastics 



3 a. SWINGING BELL SIDEWAYS TO SHOULDER 

1, swing the bell upward at 
the side the full length of the 
arm, turning the palm upward 
as it moves ; when at shoulder 
level, bend the elbow and bring 
the hand to the top of the 
shoulder, the elbow remaining 
extended horizontally at the 
side ; 2, swing the bell out again 
to the side the full length of 
the arm, and down to position, 
turning the palm down and in 
as it moves. 

This is a very effective exer- 
cise for the side of the chest, for 
the top and back of the shoulder, 
and for the arm itself. Keep the 
head erect. 




3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND SWINGING BELLS 
SIDEWAYS TO SHOULDERS 

1, point step to the side and swing both bells sideways to the 
top of the shoulders ; 2, heels together, and bells outward and 
downward to position. 



Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 101 



3. 



4. 



LESSON V 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Swinging bell sideways to shoulder, right — One ! 

8—8—8. 
h. Foot ! — side — place. 8 — 8. 
c. Combine! 8 — 8. 
a. Clicking bells over head — One ! 8. 
h. On toes! 8. 

Note. — Eising on toes, 
c. Alternate! 8. 
cL Combine ! 8. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 
a. Alternate point step forward and trunk bending side- 
ways, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
h. With clicking! 8—8. 

Position I 

6. Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



f 



4 a. CLICKING BELLS OVER HEAD 

1, swing the bells upward at the sides with a full sweep of 
the arms and click the thumb ends over the head ; 2, swing the 
arms outward and downward again to position at the sides. 
Keep the head erect. 

This is an excellent exercise for the chest and shoulders, 
if the arms are stretched to their full extent throughout the 
movements. 



102 



School Gymnastics 



4 c. ALTERNATE RISING ON TOES AND CLICKING BELLS OVER HEAD 

1, rise on the toes ; 2, heels down ; 3, click the bells over the 
head ; 4, bells down. 




4rf. COMBINATION OF RISING ON 
TOES AND CLICKING BELLS OVER 
HEAD 

1, rise on the toes and click the 
bells over the head ; 2, bells and 
heels down to position. 



6 a. ALTERNATE POINT STEP FORWARD AND TRUNK BENDING 

SIDEWAYS 

1, point step forward with the right foot ; 2, heels together ; 
3, point step forward with the left foot; 4, heels together; 

5, bend the trunk from the waist directly to the right side ; 

6, resume the erect position; 7, bend the trunk to the left 
side ; 8, resume the erect position. 

In bending the trunk keep both feet flat upon the floor and 
the knees stiff. The head should remain in a straight line with 



Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 103 

the axis of the trunk. The bending shoukl be to an obtuse 
angle, and as far as can easily be done without strain. There 
shoukl be no rotating of the trunk forward or backward of the 
lateral line. The bending should be far enough to exert a 
strong pressure upon the internal organs, and thus affect the 
circulation and digestion. 





5 ft. ALTERNATE POINT STEP FORWARD AND TRUNK BENDING 
SIDEWAYS WITH CLICKING 

Click the thumb ends of the bells at arm's length down in 
front while taking the point step ; return the bells to the 
hips as the heels come together. The bells remain on the hips 
during the trunk bending. 



104 School Gymnastics 



LESSON VI 

1. Stretching. ^ 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 
a. Extending bells sideways, clicking forward and re- 
turning, both — One ! 16. 
h. Foot ! — side — forward — side — place. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Point step sideways, forward, and return. 
c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

Position ! 
a. Clicking over head — One ! 8. 
h. On toes ! 8. 

c. Alternate ! 8. 

d. Combine! 8. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 
f a. Alternate point step forward and trunk bending side- 

5. \ ways, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
[h. With clicking ! 8—8. 

Position ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 105 

3 a. EXTENDING BELLS SIDEWAYS, CLICKING FORWARD, AND 

RETURNING 

1, extend the bells sideways at full arm's length, palms down 
and bells horizontal ; 2, keeping the elbows straight, swing the 
bells forward and click the thumb ends at shoulder level in 
front ; 3, return again to the side position ; 4, bells on hips. 
Keep the head erect. 

This succession of movements is admirable for chest ex- 
pansion. 



Zh. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS, FORWARD, AND RETURN 

1, point step to the side ; 2, move the same foot to the point 
step forward ; 3, return the foot to the point step sideways ; 
4, heels together. 

This is an admirable balance exercise if the movement be 
made a full circular sweep from the hip joint and the shoulders 
are held squarely to the front — not allowed to swing to the 
side as the foot moves. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP SIDEWAYS, FORWARD, AND RE- 
TURNING WITH BELLS SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING FORWARD 

1, point step, and both arms sideways ; 2, point step forward 
and click the bells in front ; 3, foot and bells again to the side ; 
4, heels together and bells on hips. 



106 



School Gymnastics 



LESSON VII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 

a. Extending bells sideways, clicking forward and return- 
ing, both — One ! 16. 

b. Foot ! — side — forward — side — place. 8 — 8. 

c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

a. Extending bells sideways, both — One ! 8. 
h. Knee ! — up — place. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Lifting knee, 
c. Alternate ! — knee — place — arms — place. 16. 
^ d. Combine ! 8. 
r a. Alternate point step forward and trunk bending side- 

5. \ ways, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
[ b. With clicking ! 8—8. 

Position ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



Third Series, Dumb-bells ■— Boys and Girls 107 



4 h. LIFTING KNEE 

1, lift the knee upward and for- 
ward until the thigh is at right 
angles with the trunk of the body, 
and the lower leg is at right angles 
with the thigh, the toe depressed 
and pointed downward; 2, heels 
together. Keep the trunk erect. 

This exercise affects chiefly the 
muscles of the thigh and abdomen. 
It is an admirable balance move- 
ment. 




4 c. ALTERNATE LIFTING KNEE AND EXTENDING BELLS SIDEWAYS 

1, lift the right knee; 2, heels together; 3, extend both bells 
sideways ; 4, bells on hips ; 5, lift the left knee ; 6, heels 
together ; 7, extend both arms ; 8, bells on hips. 



4d. COMBINATION OF LIFTING KNEE AND EXTENDING BELLS 

SIDEWAYS 

1, lift the knee and extend both bells to the side ; 2, heels 
together and bells on hips. Alternate the knees in this combi- 
nation. Keep the shoulders and head erect. 



108 School Gymnastics 



LESSON VIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Swinging bell forward to shoulder, extending forward 

and returning, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
h. Foot ! — forward — up — down — place. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Stepping forward and rising on toes. 
c. Combine! 8 — 8. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 
a. Extending bells sideways, both — One ! 8. 
h. Knee ! — up — place. 8 — 8. 

c. Alternate ! — knee — place — arms — place. 16. 

d. Combine 18. 

Position ! 

a. Clicking bells forward and backward — One. 8. 
h. Trunk !— twist— front. 8. 
Note. — Trunk twisting, 
c. Alternate ! — twist — front — click — click. 16. 
, d. Combine ! 8—8. 

6. Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



3«. SWINGING BELL FORWARD TO SHOULDER, EXTENDING 
FORWARD AND RETURNING 

1, swing the bell forward to the top of the shoulder ; 2, ex- 
tend the bell at arm's length forward at shoulder level, bell 
vertical; 3, return to the shoulder; 4, swing forward and 
downward to position at the side. 



Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 109 

Zh. STEPPING FORWARD AND RISING ON TOES 

1, step forward, both feet flat upon the floor and with the 
weight resting equally upon them ; 2, rise on the toes ; 3, heels 
down ; 4, heels together. 

Because of the elongated base this is a more difficult balance 
movement than the rising on toes with the heels together. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF STEPPING FORWARD AND RISING ON TOES 
WITH BELLS TO SHOULDERS AND FORWARD 



1, step forward and swing 
both bells forward to the 
top of the shoulders ; 2, rise 
on the toes and extend the 





bells forward; 3, heels down and 
bells again on the shoulders; 4, 
heels together and bells forward 
and downward to position at the 
sides. 



110 



School Gymnastics 





5 a. CLICKING BELLS FORWARD AND BACKWARD 

1, click the thumb ends of the bells at arm's length down in 
front; 2, swing the bells around the hips and click the same 
ends at arm's length down behind; 3, 4, 5^ 6, 7, continue to 
alternate the forward and backward clicking ; 8, arms to posi- 
tion at the sides. Keep the head erect and the chest well 
forward. 

If the points of posture noted be carefully observed, this is 
an excellent exercise for the chest and shoulder blades. 



Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 111 

6 c. TRUNK TWISTING ALTERNATED WITH CLICKING BELLS 
FORWARD AND BACKWARD 

1, twist the trunk to the right; 2, return to the front; 
3j click the bells in front ; 4, click the bells behind ; 5, twist 
the trunk to the left ; 6, return to the front ; 7, click the bells 
in front ; 8, click the bells behind. 



5 d. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING WITH CLICKING BELLS 
FORWARD AND BACKWARD 

1, twist to the right and click the bells in front of the body 
as it then faces ; 2, face to the front and click the bells behind ; 
3, twist to the left and click the bells in front ; 4, face to the 
front and click the bells behind. 



112 



School Gymnastics 



LESSON IX 



Stretching. 

Facings. 

Marching. 



a. 



h, 
c. 
a. 
K 

c. 
a. 
b, 
c. 
d. 



Swinging bell forward to shoulder, extending forward 

and returning, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

Foot ! — forward — up — down — place. 8 — 8. 

Combine ! 8—8. 

Swinging bells sideways and clicking, both — One ! 8. 

On toes ! 8. 

Note. — Eising on toes. 

Combine ! 8. 

Clicking bells forward and backward — One ! 8. 

Trunk ! — twist — front. 8. 

Alternate ! — twdst — front — click — click. 

Combine ! 8—8. 
Forw^ard — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 
Stretching. 
Running. 
Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



16. 



Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 113 

4 a. SWINGING BELLS SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING 

1, raise the bells straight out at the sides at shoulder level, 
bells horizontal; 2, swing the bells down in front and click 
the thumb ends ; 3, swing them up again to the side position ; 
4, 5, 6, 7, continue to alternate the two movements as above ; 
8, bells down to position at the sides. 



4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND SWINGING BELLS 
SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING 

1, raise the bells to the sides and rise on toes ; 2, heels down 
and click the bells in front 



114 School Gymnastics 



LESSON X ■ 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Swinging bell sideways to shoulder, extending sideways 

and returning, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
h. Foot ! — side — face — front— heels. 8 — 8- 

Note. — Point step and facing sideways, 
c. Combine! 8 — 8. 
( a. Swinging bells sideways and clicking, both — One ! 8. 
h. On toes ! 8. 



5. 



. Combine ! 8. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 
' a. Swinging bells sideways to shoulders, both — One ! 8. 
h. Trunk ! — bend — up — left — up. 8. 

Note. — Trunk bending sideways, right and left 
alternately. 

c. Alternate ! — bend — up^arms— place. 16. 

d. Combine ! 8. 

Position ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



3 a. SWINGING BELL SIDEWAYS TO SHOULDER, EXTENDING 
SIDEWAYS AND RETURNING 

1, swing the bell sideways to the top of the shoulder ; 2, ex- 
tend the arm sideways, elbows straight, palm up, bell hori- 
zontal ; 3, return to the shoulder ; 4, swing sideways and 
downward to position at the side. 



Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 



115 



Zh. POINT STEP AND FACING SIDEWAYS 

1, point step to the side ; 2, face to the side, the feet being 
then in the position of point step forward; 3, return to the 
front, the feet being then in the position of point step position 
sideways ; 4, heels together. 




3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND FACING SIDEWAYS WITH 
SWINGING BELLS TO SHOULDERS AND SIDEWAYS 

1, point step to the side and swing both bells sideways to 
the top of the shoulders ; 2, face to the side and extend the 
bells sideways at shoulder level ; 3, return to the front, bells 
on the shoulders ; 4, heels together and swing the bells out- 
ward to the sides and downward to position. 



116 



School Gymnastics 




5 c. ALTERNATE TRUNK BENDING 
SIDEWAYS AND SWINGING 
BELLS SIDEWAYS TO SHOUL- 
DERS 

1, bend the trunk to the right 
side ; 2, resume the erect posi- 
tion; 3, swing both bells side- 
ways to the shoulders ; 4, ex- 
tend the bells sideways and 
return them to the hips ; 5, bend 
the trunk to the left ; 6, erect 
position; 7, swing the bells 
sideways to the top of the 
shoulders ; 8, return the bells 
to the hips. 



5 d. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND SWINGING 

BELLS TO SHOULDERS 

1, bend the trunk to the side and swing the bells to the top 
of the shoulders ; 2, resume the erect position, extend the bells 
sideways and return them to the hips. Alternate the bending 
from right to left. 



Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 117 

LESSON XI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Swinging bell sideways to shoulder, extending side- 
ways and returning right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
h. Foot ! — side — face — front — heels. 8 — 8. 
c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

a. Swinging bells right and left alternately— One ! 8. 
h. On toes !— right— left. 8. 

Note. — Swinging upon toes. 
c. Combine ! 8. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 
a. Swinging bells sideways to shoulders, both — One ! 8. 
h. Trunk ! — bend — up — left — up. 8. 
c. Alternate ! — bend — up — arms — place. 16. 
, d. Combine ! 8. 

Position ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



4 a. SWINGING BELLS RIGHT AND LEFT ALTERNATELY 

1, swing both bells to the right side, the right arm extended 
at full length, palm to the front, the left arm bent across the 
front of the body, palm facing inward, both bells vertical; 
2, swing the arms down across the front of the body with a 
full downward extension of the arms in the transition, and 
raise them to the same position on the left side that they had 
on the opposite side on the first count ; 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, continue to 
swing the arms from side to side ; 8, bells down to position. 

This is a very effective exercise for the top and back of the 
shoulders. 



118 



School Gymnastics 



4&. SWINGING UP ON TOES 

1, take a short step to the right and rise on the toes ; 2, keep- 
ing the feet in the same relative position, lower the heels, 
transfer the weight mainly to the left foot and swing up on 
the toes on that side ; 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 8, continue to swing from 
one side to the other, rising on the toes in the terminal posi- 
tions as above. Keep the shoulders squarely to the front. 




4 c. COMBINATION OF SWING- 
ING UP ON TOES WITH BELLS 

1, swing up on the toes 
toward the right side and 
swing both arms to the right ; 
2, swing upon the toes toward 
the left side and swing both 
arms to the left ; 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 
continue to alternate the di- 
rection of the swinging as 
above ; 8, heels together and 
bells down to position at the 
sides. 



I ■__- 



Third Series, Dumb-bells — Bovs and Girls 119 



6. 



3. \ 



LESSON XII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Clicking bells forward and backward — One ! 16. 
h. Foot ! — forward — raise— down — place. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Point step forward, and raising knee. 
, c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
r a. Swinging bells right and left alternately — One ! 8 
4. I h. On toes !— right— left. 8. 
I c. Combine ! 8. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 
a. Swinging bells sideways to shoulder, both — One ! 
h. Trunk ! — bend — up — left — up. 8. 

c. Alternate ! — bend — up — arms — place. 16. 

d. Combine ! 8. 

Position ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Punning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



120 School Gymnastics 

3 h. POINT STEP FORWAUD AND RAISING KNEE 

1, point step forward ; 2, from this position raise the knee 
as in previous lessons; 3, return to the point step; 4, heels 
together. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND RAISING KNEE, WITH 
CLICKING FORWARD AND BACKWARD 

1, point step forward and click the bells in front; 2, raise 
the knee and click the bells behind; 3, point step forward 
again and click the bells in front ; 4, heels together and bells 
to position at the sides. 



Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 121 



LESSON XIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

r a. Clicking bells forward and backward — One ! 16. 

3. -j h. Foot ! — forward — raise — down — place. 8 — 8. 
[c. Combine! 8—8. 

a. Swinging bells right and left alternately — One ! 8. 

4. \ b. On toes !— right— left. 8. 
c. Combine ! 8. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 
a. Alternate swinging bells sideways to shoulders and 

clicking over head, both — One 1 16. 
». Trunk ! — bend — up — rise — down. 16. 

Note. — Alternate trunk bending sideways and rising 
on toes. 
. Combine ! 16. 

Position ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



122 School Gymnastics 

5 a. ALTERNATE SWINGING BELLS SIDEWAYS TO SHOULDERS AND 

CLICKING OVER HEAD 

1, swing the bells sideways to the top of the shoulders ; 
2, return the bells to the hips ; 3, click the thumb ends of the 
bells directly over the head ; 4, bells on hips. Keep the head 
erect. 



5 h. ALTERNATE TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND RISING ON TOES 

1, bend the trunk to the right side ; 2, resume the erect posi- 
tion ; 3, rise on the toes ; 4, heels down ; 5, 6, 7, 8, repeat but 
bend to the left side. 



5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND RISING ON 
TOES, WITH BELLS ON SHOULDERS AND CLICKING OVER HEAD 

1, bend the trunk to the right side and swing both bells to 
the top of the shoulders ; 2, resume the erect position, bells 
on hips ; 3, rise on the toes and click the bells over the head ; 
4, heels down and bells on hips. 



Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys ami Girls 123 



LESSON XIV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Bells on hips, sideways and return, right — One! 

8—8—8. 

3. <i b. Foot! — forward — bend — up — place. 8 — 8. 
Note. — Stepping and bending forward. 

, c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 
r a. Clicking bells vertically forward — One I 8. 

Note. — As in Lesson 11. 

b. Foot ! — forward — place — left — place — walk, two, three 
—heels. 16. 

Note. — Alternate point step and walking. 

c. Combine ! 16. 

a. Alternate swinging bells sideways to shoulders and 
clicking over head, both — One ! 16. 

b. Trunk ! — bend — up — rise — down. 16. 

c. Combine ! 16. 

Position ! 

6. Forward — March I (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. '' 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



4. i 



3 a. BELLS ON HIPS, SIDEWAYS AND RETURN 

1^ both bells on the hips ; 2, extend the bells sideways to 
full arm's length at shoulder level, turning the palms upward 
as they move, bells horizontal ; 3, return the bells to the hips ; 
4, bells down to position. 



124 



School Gymnastics 



3 6. STEPPING AND BENDING FORWARD 

1, step forward so that the weight is carried equally by both 
feet ; 2, bend the forward knee, keeping the back knee straight 
and both feet flat upon the floor; 3, straighten the forward 
knee ; 4, heels together. The trunk should be held erect 
throughout. There should be no scuffing. 

The bending movement should be as far as is possible with 
an erect carriage of the trunk, that the muscles of the calf and 
thigh may be brought well into action. 




3 c. COMBINATION OF STEPPING AND BENDING FORWARD WITH 
BELLS ON HIPS AND SIDEWAYS 

1, step forward and x^lace both bells upon the hips ; 2, bend 
the forward knee and extend the bells sideways, palms up; 

3, straighten the knee and return the bells to the hips; 

4, heels together, and bells down to position. 



Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 125 

4 6. ALTERNATE POINT STEP AND WALKING 

1, point step forward with the right foot; 2, heels together; 
3, point step forward with the left foot; 4, heels together; 
5, 6, 7, walk forward three steps, starting with the right 
foot ; 8, heels together. On the next eight counts repeat the 
figure, but walk backward to place. 



4 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND WALKING WITH CLICKING 
BELLS VERTICALLY FORWARD 

1, point step forward with the right foot, and click the bells 
vertically forward; 2, heels together, and bells on hips; 
3, 4, the same with the left foot ; 5, 6, 7, 8, walk forward and 
bring the heels together, the bells remaining on the hips. On 
the next eight counts repeat the figure, but walk backward 
instead of forward. When the bells are returned to the hips 
the elbows should be well back, so as to expand the chest. 



126 School Gymnastics 



5. 



LESSON XV 



1. Stretching. 

2. Facin.srs. 



^&' 



Marchinsr 



&• 



4. \ 



a. Bells on hips, sideways and return, right — One ! 
8—8—8. 

h. Foot ! — forward — bend — up — place. 8- — 8. 
c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

Bells on hips — Plade ! 
' a. Clicking bells vertically forward — One ! 8. 
h. Foot ! — forward — place — left — place — walk, two, three 
— heels. 16. 
t c. Combine ! 16. 

Position ! 
r a. Alternate swinging bells to shoulders and sideways, 
both— One ! 16. 

b. Trunk ! — bend — up — twist — front. 8 — 8. 
Note. — Alternate trunk bending and twisting. 

c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



I 



5 a. ALTERNATE SWINGING BELLS TO SHOULDERS AND SIDEWAYS 

1, swing the bells sideways to the top of the shoulders ; 
2, return the bells to the side ; 3, extend the bells to full 
arm's length sideways at shoulder level, palms upward ; 
4, return the bells to position at the sides. 



Third Series — Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 

5 6. ALTERNATE TRUNK BENDING AND TWISTING 



127 



1, bend the trunk to the right side; 2, resume the erect 
position; 3, twist the trunk to the same side; 4, return to 
the front. 





5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING AND TWISTING WITH 
BELLS TO SHOULDERS AND SIDEWAYS 

1, bend the trunk to the side and swing both bells sideways 
to the top of the shoulders ; 2, trunk erect and bells down to 
position ; 3, twist the trunk to the same side and extend the 
bells sideways, palms upward ; 4, return to the front, bells 
down to position. 



128 



School Gymnastics 



3. 



5. 



6. 

7. 
8. 
9. 



4. \ 



LESSON XVI 
Stretching. 

Facings. 

Marching. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 

a. Clicking over head, forward and returning — One ! 16. 

h. Foot ! — forward — bend — up — place. 8 — 8. 
Note. — Stepping and bending forward. 
L c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

' a. Clicking bells vertically forward — One ! 8. 
h. Foot ! — forward — place — left — place — walk, two, three 

—heels. 16. 
c. Combine ! 16. 

Position ! 
a. Alternate swinging bells to shoulders and sideways, 

both— One ! 16. 
h. Trunk ! — bend — up — twist — front. 8 — 8. 
, c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 
Stretching. 
Running. 
Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys ami Girls 129 

3 a. CLICKING OVER HEAD, FORWARD AND RETURNING 

1, click the bells over head ; 2, click them at arm's length 
forward at shoulder level ; 3, click again over head ; 4, bells 
on hips. All of the clicking should be with the thumb ends 
of the bells. Keep the head erect. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF STEPPING AND BENDING FORWARD WITH 
CLICKING BELLS OVER HEAD AND FORWARD 



J^^^ 




1, step forward and click the 
bells over the head ; 2, bend the 
knee and click the bells for- 
ward; 3; straighten the knee 



and click the bells again 
over the head ; 4, heels 
together and bells on the 
hips. 




130 School Gymnastics 

LESSON XVII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 

a. Clicking over head, forward and returning — One ! 16. 

3. \ b. Foot ! — forward — bend — up — place. 8 — 8. 

c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

[ a. Alternate clicking over head and rising on toes — 

4. \ One! 16. 

b. Combine! 16. 

Position ! 

a. Alternate swinging bells to shoulders and sideways, 
both— One ! 16. 

b. Trunk ! — bend — up — twist — front. 8 — 8. 
^ c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

6. Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



6. 



4 a. ALTERNATE CLICKING OVER HEAD AND RISING ON TOES 

1, click the bells over the head ; 2, bells down to position ; 
3, rise on the toes ; 4, heels down. 



4 b. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND CLICKING BELLS OVER 

HEAD 

1, rise on the toes ; 2, holding this position, click the bells 
over the head ; 3, heels down ; 4, bells down. 



Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 131 

LESSON XVIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 
a. Clicking over head, forward and returning — One ! 16. 
h. Foot ! — forward — bend — up — place. 8 — 8. 
c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
r a. Alternate clicking over head and rising on toes — 

4. \ One! 16. 

I h. Combine ! 16. 

r a. Facing and trunk bending sideways, right — One ! 

5. 8—8. 

[ h. With arms ! 8—8. 

Position ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



5 a. FACING AND TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 

1, face to the right side, as in the tactics ; 2, bend the trunk 
to the right side ; 3, resume the erect position ; 4, face to the 
front. When facing to the left side bend to the left. 



5 6. COMBINATION OF FACING AND TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 
WITH BELLS ON SHOULDERS 

1, face to the side and raise the bells sideways to the top 
of the shoulders; 2, bend to the side, the bells still on the 
shoulders ; 3, trunk erect ; 4, face to the front, bells on hips. 



1. 



132 School Gymnastics 

Third Series 

Dumb-bells, ^ pound 
PEOGEAMME FOE SPECIAL EXEECISES 



Bells on hips — Place ! 
a. Extending bells sideways, clicking forward and re- 
turning, both — One ! 16. 
h. Foot !— side — forward — side — place. 8 — 8. 
c. Combine ! 8 — 8. Lesson VI. 

Position ! 
a. Swinging bells right and left alternately — One ! 8. 
h. On toes ! 8. 

c. Combine ! 8. Lesson XL 

a. Clicking bells vertically forward — ^One ! 8. 
h. Trunk ! — twist — front — left — front. 8. 

c. Alternate ! — twist — place — click — place. 16. 

d. Combine! 8. Lesson 11. 

a. Swinging bells sideways to shoulders and clicking 
over head alternately, both — One ! 16. 

b. Trunk ! — bend — up — rise — down. 16. 

c. Combine ! 16. Lesson XIII. 
a. Swinging bell sideways to shoulder, extending side- 
ways and returning, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

h. Foot ! — side — face — front — heels. 8 — 8. 
c. Combine ! 8 — 8. Lesson X. 

a. Swinging bells sideways and clicking, both — One ! 8. 
h. On toes! 8. 

c. Combine ! 8. Lesson IX. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 

Clicking over head, forward and returning — One ! 16. 

Foot ! — forward — bend — up — place. 8 — 8. 

Combine 1 8—8. Lesson XVI. 



4. 



5. 



Fourth Series 

Fourth Year, Boys and Girls 



Wands, 3^ feet 



LESSON I 



Note. — For details of preliminaries, stretching, tactics, etc., 
see Explanatory Notes. 
Class — Stand ! 

1. Stretching. 

2. Left— Face! 
Right— Face ! 

Forward — March ! (Take wands and hold " at carry " while 
marching to position on floor.) 

Wand in position for work — One ! Two ! 
a. Swinging wand forward — One ! 8. 
h. Foot! — forward — place. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Point step forward, 
c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

4. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
Class— Halt! 

5. Stretching. 

6. Forward — March ! (To seats.) 

133 



134 



School Gymnastics 




WAND IN POSITION FOR 
WORK 

In response to the first 
count of the executive com- 
mand, raise the left arm, 
with the elbow bent at 
right angles across the fore- 
head, palm outward, and 
grasp the upper end of the 
wand with the left hand. 
In response to the second 
count, bring the wand down 
to a horizontal position at 
arm's length in front, the 
hands slightly more than 
shoulder width apart. 



WAND AT CARRY 

Hold the wand vertically in 
the right hand so that it rests 
against the right shoulder, the 
lower end held by the right 
forefinger. 




Fourth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 135 

To return the wand to the carry position, command ^^ Wand 
at cany — One ! Two ! '^ On the first count raise the left arm 
as on the first count of " Position for work '^ ; on the second 
count drop that arm to position at the side, leaving the wand 
against the right shoulder. 



4 a. SWINGING WAND FORWARD 

1, swing the wand up at arm's length in front to shoulder 
level ; 2, return the wand to position. Keep the head and 
waist firmly erect. 

4&. POINT STEP FORWARD 

1, extend the right foot forward and touch the toe on a line 
directly forward of the position from which it started; 2, heels 
together. Keep the shoulders (upper part of body) perfectly 
still and the knees stiff. Do not drag or scuff the foot over the 
floor. The weight should remain entirely on the stationary 
foot. The body should be firmly poised, that the exercise may 
assist to erect carriage. 



136 



School Gymnastics 




4 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND SWINGING WAND FORWARD 

1, point step and wand forward ; 2, heels together and wand 
down. 



Fourth Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 



137 



1. 

2. 



3. 



5. 
6. 

7. 
8. 



LESSON II 

Stretching. 

Facings. 

Marching. 

Aiming sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

Foot ! — side — place. 8 — 8. 
Note. — Point step sideways. 

Combine ! 8—8. 

Raising wand to chest — One ! 8. 

On toes ! 8. 

Note. — Rising on toes. 

Alternate ! 8. 

Combine ! 8. 
Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
Stretching. 
Breathing — Begin ! 
Three times. 



a. 
6. 

c. 
a. 
b. 

c. 
d. 



3 a. AIMING SIDEWAYS 

1, swing the wand 
up to shoulder level at 
the right side, the right 
arm extended at full 
length to the right, the 
grasp of the right hand 
loosened so as to allow 
the wand to slip through 
it and rest lightly in 
the crotch of the thumb ; 
the wand should be hor- 
izontal, the left elbow 
lifted so that it is above 
the level of the wand ; 
2, swing the wand down 




138 School Gymnastics 

again to position, the right hand resuming its grasp. The 
extended arm should pull strongly upon the chest. 



3 6. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS 

1, touch the side of the toe directly to the side, stretching 
the instep as straight as possible ; 2, heels together. As in 
the point step forward, the weight should be held firmly 
on the stationary foot to cultivate firm, erect carriage. Keep 
the shoulders squarely to the front and the knees stiff. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND AIMING SIDEWAYS 

1, aim to the right and take the point step to the right simul- 
taneously ; 2, heels together and wand down to position. 



4 a. RAISING WAND TO CHEST 

1, bend the elbows and lift the forearms upward until the 
wand rests horizontally across the chest ; the upper arms should 
be drawn backward close to the sides, so as to flatten the 
shoulder blades and throw the chest forward ; 2, lower the 
wand again to position. 



4 6. RISING ON TOES 



1, rise on the toes as high as possible ; 2, heels down, quietly 
and without jarring. Keep the weight poised on the forward 
part of the feet after the heels are lowered, avoiding any sway- 
ing backward of the body. 



Fourth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 139 

4 e. ALTERNATE RISING ON TOES AND RAISING WAND TO CHEST. 

1, rise on the toes ; 2, heels down ; o, raise the wand to 
chest ; 4, wand down. 



4 d. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND RAISING WAND 

TO CHEST 

1, rise on the toes and raise the wand to the chest ; 2, heels 
and wand down. 



8. BREATHING 



Eaise the arms sideways to shoulder level and inhale a deep 
breath ; lower the arms to position while exhaling. The arm 
action by raising the ribs expands the chest. 



3. 



4. 



140 School Gymnastics 

LESSON III 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Swinging wand over head — One ! 8. 
h. Foot! — back — place. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Point step backward. 
c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
a. Raising wand to chest — One ! 8. 
h. On toes! 8. 

c. Alternate ! 8. ' 

d. Combine ! 8. 
a. Raising wand vertically forward, right arm up — One ! 

8—8—8. 
h. Trunk! — side — up — left — up. 16. 

Note. — Trunk bending sideways, 
c. Alternate! 16. 

6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Return wands to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

Note. — See Reference Note 7. 
10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



3 a. SWINGING WAND OVER HEAD 

1, swing the wand up through the forward position until the 
arms are vertical over the head, the wand horizontal ; 2, wand 
down again to position. The elbows should be straight through- 
out. Keep the head perfectly erect. There should be no 
bending backward at the waist. 

. If taken with care as to the postural points noted, this exer- 
cise is admirable for the chest and back, and particularly for 
the shoulder blades. 



Fourth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 

3 h. POINT STEP BACKWARD 



141 



1, extend the foot backward and touch the inner side of the 
toe on a line directly back of the position from which it started, 
the heel dropped inward ; 2, heels together. There should be 
no forward yielding of the upper part of the body. The ex- 
tended leg should be perfectly straight, and the movement 
should pull strongly from the lower back. 



3 e. COMBINATION OF POINT 
STEP BACKWARD AND 
SWINGING WAND OVER 
HEAD 

1, extend the foot back- 
ward and the wand upward ; 
2, heels together and wand 
down. Be sure to keep the 
head upright. 

This combination is one 
of the strongest for the pos- 
tural correction of the back 
and chest. 




142 



School Gymnastics 




5 a. RAISING WAND VERTICALLY 
FORWARD 

1, raise the wand to a vertical posi- 
tion at arm's length in front ; 2, return 
to position. The right arm should be 
uppermost for eight counts, the left 
for eight, and alternate eight. 



5 h. TRUNK BENDING SIDE- 
WAYS 

1, bend the trunk from the 
waist directly to the side ; 
2, return to the erect posi- 
tion. Keep both feet flat 
upon the floor and the knees 
stiff. The head should re- 
main in a straight line with 
the axis of the trunk. The 
bending should be as far as 
can easily be done without 
strain, that it may effect a 
pronounced pressure upon 



'sP5 




Fourth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 143 

the internal organs, and so stimulate their healthful action 
and the general circulation. There should be no rotating of 
the trunk forward or backward of the lateral line. Alternate 
the directions. 



5 c. ALTERNATE TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND RAISING 
WAND VERTICALLY FORWARD 

1, bend the trunk to the right side; 2, resume the erect 
position ; 3, raise the wand vertically forward with the right 
arm upperm.ost ; 4, wand down to position ; 5, 6, 7, 8, repeat to 
the left side. 

Be particularly careful after this lesson, and all others that 
call for forward movements of the arms, to take the final 
stretching which counteracts any tendency to chest contraction. 



144 



School Gymnastics 



5. 



6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

10. 



LESSON IV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Swinging wand over head — One ! 8. 

h. Foot!— back — place. 8 — 8. 

c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

a. Twisting wand, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

h. On toes! 8. 

Note. — Eising on toes, 
c. Combine ! 8. 

a. Raising wand vertically forward, right arm up- 
One ! 8—8—8. 
h. Trunk ! — side — up — left — up. 16. 
^ c. Alternate ! 16. 
Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
Forward — March ! (Return wand to place.) 
Stretching. 
Running. 

Four times. 



Breathing- 



-Begin ! 



Fourth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 



145 




4 a. TWISTING WAND 

1, raise the wand horizontally across the chest, the forearms 
bent at right angles so as to twist the right end of the wand 
over to the left side, and vice versa; 2, wand down to position. 
On the first count the right arm should be uppermost ; on the 
second count, the left arm. Keep the chest high and the head 
well up. 



4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND TWISTING WAND 

1, rise on the toes and twist the wand, right arm uppermost ; 
2, heels and wand down. Alternate the arms. 



3. 



5. 



146 School Gymnastics 



LESSON V 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Aiming upward^ right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
h. Foot ! — oblique — place. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Point step obliquely forward. 
^ c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
f a. Twisting wand right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
4. ] 6. On toes ! 8. 
I c. Combine ! 8. 
a. Eaising wand vertically forward, right arm up — One ! 

8—8—8. 
h. Trunk ! — side — ^up — left — up. 16. 
^ c. Alternate ! 16. 

6. Wand at carry !— One ! Two ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Return wands to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Eunning. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



3 a. AIMING UPWARD 

1, raise the wand vertically upward from the right shoulder, 
the right arm extended upward at full length, pulling well 
upon the chest, the grasp of the right hand loosened and the 
wand pushed through and held in the same way as in aim- 
ing to the side; the left hand should hold the lower end of 
the wand close to the front of the right shoulder, the left 
elbow being raised forward at shoulder level ; 2, wand down 
to position. 



Fourth Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 



147 



3 b. POINT STEP OBLIQUELY FORWARD 

1, extend the foot diagonally forward in the direction in 
which the toe points when the heels are together; 2, heels 
together. The weight should remain entirely on the stationary 
foot, that the exercise may have its full effect as a balance 
movement. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP 
OBLIQUELY FORWARD AND AIMING 
UPWARD 

1, extend the right foot diagonally 
forward and raise the wand vertically 
from the right shoulder ; 2, foot and 
wand to position. 




148 



School Gymnastics 



LESSON VI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

( a. Aiming upward, right— One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

3. \ b. Foot !— oblique — place. 8—8. 
i c. Combine ! 8—8. 

r a. Twisting wand right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

4. i b. On toes ! 8. 

I c. Combine ! 8. 

a. Swinging wand forward — One ! 8. 

b. Trunk ! — bend — up. 8. 

5. i Note. — Trunk bending sideways, alternately. 

c. Alternate ! 16. 

d. Combine ! 16. 

6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Return wands to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Eunning. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



Fourth Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 149 

5 c. ALTERNATE TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND SWINGING 

WAND FORWARD 

1, bend the trunk to the side ; 2, trunk erect ; 3, swing the 
wand forward to shoulder level ; 4, wand down. Alternate 
the direction of the bending. 



5 il. COMBINATION OF TRUNK 
BENDING SIDEWAYS AND 
SWINGING WAND FORWARD 

1, swing the wand forward 
and bend the trunk to the side ; 
2, trunk erect and wand down. 
Alternate the direction of the 
bending. 




150 



School Gymnastics 



1. 
2. 



3. 



4. 



5. 

6. 
7. 
8. 
9. 
10. 



LESSON VII 

Stretching. 
Facings. 
Marching. 
a. Aiming sideways, upward and return, right — One 

8—8. 
h. Foot ! — side — oblique— side — place. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Point step sideways, obliquely forward, 
and return, 
c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
f a. Twisting wand, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
h. On toes! 8. 
c. Combine ! 8. 

a. Swinging wand forward — One ! 8. 
h. Trunk ! — bend — up. 8. 
c. Alternate ! 16. 
, d. Combine ! 8. 
Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
Stretching. 
Eunning. 
Breathing— Begin ! Four times. 



Fourth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 151 

3 a. AIMING SIDEWAYS, UPWARD, AND RETURN 

1, aim to the right side ; 2, raise the wand vertically from 
the right shoulder ; 3, aim again to the side ; 4, wand down to 
position. 

This is an excellent exercise for the chest if the extended 
arm pulls strongly upon it. 



3&. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS, OBLIQUELY FORWARD, AND RETURN 

1, point step to the side; 2, move the foot to the oblique 
point step ; 3, point step position sideways ; 4^ heels together. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP SIDEWAYS AND OBLIQUELY 
FORWARD WITH AIMING SIDEWAYS AND UPWARD 

1, point step sideways and aiming to the same side ; 2, point 
step obliquely forward and aiming upward ; 3, foot and wand 
again to the side ; 4, heels together and wand down. 



152 



School Gymnastics 



b. 
c. 

fa- 
4. \ h. 

I 

u. 

a, 
b, 
c. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

10. 



LESSON VIII 
Stretching. 
Facings. 
Marching. 
' a. Aiming sideways, upward and return, right — One ! 

8—8. 

Foot ! — side — oblique — side — place. 8 — 8. 

Combine ! 8—8. 

Aiming downward, right — One! 8 — 8 — 8. 

Facing ! 8—8. 

Combine! 8. 

Swinging wand forward — One ! 8. 

Trunk ! — bend — up. 8. 

Alternate ! 16. 

Combine ! 8. 
Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
Stretching. 
Eunning. 
Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



Fourth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 



153 



4 a. AIMING DOWNWARD 

1, hold the wand vertically 
downward from the right shoul- 
der, the right arm extended 
downward at full length, the 
left hand grasping the upper 
end of the wand at the right 
shoulder, palm outward, the left 
elbow extended horizontally for- 
ward; 2, wand down to position. 




4 6. FACING 



1, face to the side as in the tactics, but in one count ; 2, return 
to the front. 



4 c. COMBINATION OF FACING AND AIMING DOWNWARD 

1, face to the right side and aim downward from the right 
shoulder ; 2, face to the front, wand in position. Alternate the 
direction of the facing. 



154 School Gymnastics 



3. 



LESSON IX 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Aiming upward, forward, and return, right — One! 
8—8. 

b. Foot ! — back — forward — back — place. 8 — 8. 
Note. — Point step backward, forward, and re- 
turn. 

c. Combine ! 8—8. 
f a. Aiming downward, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
J h. Facing! 8—8. 
L c. Combine ! 8. 
' a. Aiming sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

h. Trunk !— twist— front. 8—8. 

KoTE. — Trunk twisting. 
c. Alternate ! 8 — 8, 
(L Combine! 8. 

6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Eunning. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



5. 



Fourth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 



155 



3 a. AIMING UPWARD, FORWARD, AND RETURN 

1, raise the wand to the vertical position with the right arm 
upward; 2, aim upward from the right shoulder, the right 
arm extended forward at full length, the left hand grasping 
the end of the wand on the front of the right shoulder; 3, 
return to the upward aiming ; 4, wand down to position. Keep 
the head well up. 

3 6. POINT STEP BACKWARD, FORWARD, AND RETURN 

1, point step backward ; 2, point step forward with the same 
foot ; 3, point step backward again ; 4, heels together. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP 
BACKWARD AND FORWARD 
WITH AIMING UPWARD AND 
FORWARD 

1, point step backward with 
the right foot and aiming up- 
ward from the right shoulder ; 
2, point step forward and aim- 
ing upward ; 3, point step back- 
ward and aiming upward again ; 
4, heels together and wand 
down. / 

This combination is one of 
the finest for the back and 
chest. 

Note. — See cut on next page. 




156 



School Gymnastics 




6 h. TRUNK TWISTING 

1, twist or rotate the trunk to the side ; 2, return to the for- 
ward position. The movement should be from the ankles, the 
feet remaining firmly in place and flat upon the floor. The 
head should turn with the trunk, but no farther. There should 
be no bending of the trunk sideways. The twisting should be 
far enough to create a strong pressure upon the internal organs 
and stimulate circulation in them. 



ALTERNATE AIMING AND TRUNK TWISTING 



1, twist the trunk to the right side ; 2, return to the front ; 
3, aim to the right ; 4, wand down in position. 



Fourth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 



157 




5 d. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING WITH AIMING 



1, twist and aim to the right ; 2, face to the front, wand 
down. 



158 School Gymnastics 



5. 



LESSON X 

1, Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Aiming upward, forward, and return, right — One ! 

8—8. 
6. Foot ! — back — forward — back — place. 8 — 8. 
c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
a. Alternate aiming obliquely downward and swinging 

wand over head, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
h. Foot ! — oblique — place — up— down. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Alternate point step obliquely forward 

and rising on toes. 

c. Combine! 8—8. 

a. Aiming sideways, right — One! 8 — 8 — 8. 
h. Trunk !— twist— front. 8—8. 
0. Alternate! 8—8. 

d. Combine ! 8. 

6. Wand at carry — One ! Two . 

7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



Fourth Series, JVands — Boys and Girls 



159 








4 a. ALTERNATE AIMING OB- 
LIQUELY DOWNWARD AND 
SWINGING WAND OVER HEAD 

1, aim obliquely downward 
from the right shoulder, the 
position of the wand being mid- 
way between the shoulder level 
and the downward aiming posi- 
tion and midway between the 
forward and the side direction, 
the left hand grasping the up- 
per end of the wand at the 
right shoulder with the palm 
outward, the left elbow hori- 
zontally forward ; 2, wand down 
to position ; 3, swing the wand 
to the horizontal position over 
the head; 4, wand down to 
position. 



4 b. ALTERNATE POINT STEP OBLIQUELY FORWARD AND RISING 

ON TOES 

1, point step obliquely forward ; 2, heels together ; 3, rise on 
the toes ; 4, heels down. 



4 c. A COMBINATION OF OBLIQUE POINT STEP AND RISING ON 
TOES WITH AIMING DOWNWARD AND SWINGING WAND OVER 
HEAD 

1, point step obliquely forward with the right foot and aim- 
ing obliquely downward from the right shoulder ; 2, heels and 
wand to position ; 3, rise on the toes and swing the wand over 
the head ; 4, wand and heels down. 



160 



School Gymnastics 



LESSON XI 



1. 

2. 



3. 



6. 

i . 

8. 

9. 

10. 



Stretching. 

Facings. 

Marching. 



a. 



(a. 
I 



4. ] 

i 



Swinging and aiming wand forward, right — One! 

8—8^8. 

Foot ! — forward — bend — up — place. 8 — 8. 
Note. — Stepping and bending forward. 
Combine ! 8^8. 

Alternate aiming obliquely downward and swinging 
wand over head, ri.o-ht — One ! 8 — 8. 



b. Foot ! — oblique — place — up — down. 8 — 8. 



I c. Combine ! 8—8. 

a. Aiming sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

b. Trunk !— twist— front. 8—8. 

c. Alternate ! 8 — 8. 
^ d. Combine ! 8. 

Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 

Stretching. 

Running. 

Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



Fourth Series, JVands — Boys and Girls 



IGl 



3 a. SWINGING AND AIMING WAND FORWARD 

1, swing the wand horizontally forward at shoulder level; 
2, aim forward from the right shoulder ; 3, return the wand to 
the forward position ; 4, wand down. 



3 b. STEPPING AND BENDING FORWARD 

1, step forward so that the weight is carried equally by both 
feet ; 2, bend the forward knee, keeping the back knee straight 
and both feet flat upon the floor; 3, straighten the forward 
knee ; 4, heels together. The trunk should be held erect 
throughout. There should be no scuffing. The step should be 
long enough to admit of a pronounced bend in the knee, that 
the thigh and calf muscles may be brought into strong action. 




[See page 162.] 



162 



School Gymnastics 



pmiwnwws-^^^^ 







3 c. COMBINATION OF STEPPING AND BENDING FORWARD WITH 
SWINGING AND AIMING WAND FORWARD 

1, step forward with the right foot and swing the wand 
horizontally forward ; 2, bend the knee and aim forward from 
the right shoulder ; 3, straighten the knee and return the wand 
to the position in 1 ; 4, heels together and wand down. 



Fourth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 163 



3. 



4. 



LESSON XII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Swinging and aiming wand forward, right — One ! 
8—8—8. 
I h. Foot ! — forward — bend — up — place. 8 — 8. 
tc. Combine! 8 — 8. 
a. Alternate aiming obliquely downward and swinging 

wand over head, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
h. Foot ! — oblique — place — up — down. 8 — 8. 
c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
a. Alternate raising wand to chest and over head — 

One! 16. 
h. Trunk ! — bend — up — twist — front. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Alternate trunk bending sideways and 
twisting. 
c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Return wands to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



5. { 



5 a. ALTERNATE RAISING WAND TO CHEST AND OVER HEAD 

1, raise the wand to the chest ; 2, wand down ; 3, swing the 
wand over the head ; 4, wand down. 



5 6. ALTERNATE TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND TWISTING 

1, bend the trunk to the right side ; 2, resume the erect 
position ; 3, twist the trunk to the side ; 4, return to the front. 



164 



School Gymnastics 




3, twist the trunk to the side and 
raise the wand over head; 4, re- 
turn to the front, wand down. 

This is an excellent exercise 
for the circulation and digestion. 



5 c. COMBINATION OF 
TRUNK BENDING 
SIDEWAYS AND 
TWISTING WITH 

WAND TO CHEST 
AND OVER HEAD 

1, bend the trunk 
to the side and raise 
the wand to the 
chest ; 2, trunk erect 
and wand down ; 




Fourth Series, ]Vaiids — Boys and Girls 165 



LESSON XIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Twisting wand, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

XoTE. — As in Lesson IV. 
h. Foot I — charge — place. 8 — 8. 
Note. — Charging forward. 
\ c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
a. Aiming sideways, right, left, and return — One! 
8—8—8. 

4. \ b. Swaying ! — right — left — right — place. 8 — 8. 
jSTote. — Swaying, 
c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
( a. Alternate raising wand to chest and over head — One ! 
^ I 16. 

1 b. Trnnk! — bend — np — twist — front. 8 — 8. 
[ c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Wand to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



3 6. CHARGING FORWARD 

1, step forward and bend the front knee as in the second 
count of the stepping and bending ; 2, heels together. Keep 
the trunk of the body erect. The step should be long enough 
to admit of an effective bend in the knee, that the thigh 
muscles may be brought into action sufficiently to stimulate 
the circulation. 



166 



School Gymnastics 




3 c. COMBINATION OF 
CHAKGING FORWARD 
AND TWISTING WAND 

Ij charge forward and 
twist the wand; 2, heels 
together and wand down 
to position. 



4«. AIMING SIDEWAYS, 

RIGHT, LEFT, AND RE- 
TURN 

1, aim to the right 
side; 2, swing the arms 
across the chest and aim 
to the left side; 3, aim 
again to the right; 4, 
wand down. 



4 6. SWAYING 

1, take a short step to the right, throwing all of the weight 
upon the right foot ; 2, rise on the toes and transfer the weight 
to the left foot, putting the left heel down and keeping the right 
heel up ; 3, rise on the toes again and transfer the weight back 
to the right foot, the right heel down and the left foot touching 
by the toe only ; 4, heels together. The swaying thus consists 
of a transference of the weight from one foot to the other, ris- 
ing on the toes in the transition. Keep the shoulders squarely 
to the front. This is an admirable balance exercise. 



4 c. COMBINATION OF SWAYING AND AIMING 

1, sway to the right and aim to the right ; 2, sway to the 
left and aim to the left ; 3, sway and aim again to the right ; 
4, heels together and wand down. 



Fourth Series, JVands — Boys and Girls 167 



5. 



LESSON XIV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

r a. Twisting wand, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

3. -j b. Foot !— charge — place. 8—8. 
Ic. Combine! S—8. 
' a. Aiming sideways, right, left, and return — One ! 

8—8—8. 
b. Swaying ! — right — left — right — place. 8 — 8. 
. c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

{ a. Aiming obliquely downward to the side, right — One I 
8—8. 
b. Foot ! — side — place — bend — up. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Alternate point step and trunk bending 
sideways. 
I c. Combine ! 8—8. 

6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Eunning. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



168 School Gymnastics 

5 a. AIMING OBLIQUELY DOWNWARD TO THE SIDE 

1, aim obliquely downward to the right side, the right arm 
extended at full length, the upper end of the wand grasped by 
the left hand, the left elbow horizontally forward; 2, wand 
down to position. Look in the direction of the aiming. 

This exercise is admirable for chest expansion as well as for 
its effect upon the digestive organs and circulation. 



5 h. ALTERNATE POINT STEP AND TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 

1, point step to the right side; 2, heels together; 3, bend 
the trunk to the right side ; 4, trunk erect. 




6 c. COMBINATION OF AIMING 
WITH POINT STEP AND 
TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 

1, point step to the right 
side and aim obliquely down- 
ward to the right side ; 2, 
heels together and wand 
down to position; 3, bend 
the trunk to the right side 
and aim obliquely downward 
to the right ; 4, trunk erect 
and wand down to position. 



Fourth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 169 



LESSON XV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

r a. Alternate twisting wand and swinging over head, 
right arm up — One I 8 — S. 
h. Foot I — charge — place — back — place. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Alternate charging forward and point step 
backward, 
c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
{ a. Aiming sideways, right, left, and return — One ! 
! 8—8—8. 

I h. Swaying! — right — left — right — place. 8 — 8. 
ic Combine! 8—8. 
{ a. Aiming obliquely downward to the side, right — One ! 

5 I ^-^- 

j h. Foot ! — side — place — bend — up. 8 — 8. 

lo. Combine! 8—8. 

6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Eunning. 

10. Breathing — Begin 1 Four times. 



4. 



170 School Gymnastics 

3 a. ALTERNATE TWISTING WAND AND SWINGING OVER HEAD 

1, twist the waud across the chest in front, the right arm 
uppermost; 2, wand down to position; 3, swing the wand 
horizontally over the head ; 4, wand down. 



3 6. ALTERNATE CHARGING FORWARD AND POINT STEP 

BACKWARD 

1, charge forward ; 2, heels together ; 3, point step backward 
with the same foot ; 4, heels together. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING FORWARD AND POINT STEP BACK- 
WARD WITH TWISTING WAND AND SWINGING OVER HEAD 

1, charge forward with the right foot and twist the wand, 
the right arm uppermost ; 2, heels together and wand down ; 

3, point step backward and swing the wand over the head; 

4, heels together and wand down. 



Fourth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 



111 



3. < 



4. 



LESSON XVI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

(a. Alternate twisting wand and swinging over head, 
right arm up — One ! 8 — 8. 
h. Foot ! — charge — place — back — place. 8 — 8. 
t c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
a. Wand twisting, reverse and return, right — One! 

8—8. 
h. Swaying ! — right — left — right — place. 8 — 8. 
c. Combine! 8—8. 

a. Swinging wand back of shoulders — One ! 8. 
h. Trunk !— Bend— up. 8—8. 

Note. — Trunk bending sideways, 
c. Combine ! 16. 

6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Return wands to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



6. 



4 a. WAND TWISTING, REVERSE AND RETURN 

1, twist the wand across the chest, right arm uppermost; 
2, reverse the twisting to bring the left arm uppermost ; 3, re- 
turn to the first position (right arm up) ; 4, wand down to 
position in front. 



172 School Gymnastics 

4 c. COMBINATION OF SWAYING AND WAND TWISTING 

1, sway to the right and twist the wand in front of the chest, 
the right arm uppermost ; 2, sway to the left and reverse the 
twisting, to bring the left arm up ; 3, sway and twist again to 
the right ; 4, lieels together and wand down. 



ba. SWINGING WAND BACK OF SHOULDEKS 

1, swing the wand over the head, bend the elbows and lower 
the wand back of and against the shoulders ; 2, return the wand 
to position. The elbows should be perfectly straight as they 
are raised through the forward to the upward position and in 
returning. Keep the head erect throughout. 

If the points of pos- 
ture noted be carefully 
observed, this is one of 
the finest exercises for 
<^ "x N the chest and back, in- 

cluding the shoulder 
blades, and for the car- 
riage of the head. 




5 c. COMBINATION OF WAND 
BACK OF SHOULDERS AND 
TRUNK BENDING SIDE- 
WAYS 

1, wand back of shoul- 
ders ; 2, bend the trunk 
to the side ; 3, trunk 
erect ; 4, wand down to 
position. Alternate the 
direction of the bending. 



Fourth Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 173 



LESSOR XVII 



i. Stretching. 
L*. Facings. 
Marchin.cc. 

( 



4. 



a. Swinging wand over head, aiming sideways, and re- 
j turning— One ! 8 — 8. 
o J b. Foot I — charge— place — twist — place. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Alternate charging forward and trunk 
twisting. 
I c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

a. AVand twisting, reverse, and return^ right — One ! 
8—8. 

b. Swaying ! — right — left — right — place. 8 — 8. 
I c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

r a. Swinging wand back of shoulders — One ! 8. 

5. \ b. Trunk !— bend— up. 8—8. 
I c. Combine ! 16. 

6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



174 School Gymnastics 

Za. SWINGING WAND OVER HEAD, AIMING SIDEWAYS AND 

RETURNING 

1, swing the wand over the head ; 2, aim to the right side ; 
3, wand again over the head ; 4, wand down to position. Pull 
well npon the chest with these movements. 



3 6 ALTERNATE CHARGING FORWARD AND TRUNK TWISTING 

1, charge forward with the right foot ; 2, holding the charge 
position, twist the trunk to the left ; 3, twist the trunk to the 
front ; 4, heels together. 




3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING FORWARD AND TRUNK TWIST- 
ING WITH WAND OVER HEAD AND AIMING SIDEWAYS 

1, charge forward and swing the wand over the head ; 2, hold 
the charge position, twist the trunk to the left side and aim 
backward ; 3, twist the trunk to the front, wand again over the 
head ; 4, heels together and wand down. The charging posi- 
tion is held from one to four. 



Fourth Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 175 



3. 



LESSON XVIII 

1. Stretcliing. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

' a. Swinging wand over head, aiming sideways and 
returning — One ! 8 — 8. 

b. Foot ! — charge — place — twist — place. 8 — 8. 

c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

( a. Wand twisting, reverse and return, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
4. \ b. Swaying ! — right — left — right — place. 8 — 8. 
[c. Combine! 8—8. 

a. Swinging wand back of shoulders — One ! 8. 

b. Trunk ! — forward — up. 8. 
Note. — Trunk bending forward. 

[ c. Combine ! 16. 

6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Return wands to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



5. \ 



176 



School Gymnastics 



bh. TRUNK BENDING FORWARD 

1, bend the trunk directly forward ; 2, resume the erect 
position. The bending should be from the hips, not from the 
waist, the back remaining straight and the head in a line mth 
it, not relaxed or drooping. To insure this straight line of 
back and head, the bending should be slight in the first few^ 
lessons, and increased later. Keep the knees stiff. 

This exercise works strongly upon the back muscles which 
hold the trunk erect. 




5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK 
BENDING FORWARD AND 
SWINGING WAND BACK OF 
SHOULDERS 

1, swing the wand back of 
the shoulders ; 2, bend the 
trunk forward ; 3, trunk erect ; 
4, Avand down to position. 



Fourth Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 111 



Fourth Series 

Wands, 3^ feet 

PKOGKAMME FOE SPECIAL EXERCISES 

r a. Aiming sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

1. \ h. Foot! — side — X3lace. 8 — 8. 

I c. Combine ! 8 — 8. Lesson 11. 

f a. Alternate raising wand to chest and over head — One ! 

2 J ^^- 

j h. Trunk ! — bend — up — twist — front. 8 — 8. 

[ c. Combine ! 8 — 8. Lesson XII. 

r a. Aiming downward, right — One ! 8 — 8. 

8. i h. Facing ! 8—8. 

Ic. Combine! 8—8. Lesson VIII. 

' a. Swinging and aiming wand forward, right — One ! 

8—8—8. 

h. Foot ! — forward — bend — up — place. 8 — 8. 

c. Combine ! 8 — 8. Lesson XL 

{ a. Twisting wand and swinging over head alternately, 

right arm up — One ! 8 — 8. 

b. Foot ! — charge — place — back — place. 8 — 8. 

I c. Combine ! 8 — 8. Lesson XV. 

' a. Aiming sideways, right, left, and return — One ! 

8_8— 8. 

b. Swaying ! — right — left — right — place. 8 — 8. 

, c. Combine ! 8 — 8. Lesson XIII. 



4. 



5. 



6. 



178 School Gymnastics 



7. 



' a. Aiming obliquely downward to the side, right — One ! 
8 — 8. 

h. Foot ! — side — place — bend — up. 8 — 8. 

. c. Combine ! 8 — 8. Lesson XIV. 

f a. Swinging wand over head, aiming sideways and return- 

! ing— One! 8—8. 

I h. Foot! — charge — place — twist — place. 

( c. Combine ! 8 — 8. Lesson XYII. 



Fifth Series 

Fifth year, Boys and Girls 
Indian Clubs, f pound 

LESSON I 

Note. — For details of preliminaries, stretching, tactics, 
effects of exercises, floor formation, etc., see Explanatory 
Notes. 

Class — Stand ! 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Note. — Secure the clubs 
while passing to place. 
Carry them with the lobes 
resting upon the shoulders 
while marching to posi- 
tion on the floor. See illus- 
tration. 
Clubs in position for work — 
Place ! 

3. Full circle sideways, right out- 
ward—Start ! Eight 8, left 8, 
both right 8, both left 8. 

Clubs on shoulders — Place ! 

4. Forward — March! 

(Eeturn clubs to place.) 

5. Stretching. 

6. Breathing — Begin ! 

Position ! 

7. Forward — March ! (To seats.) 

179 




180 



School Gymnastics 




CLUBS IN POSITION FOR WORK 

Grasp the handle of the club 
around the ball^ bend the forearm 
forward so that it forms a slightly 
acute angle with the upper arm, and 
hold the club upright. This is the 
'^rest position'' of the clubs in the 
following exercise. 



3. FULL CIRCLE SIDEWAYS 

1, from the rest position straighten 
the arm upward and swing the club 
outward and downward at full length 
to the side, across the front of the 
body, and up on the other side, de- 
scribing a circle; 2, lower the club 
to the rest position. Keep the shoul- 
ders squarely to the front; avoid 
any swaying of the body. The head should be held firmly 
erect. 

The full-arm circle works upon the front and side of the 
chest, upon the top of the shoulder, the back, and the shoulder 
blades. The erect carriage of head and chest is a crucial feature 
in cdl of the club sivingijig, and shoidd he strenuoicsly insisted 
upon. There should be no jerking in the movement. See 
illustration in Lesson II. 



6. BREATHING 

Eaise the arms sideways to shoulder level and inhale a deep 
breath, much fuller than the normal; lower the arms and 
exhale. Eepeat four times. 



Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 181 



LESSON II 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 
f a. Full circle sideways, right outward — Start ! Right 
outward 8, left outward 8, both right 8, both left 8, 
both inward 8, both outward 8. 

3. \ h. Foot! — side — place. 8 — 8. 
Note. — Point step sideways. 

c. Alternate! 8—8. 
i d. Combine ! 8—8. 

4. Forward — March ! (Eeturn clubs to place.) 

Note. — It will be understood hereafter that the 
clubs are placed on the shoulders at the command to 
march. 

5. Stretching. 

Arms folded behind — Place ! 

6. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 

Position ! 

7. Forward— March ! (To seats.) 



182 School Gymnastics 

Za. BOTH INWARD, BOTH OUTWARD. (FULL CIRCLE SIDEWAYS.) 

Both inward. Start both arms inward across the front of the 
body toward the opposite side, the right arm toward the left, 
the left arm toward the right. 

Both outward. Start both arms simultaneously outward in 
opposition, the right club toward the right and the left club 
toward the left. 

This is one of the finest exercises for the chest. 



3 h. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS 

1, touch the side of the toe directly to the side, stretching 
the instep and knee as straight as possible; 2, heels together. 
The weight should remain firmly on the stationary foot, that 
the exercise may serve as a balance movement, cultivating erect 
poise. The shoulders should remain squarely to the front. 
Keep the knees stiff. The foot should be lifted and touched 
lightly, without scuffing. 

Best the clubs upon the shoulders while taking the point step. 
Unless otherwise specified this position of the clubs will be 
understood in succeeding series whenever another part of the 
body is working alone. 

3 c. ALTERNATE POINT STEP AND FULL CIRCLE SIDEWAYS 

1, point step to the right side ; 2, heels together ; 3, full 
arm circle outward to the right side with the right club; 4, 
club at rest. In taking the point step with the left foot, 
alternate with the left club. This change of side will not be 
mentioned in succeeding exercises, it being understood that 
when the description mentions only one side the reverse will 
be taken for the opposite side. 

While taking the point step hold the clubs at rest. 



Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 



183 




3c«. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND FULL CIRCLE SIDEWAYS 

1, point step to the side and both clubs outward in oppo- 
sition ; 2, heels together and clubs at rest. Be sure that no 
weight is carried by the moving foot. 



184 



School Gymnastics 



1. 

2. 



3. 



4. \ 

5. 

6. 



8. 
9. 



LESSON III 
Stretching. 
Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 

Full circle sideways, right outward — Start! 

B. E. 8; B. L. 8; B. inward 8; B. outward 8. 

Foot ! — side — place. 8 — 8. 

Alternate ! 8—8. 

Combine ! 8—8. 

Trunk twisting, right— One ! 8—8—8. 

With clubs! 8—8—8. 
Forward — March 1 (Eeturn clubs to place.) 
Stretching. 
Running. 

Note. — See Beference Note 7. 
Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
Forward — March ! (To seats.) 



a. 

\ h. 

c. 

d. 
{ a. 



8—8. 



Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 



185 



4 a. TRUNK TWISTING 

1, twist or rotate the trunk to the side ; 2, return to the for- 
ward position. The movement should be from the ankles, the 
feet remaining firmly in place and flat upon the floor. The 
head should turn with the trunk, but no farther. The twisting 
should be far enough to create a pressure upon the internal 
organs sufficient to stimulate their action and the general cir- 
culation. There should be no sideways bending of the trunk 
at the waist. Alternate the direction on the last eight counts. 
The clubs should rest upon the shoulders during this exercise. 



4 6. TRUNK TWISTING WITH 
FULL CIRCLE 

1, swing both clubs to the 
left side in the full circle and 
twist the trunk to the right; 
2, hold the oblique direction of 
the trunk and bring the clubs 
to the rest position; 3, start 
the clubs to the right and twist 
the trunk to the front ; 4, clubs 
at rest. 




186 School Gymnastics 



LESSON IV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 
r a. Forearm circle sideways, right outward — Start ! E. 8 ; 

3. j L. 8 ; B. E. 4 ; B. L. 4 ; B. imvard 8 ; B. outward 8. 
U. On toes! 16. 

Note. — Rising on toes. 
r a. Trunk twisting, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
* j b. With clubs ! 8—8—8. 

5. Forward — March ! (Eeturn clubs to place.) 

6. Stretching. 

7. Eunning. 

8. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 

9. Forward — March ! (To seats.) 



Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 



18' 



3 a. FOREARM CIRCLE AND 
REST SIDEWAYS 

1, describe a circle side- 
ways with the forearm, 
the elbow being the centre 
of the circle ; 2, rest. 

This exercise has a 
stronger local effect upon 
the arm muscles than the 
full arm circle. 




3 6. RISING ON TOES 

1, rise high on the toes ; 2, heels down, quietly and without 
jarring. Keep the weight forward on the balls of the feet as 
the heels are lowered. 



188 School Gymnastics 



LESSOR V 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 
r a. Forearm circle sideways, right outward — Start ! E. 8 ; 
' L. 8 ; B. E. 4 ; B. L. 4 ; B. inward 8 ; B. outward 8. 
h. On toes! 8. 

c. Alternate ! 8. 

d. Combine! 8. 

. {a. Trunk twisting, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
[h. With clubs! 8—8—8. 

a. Trunk bending sideways, alternately, right — One ! 
16. 
I h. With clubs ! — alternate. 16. 

6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
10. Forward — March ! (To seats.) 



3 c. ALTERNATE RISING ON TOES AND FOREARM CIRCLE 

1, rise on the toes ; 2, heels down ; 3, swing both clubs out- 
ward in the forearm circle ; 4, clubs at rest. 



Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 189 

Zd. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND FOREARM CIRCLE 

1, rise on the toes and swing both chibs outward ; 2, heels 
down and clubs at rest. 



5 a. TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 

1, bend the trunk from the waist directly to the right side ; 
2, return to the erect posi- 
tion ; 3, bend to the left side ; 
4, trunk erect. Keep both feet 
flat upon the floor and the 
knees stiff. The head should 
remain in a straight line with 
the axis of the trunk. The 
bending should be as far as 
can be done without strain, so 
as to expand the chest on the 
convex side and at the same 
time make an effective press- 
ure upon the digestive organs. 
There should be no rotating of 
the trunk forward or backward 
of the lateral line. 

The clubs should rest upon 
the shoulders during the trunk 
bending. 




5 6. ALTERNATE TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND FULL CIRCLE 

OUTWARD 

1, bend the trunk to the right side, the clubs resting upon 
the shoulders ; 2, trunk erect ; 3, swing both clubs in full circle 
outward in opposition ; 4, clubs at rest ; 5, 6, 7, 8, repeat, 
bending the trunk to the left side. 



190 



School Gymnastics 



3. 



LESSON VI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 
a. Full circle forward^ right — Start ! K. 8 ; L. 8 ; 

Alt. 8 ; B. 8. 
h. Foot! — forward — place. 8 — 8. 
Note. — Point step forward. 
c. Combine ! 16. 

a. Forearm circle sideways, both outward — Start ! 8. 
h. On toes ! 8. 
I c. Alternate ! 8. 
I d. Combine ! 8. 

f a. Trunk bending sideways, alternately, right — One ! 
6. ] 16. 

I h. With clubs ! — alternate. 16. 

6. Forward — March ! (Return clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
10. Forward — March ! (To seats.) 



4. \ 



Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 

3 a. FULL CIRCLE FORWARD 



191 



1, straighten the arm upward and forward, swing the club 
downward and backward at the side to describe a full circle at 
the side of the body ; 2, rest. Keep the head erect and the 
shoulders squarely to the front. Unless these points of posture 
are closely observed, this exercise may be detrimental to good 
position. 



3 6. POINT STEP FORWARD 

1, extend the foot forward and touch the toe on a line directly 
forward of the position from which it started ; 2, heels together. 
Keep the shoulders (upper part of the body) perfectly still and 

the knees stiff. Do not 

p- 

drag or scuff the foot over 
the floor. The weight 
should remain entirely on 
the stationary foot, mak- 
ing a balance exercise of 
the movement. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT 
STEP AND FULL CIRCLE 
FORWARD 

1, point step forward and 
both clubs forward in the 
full circle ; 2, heels together 
and clubs at rest. Alter- 
nate the feet in this combi- 
nation. 




192 



School Gymnastics 



3. 



LESSON VII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Faciug. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 
f a. Full circle forward, right — Start ! E. 8 ; L. 8 ; Alt. 8 ; 
B. 8. 
h. Foot! — forward — place. 8 — 8. 
c. Combine ! 16. 
a. Alternate full circle to same side and forearm circle in 

opposition, both right — Start ! 16. 
h. Face! — rest — up — down. 16 — 16. 
j Note. — Facing and rising on toes. 

[c. Combine! 16—16. 

' a. Trunk bending sideways, alternately, right — One ! 
6. ] 16. 

. h. With clubs ! — alternate. 16. 

6. Forward — March I (Eeturn clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
10. Forward — March ! (To seats.) 



Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 193 

4 a. ALTERNATE FULL CIRCLE TO SAME SIDE AND FOREARM 
CIRCLE IN OPPOSITION 

1, swing both clubs to the right in the full arm circle ; 
2, clubs at rest ; 3, swing both clubs in the forearm circle out- 
ward in opposition ; 4, rest. Alternate the full arm circle from 
right to left. 

4 6. FACING AND RISING ON TOES 

1, face to the side as in the tactics, the clubs resting on the 
shoulders; 2, rest {i.e. hold the position) ; 3, rise on the toes; 
4, heels down. 

4 c. COMBINATION OF FACING AND RISING ON TOES WITH 
ALTERNATE FULL AND FOREARM CIRCLE 

1, start both clubs to the left in the full circle and face to 
the right ; 2, clubs at rest ; 3, both clubs outward in opposition 
in the forearm circle and rise on the toes ; 4, clubs at rest and 
heels down; 5, swing both clubs to the right in the full arm 
circle and face to the left (front) ; 6, clubs at rest ; 7, forearm 
circle outward in opposition and rise on the toes ; 8, clubs at 
rest and heels down. Observe that in facing to the left the 
clubs are started toward the right and vice versa. 



9. BREATHING 

Continue the sideways lifting of the arms taken in the 
previous breathing exercise, until the arms are in a vertical 
position ; lower them sideways to position while exhaling. 



3. 



194 School Gymnastics 

LESSON VIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 
a. Full circle backward, right — Start! E. 8; L. 8; 

Alt. 8 ; B. 8. 
h. Foot ! — forward — place. 8 — 8. 
Note. — Point step forward, 
c. Combine ! 16. 
a. Alternate full circle to same side and forearm circle 

in opposition, both right — Start ! 16. 
h. Face ! — rest — up — down. 16 — ^16. 
c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
f a. Trunk bending sideways alternately, right — One ! 16. 
I h. With clubs ! — alternate. 16. 

6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
10. Forward — March ! (To seats.) 



4. 



3 a. FULL CIRCLE BACKWARD 

1, starting upward and backward, swing the club downward 
and forward to form a full circle at the side of the body ; 2, club 
at rest. The circle itself is the same as in the full circle for- 
ward, but the direction in which the arm moves is reversed. 

This exercise, like the forward circle, requires especial care 
to keep the head perfectly erect. Pull well upon the chest 
throughout the movement. 

3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND FULL CIRCLE BACKWARD 

1, point step forward and both clubs backward in the full 
circle ; 2, heels together and clubs at rest. Alternate the feet 
in this combination. 



Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 195 



3. 



4. 



6. 



LESSON IX 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Chibs in position — Place ! 
a. Full circle backward, right — Start ! E. 8 : L. 8 ; 

Alt. 8 ; B. 8. 
h. Foot ! — forward — place. 8 — 8. 
c. Combine ! 16. 
f a. Alternate full circle to same side and forearm circle 

in opposition, both right — Start ! 16. 
h. Face ! — rest — up — down. 16 — 16. 
c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
a. Alternate point step backward and trunk twisting, 

right— One ! 8—8. 
h. Together! — alternate. 8. 
c. With clubs! 16. 

6. Forward — March ! (Return clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six Times. 
10. Forward — March ! (To seats.) 



5 a. ALTERNATE POINT STEP BACKWARD AND TRUNK TWISTING 

1, point step backward with the right foot ; 2, heels together ; 
3, twist the trunk to the right ; 4, return to the front. In the 
point step backward the entire leg should be stretched^ the 
knee and ankle being fully extended and the movement per- 
ceptible in the lower part of the back. The toe only should 
touch the floor. 



196 



School Gymnastics 



5 b. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP BACKWARD AND TRUNK 

TWISTING 

1, point step backward and trunk twisting to the same side 
simultaneously ; 2, return to the f ront^ heels together. Alter- 
nate the direction from right to left. 

This exercise cultivates just what is required by it for proper 
execution — steady balance and good coordination. 




5 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP BACKWARD AND TRUNK 
TWISTING WITH FULL CIRCLE FORWARD 

1, point step backward and trunk twisting, with full circle 
forward as the body then faces ; 2, face to the front, heels 
together and clubs at rest. 



Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 197 



LESSO:^^ X 

1. stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place! 
a. Alternate full and forearm circle sideways, right — 
Start 1 E. 8 ; L. 8 ; B. (outward) 8. 

3. \ h. Charge! — forward — place. 8 — 8 — 8. 
Note. — Charging forward. 

c. Combine! 8—8—8. 
Eising on toes — One ! 16. 

Note. — Clubs on shoulders. 

a. Alternate point step backward and trunk twisting, 
right— One ! 8—8. 

b. Together ! — alternate. 8. 

c. With clubs ! 16. 

6. Forward — March ! (Clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 

Position ! 

9. Forward — March ! (To seats.) 



198 School Gymnastics 

Za. ALTERNATE FULL AND FOREARM CIRCLE SIDEWAYS 

1, swing both clubs to the right in the full circle ; 2, clubs at 
rest; 3, swing both clubs to the right in the forearm circle; 
4, clubs at rest. 




3 6. CHARGING FORWARD 

ly step forward and bend the 
forward knee, both feet flat upon 
the floor, the back knee straight, 
and all of the w^eight upon the 
forward foot; 2, heels together. 
Keep the trunk of the body up- 
right and the shoulders squarely 
to the front. 

This exercise should bring into 
strong action the muscles of the 
calf and thigh, and through them 
quicken effectively the circula- 
tion. Unless the knee be bent 
as far as possible, this result will 
not be obtained. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING FORWARD AND ALTERNATE FULL 
AND FOREARM CIRCLE SIDEWAYS 

1, charge forward with the right foot and swing both clubs 
to the right in the full circle ; 2, hold the charge position and 
bring both clubs to the rest position ; 3, heels together and 
both clubs to the right in the forearm circle ; 4, clubs at rest. 
On the last eight counts alternate the feet and swing the clubs 
outward in opposition instead of to the same side. 



Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 199 



3 



LESSON XI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 

a. Alternate full and forearm circle sideways, both right 
—Start ! R. 8 ; L. 8 ; B. (outward) 8. 

b. Charge ! — forward — place. 8 — 8 — 8. 

c. Combine! 8—8-8. 

a. Full circle forward and backward alternately, right 
—Start ! S—S—S. 

b. Foot ! — forward — place — up — down. 16 — 16. 
XoTE. — Alternate point step forward and rising 

on toes. 

c. Combine ! 16—16. 
f a. Alternate point step backward and trunk twisting. 



! right— One ! 8—8. 
j b. Together ! — alternate. 
Ic. With clubs! 16. 



6. Forward — March ! (Return clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
10. Forward — March ! (To seats.) 



200 School Gymnastics 

4 a. FULL CIRCLE FORWARD AND BACKWARD ALTERNATELY 

1, full circle forward ; 2, clubs at rest ; 3, full circle back- 
ward; 4, rest. Keep the head well up and the chin in. 



4 6. ALTERNATE POINT STEP FORWARD AND RISING ON TOES 

Ij point step forward ; 2, heels together ; 3, rise on the toes ; 
4, heels down. 

4 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP FORWARD AND RISING ON TOES 
WITH FULL CIRCLE, FORWARD AND BACKWARD 

1; point step forward and full circle forward ; 2, heels to- 
gether and clubs at rest; 3, rise on the toes and full circle 
backward ; 4, heels down and clubs at rest. 



Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 201 



3. 



5. 



LESSON XII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 
a. Pendulum and rest, both right — Start ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
6. Charge ! — face — front. 16 — 16. 

Note. — Facing sideways and charging. 
c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

a. Full circle forward and backward alternately, right — 
Start! 8—8—8. 
] h. Foot! — forward — place — up — down. 16 — 16. 
t c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

r a. Trunk bending sideways alternately, right — One ! 
6. ] 8—8. 

I h. With clubs ! — alternate. 16. 

Note. — As in Lesson V et seq. 

6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
10. Forward — March ! (To seats.) 



202 



School Gymnastics 




3 a. PENDULUM 

In the pendulum swing, the clubs describe the lower half 
of the full circle across the front of the body, rising only to 
the shoulder level. 

1, from the rest position start the clubs to the left and 
swing them down and across the front of the body and up to 
shoulder level on the right side, both arms horizontal, the right 
arm extended at full length, the left bent at right angles 
across the chest; the clubs should be horizontal, continuing 
the line of the arms ; 2, hold the clubs in this horizontal posi- 
tion — a rest equivalent to that required for the rest in other 
exercises ; 3, swing the clubs downward and up to the rest 
position in front of the body ; 4, hold this rest position. On 
the last eight counts, instead of coming to the rest position in 
front of the body, swing the clubs way across to the pendulum 
position on the opposite side. 



Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 



203 



3 6. FACING SIDEWAYS AND CHARGING 

1, face to the side and charge in the direction in which the 
body is then turned ; 2, face to the front, heels together. In 
facing to the right, charge with the right foot, and vice versa. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF FACING AND CHARGING WITH PENDULUM 

1, start both chibs to the left and charge and face to the 
right; 2, hold the charge and the horizontal position for the 
clubs ; the latter will then both be extended at full arm's 
length in front of the body as it then faces ; 3, start the clubs 
in the direction in which they are then extended (to the right) 
and face the front, 
heels together ; 4, hold 
the normal position for 
the feet, clubs at rest. 
When charging and 
facing to the left, start 
the clubs to the right. 



5 a. HAND CIRCLE SIDE- 
WAYS 

The hand circle is 
made entirely from the 
wrist, which is the cen- 
tre of the circle. 1, 
hand circle sideways ; 
2, clubs in rest posi- 
tion. 




204 School Gymnastics 

5 6. TRUNK BENDING FORWARD AND RISING ON TOES 

1, bend the trunk forward, the back straight, the head well 
up, and the chin drawn in ; 2, trunk erect ; 3, rise on the toes ; 
4, heels down. The clubs should rest on the shoulders through- 
out this exercise. 

If correctly taken, with a straight back, the trunk bending 
forward strengthens the muscles which hold the trunk erect, 
by causing their contraction against strong resistance. 



Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 205 

LESSON XIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 
[ a. Pendulum, both right— Start ! 8—8—8. 

3. \ b. Charge ! — face — front. 16 — 16. 
[c. Combine! 8—8. 

a. Full circle forward and backward alternately, right 
—Start ! 8—8—8. 

4. ] b. Foot! — back — place — up — down. 16 — 16. 
Note. — Point step backward and rising on toes. 

c. Combine! 16—16. 
' a. Hand circle sideways, right — Start ! R. 8 ; L. 8 ; B. 8. 

b. Trunk ! — forward — up — toes — down. 16. 

5. \ Note. — Alternate trunk bending forward and ris- 
ing on toes. 

c. Combine ! 16. 

6. Forward — March ! (Return clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
10. Forward — March ! (To seats.) 



5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING FORWARD AND RISING 
ON TOES WITH HAND CIRCLE 

Take the hand circle sideways with both clubs while rising 
on the toes; clubs at rest as heels sink. The clubs should 
rest upon the shoulders for the forward bending of the trunk. 



9. BREATHING 

While inhaling raise the arms forward to a vertical position 
while exhaling, lower them sideways to position. 



206 



School Gymnastics 



LESSON XIV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 
a. Alternate full circle backward and hand circle forward, 

both— Start ! 16. 
h. Charge ! — forward — hold — place — hold. 16 — 16. 

Note. — Charging forward, 
c. Combine! 16—16. 
f a. Pendulum, both outward — Start ! 8. 
] h. On toes ! 8. 
I c. Combine ! 16. 
a. Hand circle outward, right — Start ! R. 8 ; L. 8 ; 
B. 8. 
I h. Trunk ! — forward — up — toes — down. 16. 
1 c. Combine ! 16. 

6. Marching. (Peturn clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Punning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 207 

3 a. ALTERNATE FULL CIRCLE BACKWARD AND HAND CIRCLE 

FORWARD 

The hand circle forward is done by dropping the club for- 
ward instead of sideways as in the hand circle sideways. It 
should describe a circle on a vertical plane inside of the forearm. 

1, full circle backward ; 2, clubs in rest position ; 3, hand 
circle forward ; 4, rest. Be careful that the head is held per- 
fectly erect as the clubs swing backward. 



Zh. CHARGING FORWARD 

1, charge forward ; 2, hold the position ; 3, heels together ; 
4, hold the position. The clubs should rest upon the shoulders 
during this exercise. 

3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING WITH FULL CIRCLE BACKWARD 
AND HAND CIRCLE FORWARD 

1, charge forward, and swing the clubs in a full circle back- 
ward ; 2, hold the charge, and bring the clubs to the rest posi- 
tion ; 3, heels together and haud circle forward with the clubs ; 
4. clubs in rest position. 

4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND PENDULUM 

1, rise on the toes and swing the clubs to the outward pen- 
dulum position ) 2j heels down and swing the clubs inward. 



208 



School Gymnastics 



1. 

9 



3. 



5. 



6. 

7. 
8. 
9. 



a. 



c. 
a. 



LESSON XV 
Stretching. 

Facings. 

Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 

Alternate full circle backward and hand circle for- 
ward^ both — Start ! 16. 

Charge ! — forward — hold — place — hold. 16 — 16. 

Combine ! 16—16. 

Pendulum, both outward — Start ! 8. 

On toes ! 8. 

Combine ! 16. 

Pendulum, both right — Start ! 16. 

Trunk I — twist — bend — up — twist — bend — up. 16. 
Note. — Trunk twisting and bending sideways. 

Combine! 32. 
Marching. (Eeturn clubs to place.) 
Stretching. 
Running. 
Breathing — Begin ! Pour times. 



u. 

a. 
h, 

c. 



Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 209 

bh. TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING SIDEWAYS 

1, twist the trunk to the right; 2, hold the position; 
3, bend the trunk to the right side ; 4, trunk erect ; 5, twist the 
trunk to the left side ; 6, hold the position ; 7, bend to the 
left side; 8, trunk erect. The clubs should rest upon the 
shoulders. 

5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING SIDEWAYS 

WITH PENDULUM 

1, start the clubs to the left for a pendulum swing toward 
the right, and twist the trunk to the right side ; 2, clubs on 
the shoulders ; 3, bend the trunk to the right side ; 4, trunk 
erect ; 6, start the clubs to the right for a pendulum swing to 
the left, and twist the trunk to the left side; 6, clubs on 
shoulders ; 7, bend the trunk to the left ; 8, trunk erect. 



210 School Gymnastics 



LESSO]^ XVI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 
a. Alternate full circle and hand circle forward, both — 

Start ! 16. 
h. Charge ! — forward — hold — place — hold, right — hold — 
place — hold, left — hold — place — hold. 16. 
Note. — Facing and charging. 
c. Combine ! 16. 
f a. Pendulum, both outward — Start ! 8. 

4. ] 6. On toes ! 8. 

I c. Combine ! 16. 

r a. Pendulum, both right — Start ! 16. 

5. j h. Trunk ! — twist — bend — up — twist — bend — up. 16. 
i c. Combine ! 32. 

6. Marching. (Return clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



3 a. ALTERNATE FULL CIRCLE AND HAND CIRCLE FORWARD 

1, full circle forward ; 2, clubs at rest position ; 3, inward 
hand circle forward; 4, outward hand circle forward; 5, 6, 
repeat hand circles ; 7, full circle forward ; 8, rest. In the out- 
ward hand circle forward, the circle is described outside of the 
forearm, instead of inside of it, as in the previous hand circle 
forward. 



Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 

3 6. FACING AND CHARGING 



211 



1, charge forward with the right foot ; 2, hold the position ; 
3, heels together ; 4, hold the position ; 5, 6, 7, 8, repeat with 
left foot ; 9, 10, 11, 12, repeat, facing to the right on 9, and 
charging forward as the body then faces ; return to the front 
on 12 ; 13, 14, 15, 16, repeat, facing to the left on 13, and to the 
front on 16; when facing to the left charge with the left foot. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF FAC- 
ING AND CHARGING WITH 
ALTERNATE FULL CIRCLE 
AND HAND CIRCLE FOR- 
WARD 

1, charge forward and 
take full circle forward ; 
2, hold the charge, and 
bring the clubs to the rest 
position ; 3, 4, 5, 6, con- 
tinue to hold the charge 
for the hand circles; 7, 
full circle forward and 
heels together; 8, clubs 
at rest. Eepeat forward 
with the left foot, and 
then face and charge to 
the right and left. 




212 School Gymnastics 



3. 



LESSON XVII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 
I. Alternate full circle and hand circle forward, both — 

Start ! 16. 
). Charge ! — forward — hold — place — hold, right — hold- 
place — hold, left — hold — place — hold. 16. 
). Combine ! 16. 

I, Pendulum, both right — Start ! 8. 
>. With swaying ! 16. 
r a. Pendulum, both right — Start ! 16. 
6. \ b. Trunk ! — twist — bend — up — twist — bend — up. 16- 
Ic. Combine! 32. 

6. Marching. (Return clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



4 6. PENDULUM WITH SWAYING 

1, pendulum to the right (starting the clubs to the left), step 
to the right side and rise on the toes, bending the trunk slightly 
at the waist toward the left ; 2, without changing the place of 
the feet on the floor, lower the heels and transfer the position 
to the left side, at the same time making the pendulum swing 
to the left. Come to position on the last count. 



Fifth Series, huiiaii Clubs 21; 



LESSON XVIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 
a. Alternate full circle and hand circle forward, both — 
Start ! 16, 

3. \ b. Charge ! — forward — hold — place — hold, right — hold — 
place — hold, left — hold — place — hold. 16. 

c. Combine ! 16. 
f a. Pendulum, both right — Start ! 8 — 8. 

I b. Trunk ! — twist — bend — up. 16. 

4. -^ . 

Note. — As in preceding lesson. 

^ c. Combine ! 16. 

6. Marching. (Return clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! 



214 



School Gymnastics 



/ 




be. COMBINATION OF TRUNK 
TWISTING AND BENDING 
SIDEWAYS WITH CONTINU- 
OUS PENDULUM 

1, as in the previous com- 
bination, start the clubs to 
the left for a pendulum swing 
to the right as the trunk is 
twisted to the right ; 2, clubs 
at rest position; 3, start the 
clubs to the right and con- 
tinue the swing into the left 
pendulum, while bending the 
trunk to the right ; 4, reverse 
the pendulum, trunk erect; 
repeat to the opposite side. 

The combination of the 
twisting with the bending 
increases the effect of both 
exercises upon the digestion 
and circulation by increasing 
the pressure upon the ab- 
dominal organs. 



Fifth or Sixth Series 

Fifth or Sixth Year, Boys and Girls 
Double Series^ Wands, 4 feet 

LESSON I 

This series is designed as a substitute for the Indian clubs in 
the fifth year, where there is not enough free floor space for club 
work, and for mixed classes of boys and girls, in the sixth year. 
Many of the exercises can be taken tvith the partners standing 
back to back. When this is to be done, the partners should turn 
upon command as described in Exercise Jf., Lesson XVII. 

Note. — For stretching, tactics, floor formation, effects of 
exercises, etc., see Explanatory Notes. 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Partners — Face ! 
(This position will be understood hereafter.) 
r a. Wand on shoulder, sideways and return — One ! 8 — 8 
—16. 
>. Foot ! — step — bend — up — place. 16 — 16. 
Note. — Stepping and bending sideways. 
. lo Combine! 16—16. 

Note. — Combination of stepping and bending side- 
ways with wands on shoulders, and sideways. 

4. Marching. (Keturn wands to place.) 

5. Stretching. 

6. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 

215 



3. 



216 School Gymnastics 

WAND AT CAREY 

In marching to place the wand should be held at carry like 
the bar-bell in the first lesson of the bar-bell series. 



POSITION FOR WORK 

Pupils should be carefully sized so that upon the command, 
Partners — Face! adjacent pupils of similar size may face 
each other and lower the wands to position for work. This 
position of the wands is gained by lowering the upper end of 
the wand toward one's partner, who grasps that end of it. 
The wand is thus grasped by each partner and held at arm's 
length down at the side. Great care should be taken that the 
partners stand near enough together to jwevent any pulling for- 
ward of the shoulders during the work. 



3 a. WAND ON SHOULDER, SIDEWAYS AND RETURN 

1, raise the wand to the top of the shoulder ; 2, extend the 
wand sideways at arm's length, pulling strongly upon the 
chest ; 3, return the wand to the shoulder ; 4, wand down to 
position. 

The side to which all movements should begin should be 
understood by the class, as directions cannot be given in the 
command without consuming much unnecessary time. 



Fifth or Sixth Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 217 

Zh. STEPPING AND BENDING SIDEWAYS 

1, step to the side, with the weight borne equally by the feet ; 
2, bend the outer knee ; 3, straighten the knee ; 4, heels together. 
The trunk should be held erect throughout, and the wands 
should be in their usual position down at the sides. Be sure that 
the bend of the knee is sufficient to bring into action the large 
muscles of the leg, and through them stimulate the circulation. 




3 c. COMBINATION OF STEPPING AND BENDING SIDEWAYS WITH 
WANDS ON SHOULDERS AND SIDEWAYS 

1, step to the side and raise both wands to the top of the 
shoulder; 2, bend the outer knee and extend the wands; 

3, straighten the knee and return the wands to the shoulders ; 

4, position. 

(Note. — See cut on next page.) 



218 



School Gymnastics 




6. BREATHING 

Eaise the arms sideways to shoulder level, and inhale a deep 
breath ; lower them to position while exhaling. The breathing 
should be much slower and deeper than the normal. The arm 
action lifts the ribs, thereby increasing the diameter of the 
chest. 



Fifth or Sixth Series, Wands — Boys ami Girls 219 



LESSOlSr II 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

[ a. Wand on shoulder, sideways and return — One ! IG 

3. J -16- 

h. Foot ! — step — bend — up — place. IG — IG. 

i c. Combine ! IG— IG. 
r a. Raising wands sideways, both — One ! 8. 
h. On toes! IG. 

Note. — Rising on toes. 
I c. Combine ! IG. 

Note. — Combination of rising on toes and raising 
wands sideways. 
5. Marching. (Return wands to place.) 
G. Stretching. 
7. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



\ 



4 a. RAISING WANDS SIDEWAYS 



1, raise the wands sideways to shoulder level ; 2, lower the 
wands to position. Pull hard upon the chest. 



4 h. RISING ON TOES 

1, rise on the toes as high as possible ; 2, heels down, quietly 
and without jarring. Avoid all swaying backward upon the 
heels as they are lowered. 

4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND RAISING WANDS 

SIDEWAYS 

1, rise on the toes and raise the wands sideways to shoulder 
level ; 2, heels and wands down. 



220 



School Gymnastics 



3. 



LESSON III 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

r a. Wand on shoulder, sideways, and return — One ! 16 
—16. 
h. Foot ! — step — bend — up — place. 16 — 16. 

I c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

{ a. Eaising wands sideways, both — One ! 8. 
4. \ h. On toes ! 16. 

t c. Combine ! 16. 

r a. Wand on shoulders — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
g I h. With trunk !— bend— up. 8—8—16. 

I Note. — Trunk bending sideways with wands on 

I shoulders. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn wands to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



Fifth or Sixth Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 221 

5 a. WAND ON SHOULDERS 

1, raise the wand to the shoulder through the full arm exten- 
sion sideways, pulling well upon the chest in the transition; 
2, wand down, with the same full extension in the transition. 



bh. TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS, WITH WANDS ON SHOULDERS 

1, raise both wands to the shoulders and bend the trunk side- 
ways from the waist, the head remaining in line with the trunk ; 
2, position. The bending should be as far as possible without 
lifting the feet or bending the knees. 




If taken correctly, this exercise is very effective for lateral 
expansion of the chest and for the circulation and digestive 
organs. 



222 



School Gymnastics 



3. 



LESSON IV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marcliing. 

a. Raising wand obliquely upward — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
h. Charge I — reverse. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Reverse charging. 
I c. Combine ! 16—16. 

Note. — Combination of reverse charging with wands 
obliquely upward. 
r a. Raising wands sideways, both — One ! 8. 
j h. On toes ! 16. 
[ c. Combine ! 16. 
^ { a. Wand on shoulder — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
[h. Withtrunk!— bend— up. 8—8—16. 

6. Marching. (Return wands to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



4. 



Fifth or Sixth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 223 

3 a. RAISING WAND OBLIQUELY UPWARD 



1, raise the 
arm at full 
length side- 
ways to an ob- 
lique upward 
position, pull- 
ing hard upon 
the chest; 2, 
wand down to 
position. Be 
careful that 
the trunk of 
the body does 
not tip to the 
side opposite 
the moving 
arm, and that 
the head is held 
erect. 




3 6. REVERSE CHARGING 

1, face and step to the side and bend the outer knee, with all 
of the weight upon it, and the trunk erect ; 2, keeping the feet 
in the same relative position, face and charge in the opposite 
direction; 8, return to the first charging; continue to reverse 
the charging as above to 7 ; 8, position. The bend of the knee 
should be as great as possible, that the heavy thigh muscles 
may be brought into action and so stimulate the circulation. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF REVERSE CHARGING WITH WANDS 
OBLIQUELY UPWARD 

1, charge sideways and raise the wand on that side obliquely 
upward; 2, reverse the charging, lower the raised wand and 
raise the opposite one j continue to 7 ; 8, position. 



224 School Gymnastics 



LESSON V 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

f a. Raising wand obliquely upward — One ! 8 — 8. 

3. j h. Charge ! — reverse. 8 — 8. 
I 0. Combine! 16 — 16. 

a. Raising wand upward — One ! 8—8 — 8. 
h. On toes. 16. 

Note. — Rising on toes. 
, c. Combine ! 16. 

Note. — Combination of rising on toes with raising 
wands upward. 
f a. Wand on shoulder — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
\h. With trunk !— bend— up. 8—8—16. 

6. Marching. (Return wands to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

Note. — See Explanatory Note 7. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



5. 



Fifth or Sixth Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 225 




4 a. KAISING WAND UPWARD 



1, raise the wand through the sideways to a vertical position, 
the elbow straight, and the head and shoulders erect through- 
out ; 2, wand down to position. 



4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES WITH RAISING WANDS 

UPWARD 

1, raise both wands upward and rise on the toes ; 2, heels 
and wands down. 



226 



School Gymnastics 



4. 



6. 



! 8—8. 



LESSON VI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

r a. Raising wand obliquely upward — One 

3. \ b. Charge ! — reverse. 8 — 8. 
I c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

f a. Eaising wand upward — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
\ h. On toes ! 16. 
I c. Combine ! 16. 

Wand on shoulder, extend and return — One ! 8 — 
8—16. 

Note. — As No. 3 in Lesson I. 
With trunk! 8—8—16. 

Note. — Trunk bending sideways with wands on 
shoulders, sideways and return. 

6. Marching. (Return wands to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



a. 



h. 



Fifth or Sixth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 227 




5 6. TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS WITH WANDS ON SHOULDERS 

AND SIDEWAYS 

1, raise both wands to the shoulders ; 2, extend the wands 
at arm's length sideways, shoulder high, and bend the trunk 
sideways; 3, trunk erect and wands to shoulders; 4, bend 
the trunk and extend the arms ; continue to 7 ; 8, position. 



228 School Gvmnastics 



LESSON VII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Raising wand sideways, upward and return — One! 
8—8—16. 

3. {h. Charge ! — side — rock back — charge. 8 — 8. 
Note. — Rocking. 

c. Combine! 16—16. 

Note. — Combination of rocking and raising wand 
sideways, upward and return. 
r a. Raising wand upward — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

4. -j h. On toes ! 16. 

I c. Combine ! 16. 

r a. Wand on shoulders, sideways and return — One 

5. j 8—8—16. 

\h. With trunk! 8—8—16. 

6. Marching. (Return wands to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



3 a. RAISING WAND SIDEWAYS, UPWARD AND RETURN 

1, raise the wand sideways at shoulder level ; 2, raise the 
arms to a vertical position ; 3, wand again sideways at shoulder 
level ; 4, arms vertical ; alternate to 7 ; 8, wand down to position. 
Pull strongly upon the chest. Keep the head erect. 



i 



Fifth or Sixth Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 229 

3 b. ROCKING 

1, face and charge sideways ; 2, keeping the feet in the same 
position, and the shoulders facing in the same direction, 
straighten the forward knee, transfer the weight to the rear 
leg and bend that knee; 3, return to the first charging position ; 
continue to rock from one charging position to another to 7; 
8, heels together. The knees should be bent to their farthest 
extent, as in the charging, that the circulation may be 
quickened by the action of the large thigh muscles. 




3 c. COMBINATION OF ROCKING AND RAISING WAND SIDEWAYS 

AND UPWARD 

1, face and charge to the side, and extend the wand on that 
side at shoulder level ; 2, bend the rear knee and extend the 



230 School Gymnastics 

arms to a vertical position; 3, return to the forward charge, 
wand at shoulder level ; continue to 7 ; 8, position. 



9. BREATHING 

While inhaling, continue the sideways lifting of the arms 
taken in the previous breathing exercise, until the arms are in 
a vertical position ; while exhaling, lower them sideways to 
position. 



Fifth or Sixth Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 231 

LESSON VIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

' a. Eaising wands sideways, npward and return — One ! 

1 h. Charge ! — side — rock back — charge. 8 — 8. 
I c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
a. Wand on shoulder, upward and return — One ! 8 — 8 — 

I h. On toes ! 16. 
[ c. Combine ! 16. 

Note. — Combination of rising on toes with wands 
on shoulders and upward. 

r a. Wand on shoulders, sideways and return — One ! 

5. I 8—8—16. 

i b. With trunk ! 8—8—16. 

6. ^Marching. (Eeturn wands to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



4 a. WAND ON SHOULDER, UPWARD AND RETURN 

1, wand on shoulders ; 2, raise the wand upward, arms verti- 
cal, pull hard upon the chest and keep the head erect; 3, wand 
again to the shoulders ; 4, wand down to position. 



4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES WITH WANDS ON 
SHOULDERS AND UPWARD 

1, raise both wands to the shoulders and rise on the toes ; 
2, hold the position on the toes and raise the arms to a vertical 
position ; 3, still keeping the heels off of the floor, return the 
wands to the shoulders ; 4, heels and wands down. 



232 



School Gymnastics 



3. 



LESSON IX 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

r a. Raising wand sideways, upward and return — One ? 
8—8—16. 

Charge ! — side — rock back — charge. 8 — 8. 
Combine ! 16 — 16. 

Wand to shoulder, upward and return — One ! 8— 
8—16. 

On toes ! 16. 
Combine ! 16. 

6. a. Facing and charging sideways, and bending trunk for- 
ward—One ! 16—16. 

6. Marching ! (Return wands to place.) 

7. Stretching. 
8. 



{ a. 



4. { 






Running. 



9. Breathing- 



Begin ! 



Six times. 



Fifth or Sixth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 233 



'-.■rf!»&w^^,^;,-^ss!i^^ , ^^vmm- 




5 a. FACING AND CHARGING SIDEWAYS, AND BENDING TRUNK 

FORWARD 

1, face and charge to the side with the wand extended for- 
ward at shoulder level ; 2, holding the charge position, bend the 
trunk forward and touch the wand to the floor ; 3, trunk erect, 
the weight remaining over the forward knee ; 4, position. 

This is a very effective exercise for the circulation and res- 
piration as well as for strengthening the muscles of the back 
and thigh. 



234 



School Gymnastics 



LESSON X 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Charging forward and backward alternately — One ! 
8—8. 

3. \ b. Arms !— up. 8—8. 
Note. — Combination of charging forward and 

backward with arms upward. 

a. Wand on shoulder, upward and return — One ! 8 — 
8—16. 

b. On toes! 16. 

c. Combine ! 16. 

5. Facing and charging sideways, and bending trunk forward 
_One ! 16—16. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn wands to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



Fifth or Sixth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 235 

3 a. CHARGING FORWARD AND BACKWARD, ALTERNATELY 

111 tliis exercise the partners charge forward and backward 
in opposite directions ; 1, a's charge forward and 6's back- 
ward on the same side ; 2, position ; 3, a's charge backward 
and ?>'s forward on the same side ; 4, position ; continue to alter- 
nate to 7 ; 8, position. 




3 h. COMBINATION OF CHARGING FORWARD AND BACKWARD 
WITH ARMS UPWARD 

Raise the arms vertically upward while charging on the first 
count, and lower them to the sides on the second count. 



< 



236 School Gymnastics 



LESSON XI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

{a. Charging forward and backward, alternately — One! 

3. 8—8. 

[h. Arms!— up. 8—8. 
a. Wand on shoulder — One ! 8 or 16. 
h. On toes ! — up — bend knees — up — heels. 16. 

Note. — Rising on toes and bending knees, 
c. Combine ! 16. 

Note. — Combination of rising on toes and bending 
knees with wands on shoulders. 
6. Facing and charging sideways, and bending trunk forward 
_One! 16—16. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn wands to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



Fifth or Sixth Series, Wands -Boys and Girls 237 

4 ft. RISING ON TOES AND BENDING KNEES 

1, rise on the toes ; 2, bend the knees, the heels remaining 
off of the floor ; 3, straighten the knees, the heels still raised ; 
4, heels down. The knees should spread as they are bent. 
Keep the trunk perfectly erect. 

This is an admirable exercise for cultivating erect carriage 
of the trunk, as well as for quickening the circulation. 



'.^^„€i 




4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND BENDING KNEES 
WITH WANDS ON SHOULDERS 

1, rise on the toes and place the wands on the shoulders ; 
2, bend the knees; 3, straighten the -knees; 4, heels and wands 
down. The wand should remain upon the shoulders from the 
first to the fourth count. 



238 . School Gymnastics 



LESSON XII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

[ a. Charging forward and backward, alternately — One ! 

3. \ 8—8. 

[ h. Arms ! — up. 8 — 8. 

[ a. Wand on shoulder — One ! 8 or 16. 

4. ] 6. On toes ! — up — bend knees — up — heels. 16. 
I c. Combine ! 16. 

a. Charging and trunk bending sideways — One ! 8 — 8. 
h. With wand. 16—16. 

Note. — Combination of charging and trunk bending 
sideways with wand to floor. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn wands to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



Fifth or Sixth Series, Wands —Boys and Girls 239 

5 a. CHARGING AND TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 

1, charge directly to the side \ 2, bend the trunk sideways 
toward the bent knee ; 3, straighten the trunk, but hold the 
charge position ; 4, heels together. The wand should be placed 
on the hips during this exercise. 




5 b. COMBINATION OF CHARGING AND TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 

WITH WAND TO FLOOR 

1, charge sideways ; 2, bend the trunk sideways and touch 
the wand on that side to the floor ; 3, trunk erect ; 4, position. 



240 



School Gymnastics 



3. 



4. 



5. 

6. 

7. 
8. 
9. 



LESSON XIII 
Stretching. 
Facings. 
Marching. 

I a. Facing and stretch step sideways with wand downward 

[ and upward — One ! 16 — 16. 

f a. Wand on shoulder — One ! 8 or 16. 

\ h. On toes ! — up — bend knees — up — heels. 16. 

i c. Combine ! 16. 

a. Charging and trunk bending sideways — One ! 8 — 8. 

b. With wands ! 16—16. 
Marching. (Return wands to place.) 
Stretching. 

Eunning. 

Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 





Fifth or Sixth Series, Wands —Boys and Girls 241 

Zn. FACING AND STRETCH STEP SIDEWAYS WITH WAND 
DOWNWARD AND UPWARD 

1, face to the side^ bend the inner knee as in a backward 
charging position, stretch the outer foot forward and touch the 
toe only to the floor, the knee remaining stiff ; at the same time 
bend the trunk forward at the waist and touch the wand to the 
forward ankle ; 2, bend the trunk slightly backward at the 





waist ; raise the arms vertically, bend the head backward, and 
look up at the wand; 3, bend forward again; 4, position. 

This exercise is excellent for the waist and back muscles. 
It is very stimulating to the circulation. 



9. BREATHING 

While inhaling, raise the arms forward to a vertical posi- 
tion ; while exhaling, lower them sideways. 



242 



School Gymnastics 



LESSON XIV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

3. Facing and stretch step sideways with wand downward and 

upward — One ! 16^16. 

a. Wand on shoulders^ upward and return — One i 

16—16. 
h. On toes ! — up — bend — up — heels. 16. 

Note. — Rising on toes and bending knees as m 
previous lesson, 
c. Combine ! 16. 

Note. — Combination of rising on toes and bending 
knees with wands on shoulders and upward. 
r a. Charging and trunk bending sideways — One ! 8 — 8. 
I h. With wand ! 16—16. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn wands to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



Fifth or Sixth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 243 

4«. WAND ON SHOULDERS, UPWARD AND RETURN 

1, raise the wand to the shoulder; 2, raise the wand up- 
ward; 3, wand again on the shoulder; 4, wand down to 
position. 




4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND BENDING KNEES 
WITH WANDS ON SHOULDERS AND UPWARD 

1, rise on the toes and raise the wands to the shoulders ; 
2, bend the knees and raise the wands upward ; 3, straighten 
the knees and return the wands to the shoulders ; 4, position. 



244 



School Gymnastics 



LESSON XV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

3. Facing and stretch step sideways — One ! 16 — 16. 
a. Wand on shoulders, upward and return — One ! 16 — 

16. 
h. On toes ! — up — bend — up — heels. 16. 
. c. Combine ! 16. 

5. Facing, kneeling, and trunk bending backward — One ! 8 — 8. 

6. Marching. (Return wands to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times* 




Fifth or Sixth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 245 



5 a . FACING, KNEELING, AND TRUNK BENDING BACKWARD 

1, face to the side, kneel on the inner knee and extend the 
wand on that side forward at shoulder level ; 2, bend the trunk 
backward and raise the wand upward ; bend the head back- 
ward and look up at the wand ; o, trunk erect and w^and again 
forward at shoulder level ; 4, position. This is one of the best 
all-over exercises. 




246 



School Gymnastics 



LESSON XVI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Raising wand sideways, upward and return — One ! 
8—8—16. 

Note. — As in 3 a, Lesson VII. 
h. Pivot ! — bend — up — place. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Pivoting and bending knees, 
c. Combine! 16—16. 

Note. — Combination of pivoting and bending knees 
with wand sideways, upward and return. 
{ a. Wand on shoulders, upward and return — One ! 16 — 16. 
4. \ h. On toes ! — up — bend — up — heels. 16. 

I c. Combine ! 16. 
6. Facing, kneeling and trunk bending backward — One ! 
16—16. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn wands to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six tiniesc 



Fifth or Sixth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 247 

3 h. PIVOTING AND BENDING KNEES 

1, rise on the toes and pivot to the side on the balls of the 
feet ; 2, holding this position of the feet, bend the knees ; 

3, straighten the knees ; 4, pivot to the front and lower the 
heels to position. 

This is one of the most difficult balance movements. If 

correctly done, it is very serviceable for strengthening the 
muscles that maintain a good carriage of the body. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF PIVOTING AND 
BENDING KNEES WITH WAND 
SIDEWAYS AND UPWARD 

1, rise on the toes, pivot to the 
side and extend the wand on that 
side forward at shoulder level ; 
2, bend the knees and raise the 
wand upward ; 3, straighten the 
knees and return the wand to 
the forward position ; 4, pivot to 
the front, and return the heels 
and wand to position. 




248 School Gymnastics 



LESSON XVII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

r a. Wand sideways, upward and return — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 

3. \ h. Pivot ! — bend — up — place. 8 — 8. 
ic. Combine! 16—16. 

4. Cross step and facing to rear — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 

5. Facing, kneeling and trunk bending backward — One ! 
16—16. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn wands to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



4. CROSS STEP AND FACING TO REAR 

1, cross one foot over the other and touch the toe on a line 
sideways from that of the stationary foot ; partners should 
work on the same side ; raise upward the wand on the side of 
the stationary foot ; 2, face to the rear, turning under the 
raised wand, and lower the wand to position ; the partners 
should then be back to back and the heels and wands in 
position; 3, raise the same wand and return to the front; this 
will leave the feet crossed and the wand raised ; 4, position. 



Fifth or Sixth Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 249 



LESSON XVIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

r a. Wancl sideways, upward and return — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 

3. i h. Pivot ! — bend — up — place. 8 — 8. 
I c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

4. Cross step and facing to rear — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
a. Eaising wand upward — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

iSToTE. — As in 4 a, Lesson V. 

5. ] h. Bend ! 8—8—8. 

I Note. — Trunk bending sideways, wands at hips. 

[c. Combine! 8—8—16. 

XoTE. — Combination of trunk bending sideways 
and raising wands upward. 

6. starching. (Return wands to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND RAISING 

WANDS UPWARD 

1, bend the trunk sideways and at the same time raise both 
wands upward, the arms being in a line with the trunk ; 
2, position. 



Seventh Series 

Sixth Year, Boys 
Bar-bells^ 4 feet 

LESSON I 

;N"ote. — For stretching, marching, floor formation, effects of 
exercises, etc., see Explanatory Notes. 

When direction is not mentioned in the command, it is under 
stood that the exercise will begin to the right side. 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Bar in position, for work — One ! Two ! 
a. Bar at carry, right — One ! 16 — 16. 
h. Foot !— forward. 8—8—16. 
Note. — Point step forward. 
^ c. Combine ! 

Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 

4. Marching. (Return bar-bells to place.) 

5. Stretching. 

While marching to place, the bar should be carried in the 
right arm, as shown in the illustration for 3 h. 

BAR IN POSITION FOR WORK 

1, raise the left arm upward, with the elbow bent at right 
angles so that the forearm crosses the forehead, and grasp the 
bar with the left hand, palm to the front ; 2, lower the bar to a 
horizontal position at arm's length down in front. 

253 



Seventh Series 

Sixth Year, Boys 
Bar-bells, 4 feet 

LESSOI^ I 

KoTE. — For stretching, raarching, floor formation, effects of 
exercises, etc., see Explanatory Notes. 

When direction is not mentioned in the command, it is under 
stood that the exercise will begin to the right side. 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Bar in position, for work — One ! Two ! 

a. Bar at carry, right — One ! 16 — 16. 

b. Foot !— forward. 8—8—16. 
Note. — Point step forward. 

^ c. Combine ! 

Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 

4. Marching. (Return bar-bells to place.) 

5. Stretching. 

While marching to place, the bar should be carried in the 
right arm, as shown in the illustration for 3 h. 

BAR IN POSITION FOR WORK 

1, raise the left arm upward, with the elbow bent at right 
angles so that the forearm crosses the forehead, and grasp the 
bar with the left hand, palm to the front ; 2, lower the bar to a 
horizontal position at arm's length down in front. 

253 



254 



School Gymnastics 





3 a. BAR AT CARRY 

The movements in this exer- 
cise are the same as in the bar 
in position for work. 

1, place the bar at carry at 
the right shoulder ; 2, bar down 
to the horizontal position. 



Zb. POINT STEP FORWARD 

1^ lift the right foot^ extend 
the leg and touch the toe the 
length of a step in front of 
its normal position ; no weight 
should be carried by the mov- 
ing foot, the shoulders remain- 
ing immovable; the knee and 
instep should be stretched to 
' ' .---- .: -^-..^-;-., their utmost ; 2, heels together. 

If correctly taken, this exercise 
is effective for balance work and for general carriage. The bar 
should remain at carry during this exercise. This position of 
the bar will be understood hereafter whenever the legs or trunk 
are working alone, unless otherwise specified. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP FORWARD AND BAR AT CARRY 

1, point step forward with the right foot and bar at carry at 
the right shoulder, the right arm bent across the forehead and 
grasping the bar; 2, heels together and bar in horizontal 
position. In taking the point step with the left foot, the bar 
should be placed at carry at the left shoulder. Be sure to keep 
the head erect in this and all other exercises. 



Seventh Series, Bar-bells Boys 255 



3. 



LESSON II 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
r a. Aiming sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
\. Foot!— side. 8— 8— la 

Note. — Point step sideways. 
ic. Combine! 8—8—16. 
{ a. Bar at chest — One ! 16. 
' h. On toes ! 16. 

Note. — Rising on toes. 
c. Combine ! 16. 

Bar at carry — One ! Two I 

5. Marching. (Return bar-bells to place.) 

6. Stretching. 

7. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



4. \ 



3 a. AIMING SIDEWAYS 

1, raise the bar horizontally to shoulder level and aim to the 
right side, the right arm extended at full length, the left elbow 
bent and raised to shoulder level ; turn the head and look in 
the direction of the aiming; 2:)ull hard upon the chest with the 
extended arm ; 2, wand down to position. 



3 6. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS 



This is similar to the point step forward except in direction. 
The same features of steady carriage and extended knee and 
nistep should be observed. Start the exercise to the right side. 



256 



School Gymnastics 




4 a. BAR AT CHEST 

1, bend the elbows 
and raise the bar to 
a horizontal posi- 
tion at the chest ; 2, 
bar down to position. 
The upper arms 
should be drawn 
backward when the 
bar is raised, so as ^ 
to expand the chest. 
Keej) the head erect. 



3r. COMBINATION OF 
POINT STEP AND 
AIMING SIDEWAYS 

1, point step side- 
ways to the right, 
and aim to the left 
side ; 2, heels together 
and bar down to posi- 
tion. When the point 
step is taken to the 
left side, aim to the 
right. 







^^^K r^^^M^B 


M 1 



Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 257 

4^. RISING ON TOES 

1, rise as high as possible on the toes ; 2, heels down, quietly 
and without jarring ; do not let the weight sway backward 
upon the heels after the latter are lowered. 



4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND BAR AT CHEST 

1, rise on the toes and raise the bar to the chest ; 2, heels to- 
gether and bar down. 



7. BREATHING 

Raise the arms sideways to shoulder level and inhale ; lower 
them to position and exhale. The breath should be slow and 
forced, i.e. deeper than the normal. 



258 



School Gymnastics 



LESSON III 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
r a. Bar forward, over head and return — One ! 
h. In quick time ! 8. 

3. \ G. Foot! — forward. 16. 

Note. — Point step forward- 
ed. Combine! 16. 
a. Bar at chest — One ! 16. 
h. On toes! 16. 
c. Combine ! 16. 

Bar at carry — One ! Two 1 

5. Marching. (Eeturn bar-bells to place.) 

6. Stretching. 

7. Running. 

Note. — See Explanatory Note 1. 

8. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



16. 



Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 



259 




3 a. BAR FORWARD, OVER HEAD AND RETURN 

1, raise the bar horizontally forward at arm's length in front 
at shoulder level; 2, continue the upward movement until the 
arms are vertical and the bar directly over the head ; 3, return 
to the forward position ; 4, bar down to position. Much care 
will be needed in this exercise to keep the head perfectly erect. 
Pall hard upon the chest with the arms. 



Zh. BAR FORWARD, OVER HEAD AND RETURN IN QUICK TIME 

1, swing the bar through the forward to the upward posi- 
tion ; 2, bar down to position. Be careful that the hips, or. ab- 
domen, and the head are not pushed forward as the bar is 
raised. A sway-back position should also be avoided. 



2G0 



School Gymnastics 



t^'^'iS^^PfMJ--^- :^^ 




Zd. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP FORWARD AND BAR 

OVER HEAD 

1, point step forward and bar over lieaid ; 2, heels and bar to 
position. 



Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 201 



3. 



5. 



LESSON IV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
a. Bar forward^ back of shoulders, and return — One i 16c 
h. In quick time ! 8. 
c. Foot!— back. 8—8—16. 

Note. — Point step backward. 
cl. Combine ! 16. 
I" a. Bar at chest — One ! 16. 
^ h. On toes ! 16. 
c. Combine ! 16. 

a. Bar back of shoulders — One ! 8. 
h. With trunk sideways ! 8—8—16. 

Note. — Trunk bending sideways. 

Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 

6. Marching. (Return bar-bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



262 School Gymnastics 

3 a. BAR FORWAED, BACK OF SHOULDERS, AND RETURN 

1, bar forward at arm's length at shoulder level; 2, swing 
the bar to the upward position, with the arms vertical, bend 
the elbows, and while keeping the head firmly erect, place the 
bar back of the shoulders ; 3, bar through the upward to the 
forward position; 4, bar down to position. 

If taken with the head in good position throughout, this ex- 
ercise is one of the most effective for correcting the position 
of the shoulders and shoulder-blades. 



3?>. BAR FORWARD, BACK OF SHOULDERS, AND RETURN, IN 

QUICK TIME 

1, swing the bar through the forward and upward positions 
and place it back of the shoulders; 2, return the bar to posi- 
tion. Be sure that the arms are stretched to their farthest 
extent betw^een the terminal positions. 



3 c. POINT STEP BACKWARD 

1, stretch the right leg backward from the w^aist and touch 
the toe directly back of its normal position; 2, heels together. 
The moving foot should carry no weight. The knee and instep 
should be stretched to their utmost. 

If taken correctly, this exercise makes effective work for the 
lower back muscles, which help to hold the trunk erect. 



Seventh Series, bar-bells — Boys 



263 



Zd. COMBINATION OF POINT 
STEP BACKWARD AND BAR 
BACK OF SHOULDERS 

1. point step backward 
with right foot and bar 
back of shoulders; 2, foot 
and bar to position. 





bh. TRUNK BENDING SIDE- 
WAYS WITH BAR BACK OF 
SHOULDERS 

1, bar back of shoulders as 
in 3 ; 2, bend the trunk from 
the waist directly to the right 
side; 3^ trunk erect; 4, bar 
down to position. The move- 
ment of the trunk should be 
as far as possible without 
bending the knees or lifting 
the feet. 

This exercise is admirable 
for expanding the chest lat- 
erally and for stimulating the 
action of the digestive organs 
and the circulation. 



264 School Gymnastics 



3. 



5. 



LESSON V 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Bar in position — One ! Two ! 

a. Bar forward, back of shoulders, and return — One ! 16. 

h. In quick time ! 8. 

c. Foot!— back. 8—8—16. 

d. Combine ! 16. 
f a. Bar vertically forward, right arm up — One! 8 — 8 — 8 
i h. On toes ! 16. 

Note. — Eising on toes, 
c. Combine ! 16. 

a. Aiming sideways, left — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
h. Trunk !— twist. 8—8. 

Note. — Trunk twisting. 

c. ftuick time ! 8. 

d. Combine ! 8. 

e. Quick time ! 8. 

{a. Bar back of shoulders — One ! 8. 
j b. With trunk sideways ! 8—8—16. 
Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Marching. (Eeturn bar-bells to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



Seventh Series, Rar-belh — Boys 205 

4 a. BAR VERTICALLY FORWARD, RIGHT ARM UP 

1, raise the bar to a vertical position in front of the body, 
the arms extended at full length, the right arm upward ; 2, bar 
down to position. See illustration in Lesson IX, 5 cZ, for the 
vertical position of the bar. 



4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND BAR VERTICALLY 

FORWARD 

1, rise on the toes and extend the bar vertically forward 
2, heels down and bar to position. 



5 6. TRUNK TWISTING 

1, twist or rotate the trunk co the right side, the feet remain- 
ing firmly in place and the knees stiff ; the head should turn 
with the trunk, but no farther; 2, return to position. The 
chest should be thrown well forward as the body is rotated, 
and the chin should be drawn in. The twisting should be as 
far as possible with the maintenance of a good position, that a 
strong pressure may be exerted upon the digestive organs. 



be. TRUNK TWISTING IN QUICK TIME 

1, twist the trunk to the right ; 2, twist to the left ; 3, twist 
to the right ; continue to alternate the directions to 7 5 8, posi- 
tion. 



266 



School Gymnastics 




bd. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING AND AIMING 

1, twist the trunk to the right and aim directly backward, 
twisting the head so as to look in the direction of the aiming ; 
2, return the trunk and bar to position. 



be. TRUNK TWISTING AND AIMING IN QUICK TIME 

1, twist the trunk to the right and aim backward from the 
right side ; 2, twist the trunk to the left and aim backward 
from the left side ; continue to alternate the sides to 7 ; 8, 
trunk and bar to position. 



Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 20' 



LESSON VI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
a. Bar forward — One ! IG. 

Note. — As for the first count of 3 a, Lesson IV. 
h. Charge! 16—16. 

Note. — Charging forward. 
c. Combine! 16—16—32. 
f a. Bar vertically forward^ right arm up — One ! 8 — 8 
—8. 
h. On toes! 16. 

c. Combine ! 16. 

a. Aiming sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

b. Trunk !— twist. ^—S. 
5. { c. Quick time ! 8. 

d. Combine ! 8. 

e. Quick time ! 8. 
a. Bar back of shoulders — One ! 8. 



^' ' b. With trunk sideways ! 8—8—16. 
Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Marching. (Keturn bar-bells to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



268 



School Gymnastics 



3h. CHARGING FORWARD 

1, take a long step forward with the right foot, bend the 
knee and throw the weight entirely on that leg, though the 
trunk should remain erect and the rear heel upon the floor ; 
2, heels together. 

If the bend of the knee is sufficient to bring the thigh 
muscles w^ell into action, this exercise will have a very stimu- 
lating effect upon the circulation and respiration. It cultivates 
an erect carriage of the trunk if the chest is thrown well for- 
ward and the trunk held erect in the charge position. 




3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING AND BAR FORWARD 

1, charge forward and swing the bar forward at arm's length 
at shoulder level ; 2, heels and bar to position. 



Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 269 



6. 



LESSCm VII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Eaeings. 
Marching. 

Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
[ a. Aiming sideways, right — One ! 10 — IG — 16. 

3. i I). Charge sideways ! 16 — 16. 
[c. Combine I 16—16—32. 

a. Bar over head — One ! 

h. On toes ! 16. 
I c. Combine ! 16. 

a. Aiming sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

h. Trunk !— twist. 8—8. 
; c. Quick time ! 8. 

d. Combine! 8. 

e. Quick time ! 8. 
a. Bar back of shoulders — One ! 8. 

[ h. AYith trunk sideways ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Marching. (Keturn bar-bells to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Eunning. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



Zh. CHARGING SIDEWAYS 



This differs from charging forward only in direction. 

1, charge directly to the right side, the trunk erect and all 
of the weight carried by the moving foot ; 2, position. The 
shoulders should remain squarely to the front throughout. 







School Gymnastics 



3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING AND AIMING SIDEWAYS 

1, charge and aim to the right side ; 2, position. In charging 
to the left side aim to the left. 




4r. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND BAR OVER HEAD 

1, rise on the toes and swing the bar through the forward 
to the horizontal position over the head; 2, heels and bar 
down. 



10. BREATHING 

While inhaling continue the upward movement of the arms 
until they are in a vertical position; arms down while exhaling. 



Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 271 



6 



LESS0:N^ VIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
f a. Bar at carry, aiming forward and returning, right — 
One ! 16— IG. 
>. Foot !— backward — charge — backward — place. 16 — 

3. \ 16. 
Note. — Point step backward, charging forward 

and returning, 
c. Combine! 16—16—32. 
r a. Bar over head — One ! 8. 

4. { b. On toes ! 16. 

I 

I c. Combine ! 16. 

6. Alternate trunk bending forward and bar back of shoulders 

—One ! 32. 

a. Bar back of shoulders — One ! 8. 

b. With trunk bending sideways ! 8 — 8 — 16. 

Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Marching. (Return bar-bells to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Eunning. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



3 a. BAR AT CARRY, AIMING FORWARD AND RETURNING 

1, bar at carry at the right shoulder ; 2, aim directly forward 
by raising the right arm with the bar forward, and placing the 
left hand, still grasping the bar, at the right shoulder ; 3^ bar 
at carry ; 4, position. 



272 



School Gymnastics 



Zh. POINT STEP BACKWARD, CHARGING FORWARD, AND 

RETURNING 

1, point step backward; 2, charge forward; 3, point step 
backward ; continue to 15 ; 16, heels together. 

This combination of exercises is very serviceable for culti- 
vating erect carriage, if the point step is 
taken with a strong stretch of the entire 
leg, and yet without any weight being 
borne upon it. The balance and control 
of body required for changing from one 
position to the other is considerable. 




3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP BACKWARD 
AND BAR AT CARRY, WITH CHARGING AND 
AIMING FORWARD 

1, point step backward with the right 
foot and bar at carry on the same side ; 
2, charge and aim forward ; 3, point step 
backward and bar at carry; continue to 
15 ; 16, position. 



5. ALTERNATE TRUNK BENDING FORWARD AND BAR BACK OF 

SHOULDERS 

1, bend the trunk forward from the hips, with the back 
straight, and swing the arms upward in line with the trunk; 
the head should remain in a straight line with the back ; 
2, trunk erect and bar down to position ; 3, bar back of shoul- 
ders ; 4, bar down to position. 

This exercise is admirable for the back muscles, and if cor- 
rectly taken will do much to cultivate an erect carriage. 



Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 273 



LESSON IX 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
' a. Bar at cany, aiming forward and returning, right — 

One ! 16—16. 
h. Foot ! — backward — charge — backward — place. 16 — 

16. 
c. Combine! 16—16—32. 

a. Bar over head, back of shoulders and return — One ! 
16. 

h. On toes ! 16. 

Note. — Eising on toes, 
c. Combine ! 32. 
f a. Bar vertically forward, right arm up — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

b. ftuick time ! 8. 
Note. — Alternate the arms without coming to posi- 
tion. 

c. Trunk !— twist. 8—8—8. 
Note. — 1, twist ; 2, return to the front. 

. d. Combine ! (Quick time.) 16. 

6. Alternate trunk bending forward and bar back of shoul- 
ders—One ! 32. 

Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Marching. (Eeturn bar-bells to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Eunning. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



274 



School Gymnastics 



4«. BAR OVER HEAD, BACK OF SHOULDERS AND RETURN 

1, bar over head ; 2, bar back of shoulders ; 3^ bar over head ; 
4, bar down to position. In swinging the bar over the head, 
keep the elbows straight as they move through the forward 
position. Keep the head steadily erect throughout. 



4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES WITH BAR OVER HEAD 
AND BACK OF SHOULDERS 

1, rise on the toes, bar over head ; 2, hold the position on the 
toes and place the bar back of the shoulders ; 3, still remaining 
on the toes, return the bar to the position over the head; 
4, heels and bar down to position. 




5 d. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWIST- 
ING AND BAR VERTICALLY FOR- 
WARD 

1, twist the trunk to the right 
and raise the bar vertically for- 
ward, with the right arm upper- 
most ; 2, twist the trunk to the 
left and reverse the arms ; con- 
tinue to 15 ; 16, position. 



Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 275 



LESSON X 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Bar. in position — One ! Two ! 
a. Bar forward and at chest — One ! 16. 

3. I h. Rocking ! 8—8. 
[c. Combine! 16—16. 

r a. Bar over head, back of shoiiklers and return — One ! 
16. 



5. 



'^' h. On toes! 16. 
.c. Combine! 32. 

a. Bar vertically forward, right arm up — One! 8 — 8 — 8. 
h. Quick time! 8. 

c. Trunk !— twist. 8—8—8. 

d. Combine ! (Quick time.) 16. 

6. Alternate trunk bending forward and bar back of shoul- 
ders—One ! 32. 

Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Marching. (Return bar-bells to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



276 



School Gymnastics 



BAR FORWARD AND AT CHEST 



1, swing the bar forward at arm's length ; 2, bar at chest ; 
3, bar again forward ; 4, bar down to position. 



3&. ROCKING 



1, charge forward ; 2, keeping the feet in the same place on 
the floor, straighten the forward knee, bend the rear knee and 
throw all of the weight npon it ; 3, return to the forward charge 
position ; continue to alternate the movements to 7 ; 8, position. 
The trunk should be erect throughout. The transition of the 
weight from the forward to the rear knee gives a rocking 
motion to the body. 

This exercise is very serviceable for quickening the cir- 
culation. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF ROCKING 
WITH BAR FORWARD AND AT 
CHEST 

1, charge forward and ex- 
tend the bar forward ; 2, rock 
backAvard and place the bar 
at the chest ; 3, return to the 
forward position ; continue to 
15 ; 16, heels together and bar 
down. The position for the 
first count is illustrated in 3 c, 
Lesson VI. 




Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 



211 



5. 



6. 



LESSON XI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
r a. Bar forward and at chest — One ! 16. 

3. b. Eocking ! 16—16. 
I c. Combine ! 16^ — 16. 

L Bar at chest — One ! 16. 

4. ^ Note. — 1, bar at chest ; 2, position. 
b. On toes ! — bend — up — place. 16. 

Note. — Rising on toes and bending knees. 

a. Bar vertically forward, right arm up — One ! 8 — 
8—8. 

b. Quick time ! 8. 

c. Trunk !— twist. 8—8—8. 

d. Combine ! (Quick time.) 16. 
a. Bar over head and trunk bending sideways, right — 

One ! 8—8—16. 

Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Marching. (Return bar-bells to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



278 



School Gymnastics 




4 6. RISING ON TOES AND BENDING KNEES 

1, rise on the toes and raise the bar to tlie chest; 2, keeping 
the heels up and the bar at the chest, bend the knees, the trunk 
remaining erect ; 3, straighten the knees, the heels still remain- 
ing off of the floor and the bar at the chest ; 4, heels and bar 
down. 

This exercise is admirable for cultivating erect carriage. 



Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 



279 




4 a. BAR OVER HEAD AND TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 

1, raise the bar over the head ; 2, bend the trunk to the side ; 
3, trunk erect ; 4, bar down to position. 

This is excellent work for the chest and waist muscles. The 
effect upon the circulation and digestion is very stimulating. 



280 . School Gymnastics 



3. 



5. 



LESSON XII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
a. Bar placing obliquely forward^ right — One! 8 — 8 

—16. 
h. Charge! 16—16. 

Note. — Charging obliquely forward. 
c. Combine! 16—16. 
a. Bar at chest — One ! 16. 
h. On toes ! — bend — up — place. 16. 
a. Bar back of shoulders — One! 8. 
h. Trunk! — forward. 16. 

Note. — Bar back of shoulders with trunk bending 
forward. 

6. Bar above head and trunk bending sideways, right — One ! 
8—8—16. 

Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Marching. (Eeturn bar-bells to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin! Six times. 



3 a. BAR PLACING OBLIQUELY FORWARD 

1, loosen the grasp of the right hand, swing that end of the 
bar obliquely forward the full length of the left arm, and place 
or plant it firmly upon the floor, the bar being in a vertical 
position ; 2, return the bar to position. 



Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 



281 



3 b. CHARGING OBLIQUELY FORWARD 

This differs from 23revioiis chargings only in direction, the 
foot moving outward in a direction midway betw^een the for- 
ward and sideways directions. The shoulders should face in 
the direction of the charge. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING 
AND BAR PLACING OBLIQUELY 
FORWARD 

1, charge obliquely forward 
to the right, and place the bar 
obliquely forward on that side ; 
2, heels and bar to position. 





bh. BAR BACK OF SHOULDERS WITH 
TRUNK BENDING FORWARD 

1, bar back of shoulders ; 2, bend 
the trunk forward ; 3, trunk erect ; 
4, bar to position. 

This is one of the best exercises 
in the series for correcting the posi- 
tion of the shoulder-blades, back, 
and chest. 



282 School Gymnastics 



LESSON XIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
' a. Bar placing obliquely forward, right !— One ! 8 — 8 

—16. 
h. Charge! 16—16. 
c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

a. Bar above head, back of shoulders and return — One ! 

16. 
6, On toes ! — up — bend — up — place. 16. (Bar at chest.) 
c. Combine ! 

[ a. Bar back of shoulders — One ! 8. 
\ h. Trunk ! — twist — bend — up — place. 8 — 8 — 16. 
Note. — Trunk twisting and bending forward. 

6. Bar above head, and trunk bending sideways, right — One ! 
8—8—16. 

Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Marching. (Return bar-bells to place.) 
. 8. Stretching. 

9. Kunning. 
10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 



283 




4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND BENDING KNEES WITH 
BAR OVER HEAD, BACK OF SHOULDERS AND RETURN 

1, rise on the toes, the bar over the head ; 2, bend the knees, 
the bar back of the shoulders ; 3, straighten the knees, bar 
over head ; 4, position. 

This is a very difficult balance movement. It will be taken 
easier and in better form if done firmly and steadily instead of 
rapidly. Keep the head and shoulders erect. 



284 



School Gymnastics 



>tx 




6 h. TRUNK TWISTING AND BEND- 
ING FORWARD WITH BAR BACK 
OF SHOULDERS 

1, twist the trunk to the right 
and place the bar back of the 
shoulders ; 2, holding this di- 
rection, bend the trunk f orward, 
keeping the head and trunk in 
a straight line ; 3, trunk erect ; 
4, trunk and bar to position. 



10. BREATHING 



Eaise the arms forward to a vertical position, palms facing 
inward, while inhaling ; lower them sideways, turning the 
palms downward while exhaling. Keep the head erect and 
pull well upon the chest with the arm movements. 



3. 



4. 



o. 



Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 285 



LESSON XIV 

1. Stretcliing. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
a. Bar over head — One ! 16. 
h. Change ! — reverse. 16 — 16. 
1 Note. — Reverse charging sideways with bar over 

head. 
a. Bar above head, back of shoulders and return — One ! 

16. 
h. On toes ! — bend — up — place. 16. 
^ c. Combine ! 16. 
f a. Bar back of shoulders — One ! 8. 
\ b. Trunk ! — twist — bend — \ip — place. 8 — 8 — 16. 

6. Bar above head, and trunk bending sideways, right ! — 
One ! 8—8—16. 

Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Marching. (Return bar-bells to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



3 6. REVERSE CHARGING SIDEWAYS WITH BAR OVER HEAD 

1, face and charge to the right side and swing the bar over 
the head ; 2, keeping the feet in the same relative position, 
reverse the charge, i.e. face in the opposite direction, and bend 
the knee that is then forward; in the transition swing the bar 
downward, and have it over the head when facing in the 
opposite direction ; continue to reverse the directions to 15 ; 
16, position. Be sure to bend the knee as far as possible, 
that the heavy thigh muscles may be brought well into action 
and so stimulate the circulation. 



286 School Gymnastics 



4. 



LESSON XV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
a. Bar over head — One! 16 — 16. 
h. Charge ! — reverse. 16 — 16. 
a. Bar above head, back of shoulders and return — One ! 

16. 
h. On toes ! — bend — up — place. 16. 
c. Combine ! 16. 

a. Bar back of shoulders — One ! 8. 
h. Trunk ! — twist — side — up— place. 8 — 8 — 16. 

Note. — Trunk twisting and bending sideways with 

bar back of shoulders. 

6. Bar back of shoulders and trunk bending forward — One ! 
32. 

Note. — As in Lesson XII. 

Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Marching. (Return bar-bells to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



Seventh Series, Bar-hells ~ Boys 



287 




5 h. TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING SIDEWAYS WITH BAR BACK 

OF SHOULDERS 

1, twist the trunk to the right and place the bar back of the 
shoulders; 2, bend the trunk to the right side; 3, trunk erect; 
4, face to the front, bar down. 



288 School Gymnastics 



3. 



lesso:n^ XVI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
a. Bar at carry, aiming obliquely upward and returning, 

right— One ! 16—16. 
h. Charge ! — stamp — charge — place. 16 — 16. 

ISToTE. — Charging obliquely forward, stamping and 

returning. 

Combine ! 16—16. 

Bar above head, back of shoulders and return — One ! 

16. 

On toes ! — ^bend — up — place. 16. 

Combine ! 16. 

Bar back of shoulders — One ! 8. 

Trunk ! — twist — side — up — place. 8 — 8 — 16. 

6. Bar back of shoulders and trunk bending forward — One ! 
32. 

Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Marching. (Return bar-bells to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 





I c. 




' a. 


4. 


h. 




. c. 


5. - 


fa. 



Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 



289 




3«. BAR AT CARRY. AIMING OBLIQUELY UPWARD AND 

RETURNING 

Ij bar at carry; 2, aim obliquely upward; 3, bar at carry; 
4, bar in position. 



3 b. CHARGING OBLIQUELY FORWARD, STAMPING AND RETURNING 

1, charge obliquely forward ; 2, give two quick stamps with 
the forward foot, slightly extending the step with each ; 3, 
return to the position of the charge ; 4, heels together. 



290 School Gymnastics 

3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING AND STAMPING WITH AIMING 

OBLIQUELY UPWARD 

1, charge obliquely forward, bar at carry ; 2, stamp twice 
quickly and aim obliquely upward ; 3, charge position and bar 
at carry ; 4, heels together and bar in position. 



LESSOI^ XVII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
a. Bar at carry, aiming obliquely upward and returning, 

right— One ! 16—16. 
h. Charge ! — stamp — charge — place. 16 — 16. 
c. Combine! 16 — 16. 
a. Bar above head — One ! 8. 
h. On toes ! — bend — up — place. 16. 

Note. — Rising on toes and bending knees with 
bar over head. 
[ a. Trunk twisting and bending sideways with aiming to 

5. ] the rear, left— One ! 16—16. 
[b. With charging ! 16—16. 

6. Bar back of shoulders and trunk bending forward — 
One ! 32. 

Note. — As in Lesson XII. 

Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Marching. (Eeturn bar-bells to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Bunning. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 



291 




4 6. RISING ON TOES AND BENDING KNEES WITH BAR OVER HEAD 

1, rise on the toes, bar over head ; 2, keeping the bar above 
the head, bend the knees ; 3, straighten the knees ; 4^ heels and 
bar down. 



292 



School Gymnastics 





5 a, TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING SIDEWAYS WITH AIMING 

TO THE REAR 

1. twist the trunk to the right^ bend the trunk sideways to 
the left and aim obliquely upward to the rear; 2, hold the 
position ; 3, return to position ; 4^ hold. 



Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 



293 




5 h, CHARGING WITH TRUNK TWISTING AND AIMING TO THE REAR 

1, charge forward with the right foot, twist the trunk to the 
aef t, bend to the right and aim upward to the rear ; 2, hold the 
position ; 3, return to position ; 4, hold. 



294 School Gymnastics 



LESSON XVIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
a. Aiming obliquely upward, alternately, right — One ! 
16. 

Note. — As for the second count of 3 a, Lesson XVI. 
h. Charge ! — reverse. 16 — 16. 

Note. — Reverse charging and aiming obliquely. 

r a- Bar above head — One ! 8. 

4. \ 

[ h. On toes ! — bend — up — place. 16. 

r a. Trunk twisting and bending sideways with aiming to 

5. \ the rear, right — One ! 16 — 16. 
I h. With charging ! 16—16. 

( a. Alternate trunk bending forward and bar back of 

6. I shoulders — One! 16. 
16. Combine! 8. 

Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 

7. Marching. (Return bar-bells to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Kunning. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 



295 




3 6. REVERSE CHARGING AND AIMING OBLIQUELY 

1, charge obliquely forward with the right foot, and aim 
obliquely upward in the direction of the charge ; 2, reverse the 
charging position by facing obliquely to the rear to the left 
side, left knee bent, and swing the wand downward and upward 
to the oblique upward aiming, in the direction of the last charge ; 
continue to reverse the directions to 15; 16, position. 



296 



School Gymnastics 




6 a. TRUNK BENDING FORWARD AND BAR BACK OF SHOULDERS, 

ALTERNATELY 

1, bend the trunk forward^ the bar down in front at arm's 
length ; 2, trunk erect ; 3, bar back of shoulders ; 4, bar to 
position. In bending the trunk forward keep the back straight 
and the head in line with it. 



6 6. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING FORWARD AND BAR BACK 

OF SHOULDERS 

1, bend the trunk forward and place the bar back of the 
shoulders, as shown in the illustration to 5 h, Lesson XII; 
2, trunk erect and bar down to position. 



Eighth Series 

Sixth Year, Girls 
Iron Grace Hoops wound with Tape — li pounds 

LESSON I 

Note. — For stretching, marching, floor formation, effects of 
exercises, etc., see Explanatory Notes. 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Hoop in position for work — Place ! 
a. Hoop forward — One ! 8. 

3. \ h. Hoop at chest — One ! 8. 
G. Alternate ! 16. 

a. Point step forward, alternately, right — One ! 16. 
h. Backward! 16. 

Note. — Point step backward. 
Ic. With hoop! 32. 

Hoop at carry — Place ! 

5. Forward — March ! (Return hoops to j)lace.) 

6. Stretching. 



297 



298 



School Gymnastics 




HOOP AT CARRY 

While marching to and from 
position on the floor, the hoop 
should be carried over the right 
shoulder, as in the accompanying 
illustration. 



HOOP IN POSITION FOR WORK 

Swing the hoop forward at arm's 
length, grasp it with both hands, 
and lower the arms at full length 
in front, so that the hoop rests 
against the body in a vertical posi- 
tion. To return the hoop to carry, 
reverse this movement. 




Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 299 

3«. HOOP FORWARD 

1, raise the hoop forward at arm's length; 2, return the 
hoop to position. Keep the head erect. 



Zb. HOOP AT CHEST 

1, bend the elbows and place the hoop vertically in front of 
the chest and face, so that it forms a frame for the latter ; 
2, position. In raising the hoop for this exercise, the shoulder- 
blades should be drawn together, so that they may be flattened 
and the chest expanded; the chin should be held well in. 



3 c. HOOP FORWARD AND AT CHEST 

1, raise the hoop forward; 2, hoop in position; 3, hoop at 
chest; 4, position. 

4 a. POINT STEP FORWARD 

1, touch the toe of the right foot forward as far as can be 
done without transferring any weight to it ; the knee and in- 
step should be strongly stretched ; 2, heels together. 

This is a balance exercise, and cultivates firm, erect 
carriage. 

4&. POINT STEP BACKWARD 

This is the same as the point step forward, except in direc- 
tion. The stretching should be from the waist, so as to in- 
crease the curve of the lower back. 



300 



School Gymnastics 




4 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP 
FOKWARD AND BACKWARD WITH 
HOOP FORWARD AND AT CHEST 

1, point step forward with the 
right foot, and hoop forward; 
2j foot and hoop in position; 



3, the same with the left foot; 

4, position ; 5, point step back- 
ward with the right foot, and 
hoop at chest ; 6, position ; 7, the 
same with the left foot ; 8, posi- 
tion. 




Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls oOl 



LESSON II 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Hoop in position — Place ! 
a. Aiming sideways right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
h. Foot: 8—8—16. 

Note. — Point step sideways. 

c. Alternate! 16—16. 

d. Combine! 8—8—16. 
a.* Hoop at chest — One ! 8. 
h. On toes! 8. 

Note. — Eising on toes, 
c. Combine ! 16. 

Hoop at carry — Place ! 

5. Forward — March ! (Eeturn hoops to place.) 

6. Stretching. 

7. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



3. 



3 a. AIMING SIDEWAYS 

1, extend the right arm sideways at full length at shoulder 
levelj the hoop resting vertically against the arm, the left 
elbow high; pull hard upon the chest; the position is that 
of aiming with a bow and arrow ; turn the head and look in 
the direction of the aiming ; 2, hoop down to position. 



Zh. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS 



This is the same as the previous point steps except in direc- 
tion. Be sure that the weight remains firmly on the station- 
ary foot; so as to cultivate steady poise. 



302 



School Gymnastics 




3 c. ALTERNATE POINT 
STEP AND AIMING 
SIDEWAYS 

1, aim to the right 
side; 2, position; 3, 
point step to the right 
side ; 4, position. 



Zd. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND AIMING SIDEWAYS 

1, point step and aiming simultaneously to the right side ; 
2, foot and hoop to position. 



4 6. RISING ON TOES 

1, rise on the toes as high as possible ; 2, heels down, with- 
out noise or jarring. The weight should remain on the forward 
part of the foot after the heels are lowered. 



4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND HOOP AT CHEST 

1, rise on the toes and raise the hoop to the chest ; 2, hoop 
and heels down. 

BREATHING 

Eaise the arms sideways to shoulder level while inhaling ; 
lower them to position while exhaling. 



Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 



303 



3. \ 



4. 



6. 

7. 
8. 



9. 



LESSON III 
Stretching. 
Facings. 
Marching. 

Hoop in position — Place ! 
Hoop over head — One ! 16. 
Foot !— forward. 8—8—16. 

Note. — Point step forward. 
Combine ! 16. 

Aiming sideways, right — One ! 
Trunk !— twist. 8—8—8. 
Note. — Trunk twisting. 
Combine ! 16. 

Hoop at carry — Place ! 
Forward — - March ! (Eeturn 

hoops to place.) 
Stretching. 
Running. 

Note. — See Explanatory 
Note 7. 
Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



a. 
h. 

c. 



3 a. HOOP OVER HEAD 

1, raise the hoop horizontally over 
the head, the arms fully extended ; 
bend the head backward and look 
up through the hoop ; 2, hoop down 
to position. Pull upon the chest 
with the arms. Keep the chest well 
forward and avoid a sway-back 
position. 



8—8. 




304 



School Gymnastics 



3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP FORWARD AND HOOP OVER HEAD 

1, point step forward and hoop over head ; 2, hoop and foot 
to position. 

4&. TRUNK TWISTING 

1, keeping the feet firmly in position, twist or rotate the 
trunk to the side as far as possible, so as to create a strong 
pressure upon the internal organs ; the chest should be thrown 
well forw^ard in this movement; the head should move with 
the trunk, but no farther ; 2, return to position. 




4 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING AND AIMING 

1, twist the trunk to the right side, and aim to the rear on 
the same side ; 2, trunk and hoop to position. In this combi- 
nation the head should turn so as to follow the direction of 
the aiming. 



3. 



Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 305 

LESSON IV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Hoop in position — Place ! 
' a. Hoop above and behind head — One ! 16. 

b. Foot ! — forward — backward — forward — place. 16 — 
16. 

Note. — Point step forward, backward, forward, 
and place. 

c. Combine! 16—16. 

Hoop back of head — Place ! 

4. Alternate point step and walking forward, right — One! 
16—16—16. 

Hoop in position — Place ! 
r a. Aiming sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8. 

5. I h. Trunk !— twist. 8—8—8. 
[ c. Combine — 16. 

Hoop at carry — Place ! 

6. Forward — March ! (K/Cturn hoops to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



3 a. HOOP ABOVE AND BEHIND HEAD 

1, raise the hoojj horizontally over the head, as in the first 
exercise of the previous lesson ; 2, keeping the head perfectly 
still, with the chin drawn in, lower the hoop to a vertical posi- 
tion behind the shoulders, so that the upper rim of it touches 
the head ; the hoop may have to slip through the hands some- 
what to allow it to touch the head ; 3, hoop again in the hori- 
zontal position over the head ; 4, hoop to position. 

This is one of the best exercises for the chest and shoulder- 
blades. 



306 School Gymnastics 

3 6. POINT STEP FOKWARD AND BACKWARD 

1, point ste^D forward ; 2, point step backward ; 3, point step 
again forward; 4, heels together. The shoulders should not 
move in this exercise, the weight remaining firmly on the 
stationary foot. 




3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP 
FORWARD AND BACKWARD 
WITH HOOP ABOVE AND BE- 
HIND HEAD 

1, point step forward with 
the right foot, and the hoop 
horizontally over the head ; 
2, point step backward, and hoop 
behind the head ; 3, point step 
forward, and hoop over the 
head ; 4, foot and hoop to posi- 
tion. 



4. ALTERNATE POINT STEP AND WALKING FORWARD 

1, point step forward with the right foot ; 2, heels together ; 
3, 4, the same with the left foot; 6, 6, 7, walk forward; 
8, heels together. Eepeat, walking backward to place. Ee- 
peat, facing to the right on the first count, walking in that 
direction and back to place, and then to the left and to place. 
The entire exercise may be repeated if time allows. 



Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 307 



LESSON V 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Hoop in position — Place ! 
r a. Hoop above and behind head — One ! 16. 
3^ \h. Foot ! — forward — backward — forward — place. 16 — 16. 
c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

Hoop back of head — Place ! 
a. Alternate point step and walking forward, right — 

One! 
h. With aiming ! Once in each direction. 

Note. — Aim sideways Avith the point step on the 
same side as the moving foot, and place the hoop back 
of the head for walking. 
Hoop in position — Place ! 
a. Hoop forward — One ! 8. 

Note. — As in 3 a, Lesson I. 

5. \ h. Trunk !— bend. 8—8—8. 
Note. — Trunk bending sideways. 

!. Combine ! 16. 

Hoop at carry — Place ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Return hoops to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Punning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



308 



School Gymnastics 



5 ft. TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 

1, bend the trunk from the waist directly to the side, the 
head remaining in line with the trunk ; 2, return to the erect 
position. 

This exercise, by means of the pressure exerted upon the 
internal organs, quickens the circulation and digestion. 




5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK 
BENDING SIDEWAYS AND 
HOOP FORWARD 

1, raise the hoop for- 
ward ; 2, keeping the hoop 
in this position, bend the 
trunk to the side ; 3, trunk 
erect; 4, hoop down to 
position. On the last eight 
counts alternate the sides, 
raising the hoop as the 
trunk bends and return- 
ing it to position as the 
trunk is raised. 



9. BREATHING 



Eaise the arms sideways to a vertical position while inhal- 
ing; arms down to position while exhaling. 



6. 



Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls .'>()9 

LESSON VI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Hoop in position — Place. 
a. Aiming obliquely downward, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
5. Foot!— side. 8—8—16. 

Note. — Point step sideways. 
. c. Combine ! 16. 

Hoop back of head — Place ! 
f a. Alternate point step and walking forward, right — 
4. ] One! 16—16—16. 

[h. With aiming! 16—16—16. 
Hoop in position — Place ! 
Hoop forward — One 1 8. 
h. Trunk!— bend. 8—8. 
c. Combine ! 16. 

Hoop at carry — Place I 

6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn hoops to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



f a 
\ h 



3 a. AIMING OBLIQUELY DOWNWARD 

1, aim obliquely downward at the side, the hoop resting on 
the arm ; turn the head and look down in the direction of the 
aiming ; 2, hoop in position. 



310 



School Gymnastics 




3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP 
SIDEWAYS AND AIMING OB- 
LIQUELY DOWNWAKD 

1, point step sideways, with a 
slight bend at the waist, and aim 
obliquely downward; turn the 
head and look down at the foot ; 
2, foot and hoop to position. 



Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 311 

LESSON VII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Hoop in position — Place ! 
• f a. Aiming obliquely downward, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 

3. j h. Foot !— side. 8—8—16. 
I c. Combine ! 16. 

r a. Hoop over shoulders — One ! 16. 

4. \b. Balance step — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
i c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 

a. Hoop over head — One ! 8. 
h. Trunk !— twist. 8—8. 
c. Combine !— 16 or 32. 

Hoop at carry — Place ! 

6. Forward— March ! (Return hoops to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin! Six times. 



5. 



4«. HOOP OVER SHOULDERS 

1, raise the hoop above the head at arm's length, bend the 
elbows and lower the hoop over the head to shoulder level; 
2, return the hoop to position, being sure to extend the arms 
upward to their full length in the transition, with a strong 
pull upon the chest. The head should remain firmly erect> 
throughout. 

4 6. BALANCE STEP 

1, cross the right foot over in front of the left one, and rise 
on the toes of both feet; the knee of the moving foot should 
not bend, and the shoulders should remain squarely to the front ; 
2, heels together. 

Like all balance exercises, this is admirable for cultivating a 
firm poise and upright carriage. 



312 



School Gymnastics 





4 c. COMBINATION OF BALANCE STEP 
AND HOOP OVER SHOULDERS 

1, balance step with the right 
foot and hoop over the shoulders ; 
2, position. 



5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWIST- 
ING AND HOOP OVER HEAD 

1, twist the trunk to the side and 
raise the hoop horizontally over 
the head, at arm's length ; 2, posi- 
tion. 




o 



3. 



Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 31* 



LESSON VIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Hoop in position — Place ! 
a. Hoop forward — One ! 16. 
h. Charge! 8—8—16. 

Note. — Charging forward, 
c. Combine! 8—8—16. 
r a. Hoop over shoulders — One ! 16. 

4. ] h. Balance ! 8—8—16. 
I c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 

r a. Hoop over head — One ! 8. 

5. \ b. Trunk !— twist. 8—8. 
I c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 

6. Hoop over shoulders and trunk bending sideways^ right — 
One ! 32. 

Hoop at carry — Place ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Return hoops to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Eunning. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



3 6. CHARGING FORWARD 

1, take a long step forward with the right foot, bend the right 
knee and throw all of the weight upon it ; the trunk should be 
held erect, and the shoulders should face to the front ; the rear 
heel should remain upon the floor and the rear knee should be 
stiff ; 2, recover position without scuffing the feet over the floor. 
The bend of the forward knee should be enough to bring the 
large muscular groups of the thigh well into action^ and so 
quicken the circulation. 



314 



School Gymnastics 




2 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING 
AND RAISING HOOP FORWARD 

1^ charge forward and raise 
the hoop forward at arm's 
length ; 2, position. 



6. HOOP OVER SHOULDERS AND 
TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 

1, hoop over the shoulders 
as with the balance step ; 

2, bend the trunk to the side ; 

3, trunk erect ; 4, hoop down 
to position. 




Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 315 



LESSON IX 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Hoop in position — Place! 

a. Hoop forward — One ! 16. 

h. Charge! 8—8—16. 
Ic. Combine! 8—8—16. 
( a. Hoop swinging sideways^ right — One ! 16. 

4. -j h. Alternate balance! 16. 
I c. Combine ! 16. 

f a. Hoop above head — One ! 8. 

5. ] h. Trunk !— twist. 8—8. 
I c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 

6. Hoop over shoulders and trunk bending sideways, right — 
One ! 32. 

Hoop at carry ^ — Place ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Return hoops to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



316 



School Gymnastics 

4 a. HOOP SWINGING SIDEWAYS 



In two counts swing the hoop across the front of the body to 
an oblique upward position at the side, the hoop itself held ver- 
tically; on the next two counts swing the hoop down, across, 
and up to the other side. Turn the head so as to look at the 
hoop. 

4 6. ALTERNATE BALANCE 

This is the same as the balance step in previous lessons, ex- 
cept that the feet are alternated. 1, balance step with the 
right foot ; 2, heels together; 3, balance step with the left foot; 
4, heels together. 




4 c. COMBINATION OF ALTER- 
NATE BALANCE STEP AND 
HOOP SWINGING SIDEWAYS 

1, balance step with the 
right foot, crossing it toAvard 
the left, and swinging the hoop 
up on the left side; 2, heels 
together and hoop down; 3, 
balance step with the left foot 
toward the right, and swing 
the hoop up on the right side ; 
continue to alternate to 15; 
16, position. The movement 
should be a continuous swing 
from one side to the other, 
without any pause or jerk in 
the transition. 



3. 



Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 317 

LESSON X 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facing's. 
Marching. 

Hoop in position — I^hice ! 
a. Hoop back of shoulder^ right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
h. Foot!— back. 8—8—16. 

Note. — Point step obliquely backward. 
c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 

a. Hoop swinging sideways, right — One ! 16. 
'i h. Alternate balance ! 16. 
c. Combine ! 16. 
a. Hoop back of head — One ! 16. 

5. ] h. Trunk !— twist. 8—8—16. 
I c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 

6. Hoop over shoulders and trunk bending sideways, right — 
One ! 32. 

Hoop at carry — Place ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn hoops to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Eunning. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



3 a. HOOP BACK OF SHOULDER 

This is like the aiming sideways, except that the hoop is back 
of the extended arm instead of in front of it. The opposite 
arm will be back of the head. Turn the head to look backward 
through the hoop. 

This exercise is admirable for flattening the shoulder-blades 
and expanding the chest. 



3&. POINT STEP OBLIQUELY BACKWARD 

This differs from the other point steps only in direction. 
The toe should touch at a point midway between a direct back- 



318 



School Gymnastics 



ward and a sideways position. Turn the head and look back- 
ward over the shoulder at the moving foot. There should be 
no bend at the waist or turning of the shoulders. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT 
STEP OBLIQUELY BACK- 
WARD AND HOOP BACK 
OF SHOULDER 

1, point step obliquely 
backward with the right 
foot and aim sideways 
back of the right shoul- 
der ; look through the 
hoop at the foot ; 2, posi- 
tion. 






5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWIST- 
ING AND HOOP BACK OF HEAD 

1, twist the trunk to the side and 
place the hoop back of the head, 
drawing the chin in; stretch the 
arms fully upward in the transi- 
tion; 2, position. 

This §xercise is excellent for the 
shoulders and chest, as well as for 
its stimulating effect upon the cir- 
culation and digestion. 



Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 319 



LESSON* XI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Hoop in position — Place ! 
r a. Hoop back of shoulder, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 

3. \ b. Foot !— back. 8—8—16. 
[ c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 

a. Hoop swinging sideways, right — One ! 16. 

b. Alternate balance ! 16. 

c. Combine ! 16. 

^ (a. Hoop under arm, right — One ! 8 — 8. 

I b. Trunk forward ! 16. 

' a. Hoop back of head — One ! 16. 

6. j b. Trunk !— twist. 8—8—16. 

c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 

Hoop at carry — Place ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Return hoops to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



320 



School Gymnastics 




5 h. TRUNK BENDING OBLIQUELY 
FORWARD WITH HOOP UNDER 
ARM 

1, place the hoop verti- 
cally under the arm at the 
side, bend the trunk obliquely 
forward, and look through 
the hoop ; 2, position. 



5 a. HOOP UNDER ARM 

1, raise the arm outward at 
the side and place the hoop 
vertically under it; 2, hoop 
in position. 




Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 321 



LESSON XII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Hoop in position — Place ! 
a. Hoop over head — One ! 16. 
h. Charge! 8—8. 
1 Note. — Charging obliquely forward. 

t c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

r a. Hoop swinging obliquely forward, right — One ! 8 — 8 
4. ^ h. Balance ! — double time. 16. 



5. 



L c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
a. Hoop under arm, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
h. With bending ! 16. 



r a. Hoop back of head — One ! 16. 

6. \ b. Trunk !— twist. 8—8—16. 
I c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 

Hoop at carry — Place ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn hoops to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



322 School Gymnastics 

3 6. CHARGING OBLIQUELY FORWARD 

This differs from the charging forward only in the direction, 
which should be midway between the front and side. The 
shoulders should face in the direction of the charge. Be sure 
that the step is long enough to admit of a bend of the knee 
sufficient to stimulate the circulation through the action of the 
thigh muscles. 

3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING OBLIQUELY FORWARD AND 

HOOP OVER HEAD 

1, charge obliquely forward . and raise the hoop over the 
head ; bend the head backward and look up through the hoop ; 

2, position. 

4 a. HOOP SWINGING OBLIQUELY FORWARD 

1, swing the hoop obliquely upward in front, holding it hori- 
zontally ; 2, hoop down and up to the opposite side, still in 
the horizontal position. The head should follow the move- 
ment of the hoop. 

4 h. OBLIQUE BALANCE STEP, IN DOUBLE TIME 

This is the alternate balance step taken in double time, and 
with a longer step, the foot being placed obliquely forward on 
the opposite side from its normal position. 1, balance step to 
the right ; 2, heels together and balance step to the left ; 

3, heels together and balance step to the right, etc. ; 16, position. 
In this oblique balance step, the shoulders should face obliquely 
in the direction of the step. 



4 c. COMBINATION OF BALANCE STEP IN DOUBLE TIME AND 
HOOP SWINGING OBLIQUELY FORWARD 

1, a long balance step to the left with right foot, and swing 
the hoop horizontally upward on the left side ; 2, reverse the 
position ; continue to 15 ; 16, position. 



Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 323 



LESSON XIIT 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Hoop in position — Place ! 
C a. Hoop over head — One ! 16. 

3. ] h. Charge ! 8—8—16. 
I c. Combine ! 16. 

r a. Hoop swinging obliquely forward, right — One! 16. 

4. ] b. Balance ! ^—S, 

i c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
r a. Hoop under arm — One ! 8 — 8. 
\h. With bending! 16. 
a. Hoop back of head — One ! 8. 
h. Trunk ! — sideways. 32. 

Note. — Trunk bending sideways. 
Hoop at carry — Place ! 

7. Forward — March ! (Return hoops to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



324 



School Gymnastics 




6 6. TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 
WITH HOOP BACK OF HEAD 

1, hoop back of the head; 

2, bend the trunk to the side ; 

3, trunk erect; 4, hoop in posi- 
tion. Alternate the sides. 

This exercise has a stimulat- 
ing effect upon the digestive 
organs and the circulation if 
the bend is considerable. It is 
excellent for the chest and 
shoulder-blades. 



Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 325 



LESSON XIV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Hoop in position — Place ! 
a. Hoop obliquely upward and downward — One ! 16. 

3. h. Rocking! 16—16. 
c. Combine! 16—16. 

r a. Hoop swinging obliquely forward — One ! 16. 

4. ^ h. Balance ! 8—8. 

I c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
^ I a. Hoop back of head — One ! 8. 
I h. Trunk ! — sideways. 32. 
Hoop at carry — Place ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn hoops to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



3 a. HOOP OBLIQUELY UPWARD AND DOWNWARD 

1, raise the hoop obliquely forward and upward in a hori- 
zontal position; 2, hold the position; 3, lower the hoop to 
a position obliquely downward, the outer edge tipped below 
the horizontal ; continue to 15 ; 16, position. Bend the head 
so as to look through the hoop in both the upward and down- 
ward positions. 



326 



School Gymnastics 



Zh. ROCKING 

1^ charge forward; 2, without moving the feet, straighten 
the knees, transfer the weight to the rear foot and bend the 
rear knee; 3, rock forward to the charge position again; 
continue to alternate to 15 ; 16, position. Bend the knee as 
much as possible. 



^ T^^ ■^?sC^r=''5S«*'?^^ 3W. '^■"'^^ 





3 c. COMBINATION OF ROCKING WITH HOOP OBLIQUELY UPWARD 

AND DOWNWARD 

1, charge forward, and raise the hoop obliquely forward in 
the horizontal position; look up through the hoop; 2, rock 
backward, lower the hoop obliquely downward, the outer rim 
touching the forward ankle, and look down at that point ; 
16, position. 



I 



3. 



Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 327 



LESSON XV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Hoop in position — Place ! 
a. Hoop obliquely upward and downward — One ! 16 — 16, 
h. Rocking! 16—16. 
c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
a. Hoop swinging sideways, right — One ! 16. 

Note. — As in Lesson IX. 
h. Swaying and bending, right — One ! 16. 
c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
C a. Hoop back of head — One ! 16. 

5. ] h. Trunk !— twist. 8—8—16. 
[ c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 

Hoop at carry — Place ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Return hoops to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



4 6. SWAYING AND BENDING 

1, step to the right side with the weight on the right foot; 
the left toe should touch as in the point step to the left side ; 
bend slightly at the waist and look down at the left foot; 
2, hold the position ; 3, rise on the toes and reverse the posi- 
tion by transferring the weight to the left foot, and looking 
down at the right; 4, hold the position; continue to 15; 
16, position. 



328 



School Gymnastics 




4 c. COMBINATION OF SWAYING AND BENDING WITH HOOP 
SWINGING SIDEWAYS 

1, step to the right, swing the hoop up to the right side, and 
bend and look down toward the left foot ; 2, hold the position ; 
3, reverse ; 4, hold ; continue to 15 ; 16, position. 

This exercise is excellent for the waist muscles and for cul- 
tivating freedom and grace of movement. 



9. BREATHING 



Eaise arms forward to the vertical position while inhaling ; 
lower them sideways Avhile exhaling. 



Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 329 

LESSON XVI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Hoop in position — Place ! 
a. Hoop forward and back of head — One ! 16. 
h. Charge ! — foot back. 16 — 16. 

ISToTE. — Charging forward and point step backward. 
^ c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

r a. Hoop swinging sideways, right — One ! 16. 
h. Swaying! 16. 
c. Combine! 32. 

a. Aiming sideways, hoop over head and return, right — 
One ! 16—16. 

5. \ b. Facing and trunk bending sideways, right — One! 
16—16. 

c. Combine ! 16—16. 

Hoop at carry — Place ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn hoops to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



3 a. HOOP FORWARD AND BACK OF HEAD 

1, raise the hoop forward at arm's length ; 2, hold the posi- 
tion ; 3, hoop vertical, back of the head ; 4, hold ; 5, hoop for- 
ward again ; 6, hold ; 7, hoop back of head ; 8, hold ; 9, hoop 
forward; 10, hold; alternate these two movements to 15; 
16, position. 

3&. CHARGING FORWARD AND POINT STEP BACKWARD 

1, charge forward ; 2, hold the position ; 3, point step back- 
ward ; 4, hold the position ; alternate the two movements to 
15 ; 16, position. 



330 



School Gvmnastics 



3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING FORWARD AND POINT STEP 
BACKWARD, WITH HOOP FORWARD AND BACK OF HEAD 

1, charge forward and raise the hoop forward at arm's 
length ; 2, hold the position ; 3, point step backward and hoop 
back of head ; 4, hold the position ; alternate the movements 
to 15 ; 16, position. 

ba. AIMING SIDEWAYS AND HOOP OVER HEAD 

1, aim to the side, the hoop vertical ; 2, hoop horizontal over 
the head ; 3, aim to the side ; 4, position. Pull well upon the 
chest. ■ 

6 6. FACING AND TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 

1, face to the right ; 2, bend the trunk to the right side ; 
3, trunk erect ; 4, face the front. 




be. COMBINATION OF FACING 
AND TRUNK BENDING SIDE- 
WAYS WITH AIMING SIDE- 
WAYS AND HOOP OVER HEAD 

1, face and aim to the right 
side ; 2, raise the hoop over 
head and bend the trunk to 
the right ; 3 as 1 ; 4, position. 

This exercise is particu- 
larly effective for strengthen- 
ing the muscles of the trunk 
around the waist. 



Eighth Series J Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 331 



5. 



LESSON XVII 



1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marchinsr. 



^&" 



Hoop in position — Place ! 
-. Hoop forward and back of head — One ! 16. 
. Charge !— back. 16—16. 
. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

,. Hoop swinging sideways, right — One ! 16. 
. Swaying with reverse bending, right — One ! 32. 
. Combine! 32. 

,. Aiming sideways, hoop over head and return, right- 
One ! 16—16. 
. Face!— bend. 16—16. 
. Combine! 16—16. 

Hoop at carry — Place ! 
6. Forward — March ! (Return hoops to place.) 
1. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



4 6. SWAYING WITH REVERSE BENDING 

1, sway to the right as in the previous swaying exercise, and 
look down at the left foot ; 2, hold the position ; 3, keeping 
the weight on the right foot, bend at the waist to the right 
side, and look up to the left ; 4, hold ; 5, return to the previous 
position ; 6, hold ; 7, sway to the opposite side and repeat the 
movements there ; come to position on the last count. 



332 



School Gymnastics 





4 c. COMBINATION OF SWAYING WITH REVERSE BENDING AND 
HOOP SWINGING SIDEWAYS 

1, step to the right, swing the hoop up to that side and look 
down at the left foot ; 2, hold the position ; 3, bend the trunk 
to the right side, swing the hoop up to the left side, and look 
up at it ; 4, hold the position ; 5, return to the previous 
position ; 6, hold ; 7, transfer the weight to the opposite foot, 
and repeat the movements on that side ; position on the last 
count. 

This exercise is excellent for cultivating strength and sup- 
pleness of the waist muscles. 



Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 333 



LESSON XYIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Hoop in position — Place ! 
r a. Hoop forward and back of head — One ! 16. 

3. \ b. Charge !— back. 16—16. 
I c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

[ a. Hoop swinging sideways^ right — One ! 16. 

4. -! b. Swaying ! — bend — reverse — place. 16 — 16. 
I c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

r a. Hoop aiming sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 

5. \ b. Trunk !— twist. 8—8—16. 

I c. Combine with charging ! 16 — 16 — 32. 
Hoop at carry — Place ! 

6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn hoops to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



334 



School Gymnastics 





be. COMBINATION OF CHARGING AND TRUNK TWISTING WITH 
HOOP AIMING SIDEWAYS 



1, charge forward with the left foot, at the same time twist- 
ing the trunk to the right and aiming backward to the right ; 
2, hold the position ; 3, position ; 4^ hold. 



Ninth Series 

Seventh Year, Boys and Girls 
Indian Clubs, 1 pound 

LESSOR I 

Note. — For stretching, tactics, floor formation, effects of 
exercises, etc., see Explanatory Notes. 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 
a. Full circle sideways, right — Start ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
h. Foot !— side— place. 16—16. 

Note. — Point step sideways. 
c. Combine! 16—16. 

4. Marching. (Return clubs to place.) 

5. Stretching. 



335 



336 



School Gymnastics 




CLUBS IN POSITION FOE WORK 

Grasp the handle of the clubs 
around the ball, bend the fore- 
arm forward so that it forms a 
slightly acute angle with the 
upper arm, and hold the clubs 
upright. This is the ^^rest 
position" of the clubs in the 
following exercise. 



Za. FULL CIRCLE SIDEWAYS 

1, from the rest position straighten the arm upward, and 
swing the club outward and downward at full length to the 
side, with a strong pull upon the chest, across the front of the 
body, and up on the other side, describing a circle ; 2, lower 
the club to rest position. Keep the shoulders squarely to the 
front; avoid any swaying of the body. The head should be 
held firmly erect. 

The full arm circle works u]3on the front and sides of the 
chest, upon the top of the shoulder, the back, and the shoulder- 
blades. 

The erect carriage of head and chest is a crucial feature in all 
of the club sivinging, and should he strenuously insisted upon. 
There should be no jerking in the movement. 

See illustration in Lesson II. 



Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 337 

Zh. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS 

1, touch the side of the toe directly to the side, stretching 
the instep and knee as straight as possible ; 2, heels together. 
The weight should remain firmly on the stationary foot, and 
the shoulders should be turned squarely to the front. Keep 
the knees stiff. The foot should be lifted and touched lightly, 
without scuffing. 

This exercise cultivates steadiness and erectness of carriage. 

Rest the clubs on the shoulders while taking the point step. 
Unless otherwise specified, this position of the clubs will be 
understood in succeeding series whenever another part of the 
body is working alone. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND FULL CIKCLE 

SIDEWAYS 




338 School Gymnastics 



LESSON II 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 
f a. Full circle forward, both — Start ! 16. 
I h. Foot !— forward. 16—16. 
I ISToTE. — Point step forward. 

ic. Combine! 16—16. 
a. Full circle sideways, right — Start ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
h. On toes! 16. 

Note. — Rising on toes. 
G. Combine ! 16. 

a. Full circle, both right — Start ! 8 — 8. 
h. Trunk !— twist. 8—8. 

Note. — Trunk twisting. 
c. Combine ! 16—16. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



4. 



6. 



3 a. FULL CIRCLE FORWARD 

1, straighten the arm and swing the clubs forward, down- 
ward, and backward at the side to describe a full circle at the 
side of the body ; 2, rest. Keep the head erect and the shoul- 
ders squarely to the front. Unless these points of posture are 
closely observed, this exercise may be detrimental to good 
position. 



Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Roys and Girls 339 



3^. POINT STEP FORWARD 

1, extend the foot forward and touch the toe on a line 
directly forward of the position from which it started ; 2, heels 
together. Keep the shoul- 
ders (upper part of the 
body) perfectly still and 
the knees stiff. Do not 
drag or scuff the foot 
over the floor. The weight 
should remain entirely on 
the stationary foot, that 
the exercise may serve as 
a balance movement, culti- 
vating steady poise of body. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT 
STEP AND FULL CIRCLE 
FORWARD 

1, point step forward and 
both clubs forward in the 
full circle ; 2, heels together 
and clubs at rest. Alter- 
nate the feet in this com- 
bination. 




340 



School Gymnastics 

4 6. RISING ON TOES 



1, rise high on the toes ; 2, heels down, quietly, and without 
jarring. There should be no swaying backward upon the heels 
as these touch the floor. The normal standing position should 
have the weight so far forward that no forward movement is 
necessary for rising on the toes. 




4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND FULL CIRCLE 

SIDEWAYS 

1, rise on the toes and swing the clubs in the full circle side- 
ways ; 2, heels down and clubs at rest. 



Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 341 

5 6. TRUNK TWISTING 

1, twist or rotate the trunk to the side far enough to make a 
strong pressure upon the internal organs ; 2, return to the for- 
ward position. The movement should be from the ankles, the 
feet remaining firmly in place and fiat upon the fioor. The 
head should turn with the trunk, but no farther. There should 
be no sideways bending of the trunk at the waist. Alternate 
the direction on the last eight counts. The clubs should be 
upon the shoulders during this exercise. 



be. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWIST- 
ING AND FULL CIRCLE 



1, swing both 
side in the full 
the trunk to the 
oblique direction 
bring the clubs to 
3, start the clubs 
twist the trunk 
clubs at rest. 



clubs to the left 
circle and twist 

right; 2, hold the 

of the trunk and 
the rest position; 
to the right and 

to the front; 4, 




8. BREATHING 



While inhaling, raise the arms sideways to shoulder level; 
while exhaling, lower the arms to position. The breathing 
should be much slower and deeper than the normal. 



342 School Gymnastics 

LESSON III 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Chibs in position — Place ! 
a. Alternate full and hand circle forward, right — Start ! 
8—8—16. 

3. I b. Charge! 16—16. 

I Note. — Charging forward. 

[c. Combine! 16 — 16. 

f a. Full circle sideways, right — Start ! 8 — 8 — 16. 

4. \ b. On toes ! 16. 

[ c. Combine ! 16. 

f a. Alternate full circle and pendulum sideways, both right 

I —Start ! 16. 

5. \ b. Trunk !— twist. 16. 

I Note. — Trunk twisting and holding. 

[ c. Combine ! 16. 

6. Marching. (Return clubs to place.) 

7. Running. 

Note. — See Reference Note 7. 

8. Stretching. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



3 a. HAND CIRCLE rORWARD 

The hand circle is made entirely from the wrist, which is the 
centre of the circle. Drop the club forward and describe with 
it a circle on a vertical plane inside of the forearm. 1, full 
circle forward; 2, hand circle forward; alternate to 7; come to 
the rest position on the last count. 



3 b. CHARGING FORWARD 

1, step forward and bend the forward knee, both feet flat 
upon the floor, the rear knee straight, and all of the weight 



Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 343 

upon the forward foot; 2, heels together. Keep the trunk of 
the body upright and the shouklers squarely to the front. 

This exercise should bring into strong action the muscles of 
the calf and thigh, and through them quicken effectively the 
circulation. Unless the knees are bent as far as possible, this 
result will not be obtained. 



3r. COMBINATION OF CHARGING FORWARD WITH ALTERNATE 
FULL AND HAND CIRCLE FORWARD 

1, charge forward, and swing both clubs in a full circle for- 
ward; 2, hold the charge position and make the hand circle 
forward ; 3, heels together and full circle forward ; 4, hokl the 
position for the hand circle. 




344 



School Gymnastics 



last count. 



6 a. ALTERNATE FULL 
CIRCLE AND PENDU- 
LUM SIDEWAYS 

In the pendulum 
swing the clubs de- 
scribe the lower half 
of the full circle across 
the front of the body, 
rising only to the 
shoulder level. 

1, full circle with 
both clubs to the right ; 
2, continue the full 
circle to a pendulum 
swing, pausing at 
shoulder level on the 
left sidfe; 3, full circle 
to the right; 4, pen- 
- ^ dulum to the left; 

clubs at rest on the 
Keep the chest high and the chin drawn in. 




5 6. TRUNK TWISTING AND HOLDING 

1, twist the trunk to the right ; 2, hold the position ; 3, twist 
to the left; 4, hold ; come to position on 16. The clubs should 
rest upon the shoulders throughout. 



5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING WITH FULL CIRCLE AND 

PENDULUM SIDEWAYS 

1, swing the clubs in a full circle to the left, and twist the 
trunk to the right; 2, hold the position of the trunk while the 
clubs take the pendulum swing to the right; 3, clubs in full 
circle to the right and twist the trunk to the left ; 4, hold the 
position for pendulum swing to the left. 



Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 345 



3. 



LESSOK IV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 
r a. Alternate full and hand circle forward, both — Start ! 
J 16. 

I h. Charge ! 16—16. 
I c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

r a. straightening clubs forward, right — Start ! 8 — 8 — ^8. 
h. On toes ! 16. 

ISToTE. — Rising on toes. 
I c. Combine ! 16. 
[ a. Alternate full circle and pendulum sideways, both 

right— Start ! 16. 
i h. Trunk!— twist. 16. 
I c. Combine ! 16. 

6. Marching. (Return clubs to place.) 

7. Running. 

8. Stretching. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



4. \ 



5. < 



346 



School Gymnastics 

4 a. STRAIGHTENING CLUBS FORWARD 



1, from the rest position, straighten the arm and club directly 
forward in one continuous line ; 2, return to the rest position. 







4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND STRAIGHTENING 

CLUBS FORWARD 

1, rise on the toes and straighten the clubs forward ; 2, heels 
down and clubs in rest position. 



Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls ^47 



LESSON V 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 
r a. Alternate hand and full circle forward, both — Start ! 
I 16. 

3. \ h. Foot !— Bend— up— bend— up. 16. 

Note. — Stepping and bending forward. 
. c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
r a. Straightening clubs forward, right — Start ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

4. ^ h. On toes ! 16. 

L c. * Combine ! 16. 

r a. Alternate full circle and pendulum sideways, both 
right— Start ! 16. 
h. Trunk !— twist. 16. 
c. Combine ! 16. 

Clubs on shoulders — Place ! 

6. Marching. (Keturn clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Kunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six timeSo 



5. \ 



348 School Gymnastics 

3 a. ALTERNATE HAND AND FULL CIRCLE FORWARD 

This is like the first exercise in the previous lesson, except 
in the order of the alternation, which is reversed. 

1, hand circle forward ; 2, full circle forward ; rest position 
on the last count. 

3 6. STEPPING AND BENDING FORWARD 

1, step forward, both feet flat upon the floor, and the weight 
equal ; 2, bend the forward knee to the charging position j 
3, straighten the forward knee again, weight equal ; 4, bend as 
in 2 ; continue to alternate the bending and straightening of the 
forward knee to 7; 8, heels together and clubs at rest. The step 
should be long enough to admit of a bend in the knee suflELcient 
to call into action the large thigh muscles, and so stimulate the 
circulation. 

3 c. COMBINATION OF STEPPING AND BENDING FORWARD WITH 
ALTERNATE HAND AND FULL CIRCLE FORWARD ^ 

1, hand circle and stepping forward ; 2, full circle and charge 
position ; 3, hand circle and straighten forward knee ; 4, 5, 6, 
7, continue to alternate the two exercises ; 8, clubs at rest. 



Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 349 



LESSON VI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 
r a. Alternate hand and full circle forward, both — Start ! 

3 ' ^^• 

j h. Foot !— bend— up. 16—16. 

L c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

r a. straightening clubs upward, right — Start ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

. I h. On toes ! 16. 
4. { 

Note. — Eising on toes. 

L c. Combine ! 16. 

r a. Alternate full circle forward and hand circle sideways, 
both— Start ! 16. 
h. With trunk! 16. 
L Note. — Trunk bending forward. 

6. Marching. (Return clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



5. 



350 



School Gymnastics 




4 a. STRAIGHTENING CLUBS 
UPWARD 

Straighten the arms and 
clubs upward to a vertical 
position, the clubs continu- 
ing the line of the arms. 
Pull well upon the chest ; 
keep the head erect and 
the chin in. 



4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING 
ON TOES AND STRAIGHT- 
ENING CLUBS UPWARD 

1, rise on the toes and 
straighten the arms up- 
ward ; 2, heels down and 
clubs in rest position. 



5 a. ALTERNATE FULL CIRCLE FORWARD AND HAND CIRCLE 

SIDEWAYS 

1, from rest position straighten the arms upward and swing 
the clubs downward and backward in a full circle ; 2, return to 
the rest position ; 3, drop the clubs outward to the sides and 
describe a hand circle sideways ; 4, clubs at rest. 



Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 351 




5 a. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING FORWARD WITH ALTER- 
NATE FULL CIRCLE FORWARD AND HAND CIRCLE SIDEWAYS 

1, raise the clubs upward for the full circle, and as they 
move downward and backward, bend "the trunk forw^ard from 
the hips, with the back straight and the head up ; 2, trunk 
erect and swing the clubs forward and upward to the rest posi- 
tion ; 3, hand circle outward ; 4, clubs in rest position. 

This exercise strengthens the back muscles that hold the 
trunk erect. 



9. BREATHING 



Raise the arms forward to the vertical position while inhal- 
ing ; lower them sideways while exhaling. 



352 



School Gymnastics 



LESSON VII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 
Alternate hand and full circle sideways, both right — 

Start I 16. 
Foot I— bend— up. 16—16. 

Note. — Stepping and bending sideways. 
Combine ! 16—16. 

Straightening clubs upward, right — Start ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
On toes ! 16. 
Combine ! 16. 
Alternate full circle forward and hand circle sideways, 

both— Start ! 16. 
With trunk ! 16. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



{a. 

I 

I 

3. \ b. 

1 

I 
I 

(C. 
(CI. 

lb. 

I 

[c. 

C a. 

I 

1 

[b. 



4. 



5. 



i 



Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 



353 



3«. ALTERNATE HAND AND FULL CIRCLE SIDEWAYS 

1, hand circle sideways ; 2, full circle sideways; continue to 
alternate these two movements until the last count, when the 
clubs should be returned to the rest position. 





3 6. STEPPING AND BENDING SIDEWAYS 

1, step to the right side, the weight equal ; 2, bend the knee 
on that side as for a side charge ; 3, straighten the knee ; 
4, bend again ; continue to alternate the bending and straighten- 
ing to 15 ; 16, position. The clubs should rest upon the shoul- 
ders for this exercise. 



School Gymnastics 




3 c. COMBINATION OF STEPPING AND BENDING SIDEWAYS WITH 
HAND AND FULL CIRCLE SIDEWAYS 

1, hand circle with both clubs to the right and step sideways 
to the right; 2, full circle with both clubs to the right and 
bend the right knee to the charge position ; 3, hand circle and 
knee straight ; alternate to 15; 16, position. 



Ninth Series, huiian Clubs — Boys and Girls 355 



3 



LESSON VIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Chibs in position — Place ! 
a. Alternate hand and full circle sideways, both — Start ! 
16. 
I h. Foot! — bend — up. 16 — 16. 
i c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
a. Straightening clubs forward, upward and return, right 

—Start! 8. 
h. On toes! — bend — up — place. 16. 
j iSToTE. — Rising on toes and bending knees. 

[ 0. Combine ! 16. 
fa. Pendulum, both right — Start! 8 — 8. 

5. ] h. Trunk side ! 16. 

I IS^oTE. — Trunk bending sideways. 

6. Marching. (Keturn clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Kunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



4 a. STRAIGHTENING CLUBS rOEWARD, UPWARD AND RETURN 

1, extend the clubs forward ; 2, raise them to a vertical posi 
tion ; 3, return to the forward position ; 4, clubs at rest posi- 
tion. Be sure to keep the elbows straight as the arms move 
from the forward to the upward position and back again. The 
head should be perfectly erect throughout. 



356 



School Gymnastics 

4 6. RISING ON TOES AND BENDING KNEES 

1, rise on the toes; 2, bend the 
knees ; 3, straighten the knees ; 4, 
heels down. The clubs should rest 
upon the shoulders throughout this 
exercise. The trunk should be held 
perfectly erect as knees bend. 




4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON 
TOES AND BENDING KNEES WITH 
STRAIGHTENING CLUBS FORWARD 
AND UPWARD 

1, rise on the toes and straighten 
the clubs forward ; 2, bend the knees 
and raise the clubs upward ; 3, 
straighten the knees and extend the 
clubs forward again; 4^ heels down 
and clubs at rest position. The head 
will need especial attention in this 
combination. 



5 a. PENDULUM 

1, pendulum swing to the left with both clubs, starting these 
clubs to the right ; 2, pendulum to the right ; 3, pendulum to 
the left; continue to 7 ; 8, clubs at rest position. On the 
second eight counts start both clubs outward and repeat the 
movement with the clubs moving in opposition. 



Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 367 



bh. TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 
WITH PENDULUM CLUB SWING- 
INQ 

1, start both clubs to the right 
and bend the trunk to the right ; 
2, hold the position, as in the 
illustration ; this gives a pause 
in which to reverse the mo- 
mentum of the movement; 3, 
reverse the movement, bending 
the trunk and swinging the clubs 
to the opposite side; return to 
position on the last count. 

The bending of the trunk 
should be from the waist and 
directly to the side. The head 
should be in line with the trunk. 
This exercise is very serviceable 
for expanding the chest later- 
ally. It strengthens the waist 
muscles and stimulates circula- 
tion and digestion. 




358 School Gymnastics 



3. < 



LESSON IX 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 
r a. Full circle backward, both — Start ! 16. 
' b. Stretch step! 8—8. 

Note. — Stretch step forward. 
[c. Combine! 16—16. 

r a. straightening clubs forward, upward, and return, both 
—Start! 8. 
h. On toes I — bend — up — place. 16. 
L c. Combine ! 16. 

r a. Pendulum, both left — Start ! 8 — 8. 
• [h. Trunk side! 16. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin! Six times. 



4. \ 



3 a. FULL CIRCLE BACKWARD 

This is the same as the full circle forward except in direc- 
tion, the club being swung backward after it is lifted. This is 
a very difficult exercise to do correctly, as the head is very apt 
to move forward in opposition to the arms. Observe carefully 
a firm, upright carriage of the head and chest throughouto 



Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys mid Girls 



359 



3 6. STRETCH STEP FORWARD 

1, bend the left knee, which should retain all of the weight, 
and extend the right^foot forward, the knee stiff, and the toe 
only touching the floor ; 2, heels together. The bend of the 
knee should be as deep as possible with an erect position of 
the trunk. 




3 c. COMBINATION OF STRETCH STEP FORWARD AND FULL CIRCLE 

BACKWARD 

1, stretch step forward with the right foot and full circle 
backward with both clubs ; 2, heels together and clubs at rest. 
Be sure to keep the head erect in this exercise. 



360 



School Gymnastics 



3. 



4. 



5. 



! 16. 



lesso:n" X 

1. stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 
f a. Full circle backward^ both — Start 
j h. Stretch step ! 8—8. 
Ic. Combine! 16—16. 

I' a. Straightening clubs sideways, upward and return, 
left— Start ! 8—8—8. 

6. On toes ! — bend — ^np— place. 16. 
I c. Combine ! 16. 

a. Trunk twisting and bending forward, left — Start ! 16. 

6. With clubs! 16. 

6. Marching. (Eetnrn clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 361 

4 a. STRAIGHTENING CLUBS SIDEWAYS, UPWARD AND 

RETURN 

1, straighten the arms and clubs in a line sideways at 
shoulder level ; 2, move them to the vertical position ; 3, return 
to the side position ; 4, clubs at rest. 



4 6. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES WITH STRAIGHTENING 
CLUBS SIDEWAYS AND UPWARD 

This combination is the same as in a similar exercise in 
preceding lessons. 



5 a. TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING 
FORWARD 

1, twist the trunk to the side ; 
2, hold the direction and bend for- 
ward ; 3, return to the erect posi- 
tion ; 4, face the front. Keep the 
back straight and the head well up 
as the trunk is bent forward. 




362 



School Gymnastics 




^^^ 



bh. TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING FORWARD WITH FULL 
CIRCLE SIDEWAYS AND FORWARD 

1, start both clubs to the right for a full circle, and twist the 
trunk to the left ; 2, hold the position of the trunk and bring 
the clubs to rest position ; 3, straighten the clubs upward, and 
swing them downward and backward with the trunk bending 
forward; 4, swing the clubs forward as the trunk returns to 
the erect attitude, and bring the clubs to rest position ; 5, start 
both clubs to the left, and twist the trunk to the right side ; 
6, hold the oblique position, and bring the clubs to rest ; 7, bend 
the trunk forward, etc. On the last count, face to the front 
and return the clubs to the rest position. 



3. 



Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 363 

LESSON XI 

1. Stretcliiiig. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — ^Place ! 
f a. Shoulder circle inward^ right — Start ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
' h. Foot I— back. 8—8. 

I^OTE. — Point step backward. 
c. Combine! 8—8—16. 
a. Straightening clubs sideways, upward and return, rirfit 

—Start ! 8—8—8. 
h. On toes ! — bend — up — place. 10. 
c. Combine ! 16. 

a. Trunk twisting and bending forward, right — Start ! 16. 
h. With clubs! 16. 

6. Marching. (Return clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



4. 



5. 



3 a. SHOULDER CIRCLE INWARD 

1, double the arm upon itself, with the elbow extended side- 
ways, and describe a hand circle back of the shoulder, starting 
inward ; 2, bring the club to the rest position in front of the 
body. Great care will be needed to keep the head perfectly 
erect. 



364 



School Gymnastics 



Zb. POINT STEP BACKWARD 

1, stretch the leg backward from the waist and touch the toe 
in a point step backward; 2, heels together. The knee and 
instep should be stretched. 




3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP BACKWARD AND SHOULDER 

CIRCLE INWARD 

1, backward circle with the right hand, and point step back- 
ward with the right foot; 2, clubs at rest, heels together. 
Through the count of 16, use both clubs and alternate the feet. 
Keep the head erect. 



Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 365 



LESSOISr XII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clnbs in position — Place ! 
C a. Shoulder circle inward, right — Start ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

3. [ b. Foot !— back. 8—8. 
[c. Combine! 8—8—16. 

r a. Full circle, both left— Start ! 8—8—8. 

4. I h. Pivoting ! 8—8—16. 
U. Combine! 8—8—16. 

r a. Trunk twisting and bending forward, right — Start ! 
6. J 16. 

I h. With clubs ! 16. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Ennning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



3G6 



School Gymnastics 



4 ft. PIVOTING 

1, rise on the toes^ pivot to the side on the balls of the feet, 
and put the heels down ; the feet should then be in a straight 
line, one behind the other ; 2, hold the position ; 3, rise on the 
toes and pivot to the front, heels down ; 4, hold the position. 
The clubs should rest upon the shoulders. 

This balance exercise, like all others, cultivates general 
steadiness of poise and upright carriage; it is unusually 



strengthening for 
rotator muscles. 



the ankles, as it brings into action the 




4r. COMBINATION OF PIVOTING AND FULL CIRCLE SIDEWAYS 

1, start both clubs to the left in the full circle and pivot to 
the right ; 2, heels down and clubs at rest ; 3, start both clubs 
to the right and pivot to the front ; 4, heels down, clubs at rest. 



Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 'Mn 



LESSON XllI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 
((. Alternate full circle and shoulder circle outward, right 

—Start I 8— 8— IG. 
h. Foot I— side. 16—16. 

Note. — Stretch step sideways. 
I c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
f a. Full circle, both right— Start ! 8—8—8. 

4. ] h. Pivoting ! 8—8—16. 
Ic. Combine! 8—8—16. 

f a. Trunk twisting and bending forward, right — Start ! 

5. { 16. 

[h. With clubs! 16. 

6. Marching. (Return clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



3 a. ALTERNATE FULL CIRCLE AND SHOULDER CIRCLE OUTWARD 

1, full circle outward ; 2, back shoulder circle outward ; 
alternate through 7 ; 8, clubs at rest. 



368 



School Gymnastics 




3 6. STRETCH STEP SIDEWAYS 

The stretch step sideways is the same as the stretch step 
forward except as to the direction taken by the extended foot. 

1, stretch step sideways ; 2, hold the position ; 3, heels to- 
gether ; 4, hold the position. The clubs should remain upon 
the shoulders. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF STRETCH STEP SIDEWAYS WITH FULL 
CIRCLE AND SHOULDER CIRCLE OUTWARD 

1, stretch step sideways and swing both clubs outward in the 
full circle ; 2, hold the stretch step for the shoulder circle out- 
ward ; 3, heels together and full circle outward ; 4, hold the 
position for the shoulder circle ; 8, heels together and clubs in 
position. 



Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 369 



3. 



LESSON XIV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 
a. Alternate full circle and shoulder circle outward, right 

—Start ! 8—8—16. 
h. Foot!— side. 16—16. 
c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
a. Hand circle forward, twice inward, twice outward, 

both— Start ! 8. 
h. Step!— kneel. 16—16. 

Note. — Kneeling. 
c. Combine! 16—16. 

a. Pendulum and rest, both right — Start ! 16. 
h. Trunk !— twist— bend. 16. 

jSTote. — Trunk twisting and bending sideways. 
c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 

6. Marching. (Return clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing— Begin ! Six times. 



HAND CIRCLE FORWARD 



1, forward hand circle inward; 2, repeat; 3, forward hand 
circle outward ; 4, repeat ; 8, position. 



370 School Gymnastics 




4 ft. KNEELING 

1, 2, step forward with the entire weight on the moving foot, 
the rear foot touching by the toe only ; 3, 4, kneel on the rear 
knee ; 5, 6, rise to the same position as in 1 ; 7, 8, heels together. 
Keep the trunk erect. 

4 c. COMBINATION OF KNEELING WITH HAND CIRCLE 

1, 2, step forward and describe two hand circles inward ; 
3, 4, kneel and describe two circles outward ; 5, 6, rise and 
describe two circles inward; 7, 8, heels together, two circles 
outward. 



5 a. PENDULUM AND REST 

1, start both clubs to the right, and continue the movement 
into the pendulum swing to the left ; 2, clubs at rest ; 3, start 
the clubs to the left, pendulum swing to the right ; 4, clubs at 
rest. 



Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 371 

5^. TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING SIDEWAYS 

1, twist the trunk to the right; 2, hold the position; 3, bend 
the trunk to the right side ; 4, erect position ; 5, twist the trunk 
to the left side ; 6, hold ; 1, bend to the left side ; 8, erect 
position. 

This exercise is particularly effective for the digestive organs. 



5r. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING SIDEWAYS 

WITH PENDULUM 

1, start both clubs to the left, pendulum and trunk twisting 
to the right ; 2, hold the position ; 3, start the clubs to the right 
and bend to the right ; 4, reverse the clubs, swing and return to 
erect position; 5, start the clubs to the right, pendulum and 
trunk twisting to the left, etc. 



372 School Gymnastics 



4. 



LESSON XV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 
a. Alternate full circle and hand circle forward, both — 

Start! 16. 
h. Charge ! — reverse. 16 — 16. 

ISToTE. — Reverse charging sideways. 
c. Combine! 16—16. 
a. Hand circle forward, twice inward, twice outward, 

both— Start ! 8. 
h. Step!— kneel. 16—16. 
c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
r a. Pendulum and rest, both right — Start ! 16. 
h. Trunk! — twist — bend. 16. 



c. Combine I 16 or 32. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



3 a. ALTERNATE FULL CIRCLE AND HAND CIRCLE FORWARD 

1, full circle forward ; 2, hand circle forward ; 3, full circle 
forward ; alternate to 16. 



Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 373 

3 6. REVERSE CHARGING SIDEWAYS 

1, face and charge to the right side ; 2, hold the position ; 
3, without changing the place of the feet, face and charge in 
the reverse direction ; 4, hold ; 5, 6, reverse ; 16, position. 
Observe the usual points of a strong bend in the knee and an 
upright position of the head and trunk. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF REVERSE CHARGING SIDEWAYS WITH 
ALTERNATE FULL CIRCLE AND HAND CIRCLE FORWARD 

1, clubs in full circle to the right, charge and face to the left ; 
2, hold the charge position, for the outward hand circle forward 
with both clubs ; 3, swing both clubs in full circle to the left, 
and reverse the charge to the right side; 4, hold the charge 
position for the hand circle ; 16, feet and clubs to position. 



374 School Gymnastics 



LESSON XVI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 

a. Alternate full circle and hand circle forward^ both- 
Start ! 16. 



4. 



h. Charge ! — reverse. 16 — 16. 



. c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

f a. Full circle outward, both — Start ! 16. 

I). On toes ! — pivot — return — down. 16 — 16. 
Note. — Return pivoting". 

c. Combine ! 16. 
f a. Pendulum and rest, both right — Start ! 16. 

5. ] h. Trunk !— twist— bend. 16. 
I c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 

6. Marching. (Return clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



4 6. RETURN PIVOTING 



1, 2, rise on the toes ; 3, 4, j^ivot to the right side ; 5, 6, return 
to the front ; 7, 8, heels down. 



4 c. COMBINATION OF RETURN PIVOTING AND FULL CIRCLE 

OUTWARD 

1, 2, rise on the toes, swing the clubs in a full circle outward 
and bring them to rest position ; 3, 4, pivot to the side with 
another circle and rest ; 5, 6, return to the front, clubs in full 
circle and rest ; 7, 8, heels down, circle clubs, and rest. 



Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 375 

LESSON XVII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 

Marching. 

Clubs in position — Place ! 

a. One full circle and three hand circles forward, both — 

Start ! 16. 

h. Charge! — reverse. 16 — 16. 

, Note. — Reverse charging obliquely forward. 

c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

f a. Full circle outward, both — Start ! 16. 

4. -! h. On toes ! — pivot — return — clown. 16 — 16. 
I c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

f a. Pendulum and rest, both right — Start ! 16. 

5. -j h. Trunk ! — twist — bend. 16. 
i c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 

6. Marching. (Return clubs to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



Za. FULL CIRCLE AND HAND CIRCLES FORWARD 

1, full circle forward ; 2, outward hand circle forward ; 
3, inward hand circle forward ; 4, outward hand circle forward ; 
5, full circle forward ; 6, 7, 8, repeat the hand circles. 



3/>. REVERSE CHARGING OBLIQUELY FORWARD 

1, charge obliquely forward, right ; 2, hold the position ; 
3, reverse to an oblique backward charge, left ; 4, hold ; 
5, reverse the oblique forward charge ; 6, hold ; continue to 
reverse the charging, with two counts for each position, to 14 ; 
15, 16, position. 



376 



School Gymnastics 





3 c. COMBINATION OF REVERSE CHARGING OBLIQUELY FORWARD, 
AND FULL CIRCLE AND HAND CIRCLES FORWARD 

1, charge obliquely forward and take the full circle forward 
with both clubs ; 2, 3, 4, hold the charge position for the 
hand circles ; 5, full forward circle and reverse the charge ; 
6, 7, 8, hold the position for the hand circles ; 16, feet and 
clubs to position. 



Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 377 



LESSON XVIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Chibs in position — Place ! 

a. One full circle and three hand circles forward, both — 
Start ! 16. 

b. Charge ! — reverse. 16—16. 

c. Combine! 16 — 16. 

[ a. Full circle outward, both — Start ! 16. 

4. \ b. On toes ! — pivot — return — down. 16 — 16. 
I c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

r a. Alternate full circle forward and hand circle side- 

5. i ways, both — Start ! 16. 

I b. With trunk ! — forward. 16. 

I^OTE. — As in Lesson VI. 
r a. Straightening clubs upward, both — Start ! 8. 
[b. Trunk I— side. 8—8—16. 

Note. — Combination of trunk bending sideways 
and straightening clubs upward. 

7. Marching. (Eeturn clubs to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Kunning. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



378 



School Gymnastics 




'tMJm^M/M/M/AyMfMMMil 



6 6. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND 
STRAIGHTENING CLUBS UPWARD 

1, straighten both, clubs upward and bend the trunk to the 
right side ; 2, clubs in rest position, trunk erect. 

This is one of the strongest exercises for the trunk muscles, 
and in its effect upon the digestive and circulatory functions. 



Tenth Series 

Seventh or Eighth Year, Boys and Girls 
Double Series, Dumb-bells — 1 pound 

This series is designed as a substitute for Indian clubs in the 
seventh year, where there is not enough free floor space for club 
icork; and for mixed classes of boys and girls in the eighth year. 

lesso:n^ I 

Note, — For stretcliing, tactics, floor formation, effects of 
exercises, etc., see Explanatory Notes. 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

Partners — Face ! 

a. Clicking bells sideways, same — One ! 8 — 8. 

6. Foot! — point — place. 8 — 8. 
j Note. — Point step sideways. 

Ic. Combine! 16—16. 

4. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

5. Stretching. 



379 



380 School Gymnastics 

XoTE. — The floor formation for this series should be such 
as to leave the pupils standing in pairs, or partners, of equal 
height. These partners should face each other upon the com- 
mand Partners — Face ! This relative position of the partners 
will be understood in subsequent lessons without the special 
command. 

As it is impracticable for commands to indicate on which 
side movements shall begin for two persons facing each other, 
it should be understood at the first lesson toward which side of 
the room all exercises should be commenced. When the com- 
mands indicate that both partners are to start on the " same 
side/' it means that both are to start toward this understood 
side of the room. When the commands indicate opposite 
sides for the two partners, number ones will start toward the 
usual side, and number twos toward the opposite side. 



3 a. CLICKING BELLS SIDEWAYS 

1, swing the bells sideways to shoulder level, palms down, and 
click the thumb ends of partner's bell ; 2, bells to position. 
The arm should pull hard upon the chest when it is extended, 
but the trunk should not turn. 



3 d. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS 

1, extend the foot sideways and point the toe, i.e, stretch 
the instep and depress the toe, touching the toe to the floor ; 
the entire leg from the hip should be stretched, but the weight 
should remain firmly on the stationary foot that the exercise 
may cultivate firm poise of body ; 2, heels together. The bells 
should be placed at the hips during this and all other exer- 
cises in which the arms are not in action. They should be 
placed there on the first count of the foot exercise, without a 
separate command, and lowered to the sides on the last count. 



Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 381 




3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND CLICKING BELLS SIDEWAYS 

1, point step and click the bells sideways at shoulder level 
on the same side as the moving foot ; 2, position. 



382 School Gymnastics 

LESSON II 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

^ a. Clicking bells sideways, same side — One ! 8 — 8. 

3. ] b. Foot !— side— place. 8—8. 
[ c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

f a. Clicking bells sideways, both — One ! 8. 
' b. On toes ! 16. 

Note. — Rising on toes, 
c. Combine ! 16. . 

5. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

6. Stretching. 

7. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



4. 



4/>. RISING ON TOES 



1, rise on the toes as high as possible; 2, lower the heels 
quietly to the floor, without allowing the weight to sway 
backward upon them. There should be no sound or jarring as 
the heels come to place. 



4 e. COMBINATION OF RISING ON THE TOES AND CLICKING BOTH 

BELLS SIDEWAYS 

1, rise on the toes and click the thumb ends of both bells 
sideways at shoulder level ; 2, position. 



7. BREATHING 

Kaise the arms sideways to shoulder level wliile inhaling; 
lower them to position while exhaling. The breathing should 
be slower and much deeper than the normal 



Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 383 



LESSOK III 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

^ a. Clicking bells sideways, same side — One ! 8 — 8. 

3. j b. Foot ! — point — place. 8 — 8. 
i c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

f a. Clicking bells sideways, both — One ! 8 — 8. 

4. j b. On toes ! 16. 

Ic. Combine! 16—16. 
About — Face ! 

Note. — The execution of this order will leave the 
pupils standing back to back. 

5. Trunk twisting and clicking bells sideways — One ! 8 — 
8—16. 

6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



384 



School Gymnastics 



6 a. TRUNK TWISTING AND CLICKING BELLS SIDEWAYS 

1, keeping the feet firmly in position, twist the trunk toward 
the side (partners working toward the same side), and click the 
thumb ends of the bells at arm's length sideways, at shoulder 
height ; 2, twist toward the other side and click the bells on 




that side, and return the opposite bell to the hip ; continue to 
alternate the direction to 7 ; 8, position. Be sure to keep the 
head erect, though it should turn to follow the movement of 
the bells. The bells should be upon the hips on the first 
count and return to that position after the clicking as above 
illustrated. 



Tertth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 385 



LESSON IV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Swinging opposite bells sideways and clicking in centre 
—One ! 8—8. 

3. \ b. Foot ! — side — cross forward — side — place. 8 — 8. 
Note. — Point step sideways and cross step forward. 

c. Combine! 16—16. 
f a. Clicking bells sideways, both — One ! 8 — 8. 

4. -i b. On toes ! 16. 

Ic. Combine! 16—16. 
About — Face ! 

5. Trunk twisting and clicking bells sideways — One ! 8 — 
8—16. 

6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



386 School Gymnastics 

Za. SWINGING OPPOSITE BELLS SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING IN 

CENTRE 

1, swing the opposite bells sideways to shoulder level, turn- 
ing the palms upward ; 2, click the thumb ends of the same 
bells in the centre, palms downward, elbows straight ; 3, swing 
the bells again sideways with the palms upward ; 4, position. 
The shoulders should not turn with the arm movement. 



3 6. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS AND CROSS STEP FORWARD 

1, point step sideways, the partners working with opposite 
feet; 2, cross the same foot forward and touch the toe on a 

line in front of the 
stationary foot ; 3, re- 
turn to the point step 
sideways ; 4, heels 
^1^- ^ together. The cross 

fHpp p > > step should be made 

^^^^P" ¥ ^1^ ^^ with a full swing 

^^^^Bjfe /^tl^^f^^^^% from the hip joint, 

^^^n «H|V , so as to cultivate 

^^^V ^^^E^ strength and freedom 

^^^^Bk l^lk ^^ movement there. 

^^^^^H fl^^fe "^^^^ knee should re- 

^^^^^^m I^^^K main stiff. There 

^^^^^^H I^^^K' should be no turning 

^^^^^^^H ^^^sk of the shoulders. 



^^^^^^^ Mm COMBINATION OF 

^WI^^Mi^ mm POINT AND CROSS 

^B ^Jiv Jk STEPS WITH SWING- 

Vjj^ <mk ING BELLS SIDEWAYS 

AND CLICKING 

1, point step side- 
ways and swing bells sideways to shoulder level^ with palms 



Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 387 

upward, using the bells on the side of the moving feet ; 2, cross 
step toward the centre and click the bells in the centre ; 3, point 
step and bells again sideways ; 4, position. 




;88 



School Gymnastics 



3. 



LESSON V 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

f a. Swinging opposite bells sideways and clicking in 
' centre— One ! 8—8. 

h. Foot! — side — cross forward — side — place. 8 — 8. 
^ c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

4. Rising on toes, clicking opposite bells over head, and changing 
places — One ! 32. 

About — Face ! 

5. Trunk twisting and clicking bells sideways — One ! 8 — 
8—16. 

6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

Note. — See Explanatory Note 7. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 



389 



4. RISING ON TOES, CLICKING OPPOSITE BELLS OVER HEAD 
AND CHANGING PLACES 

1, rise on the toes and click the thumb ends of the opposite 
bells at arm's length upward in the centre ; 2, position ; 3, rise 
on the toes and click the other bells upward; 4, position; 5, 




6, 7, 8, walk to partner's place and face to the centre, starting 
to the right; repeat, rising on the toes and clicking the bells 
on the first four counts and returning to place on the last four. 
The unused bell should be upon the hip during the clicking, 
and both bells should be at the hips while walking to places. 



390 



School Gymnastics 



3. \ 



LESSON VI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

r a. Swinging opposite bells sideways and clicking in cen- 
tre—One ! 8—8. 
h. Foot! — side — cross forward — side — place. 8 — 8. 
c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

4. Eising on toes, clicking opposite bells over head, and 
changing places — One ! 32. 

5. Trunk bending sideways and clicking bells over head— One ! 
32. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 391 

5. TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING BELLS OVER HEAD 

1, bend the trunk sideways from the waist and click the 
thumb ends of one's own bells over head ; the head and arms 
should be in line with 
the trunk, and part- 
ners should bend to- 
ward the same side ; 
2, position ; 3, repeat 
to the other side ; 4, 
position; 5, partners 
click opposite bells 
in the centre, over 
head, trunk erect; 6, 
position ; 7, click the 
other bells, the trunk 
still erect ; 8, posi- 
tion. 

This exercise is 
very effective for 
strengthening the 
waist muscles, for ex- 
])anding the chest lat- 
erally, and for quick- 
ening the circulation 
and digestion. . 




9. BREATHING 



While inhaling, raise the arms forward to a vertical position ; 
while exhaling, lower them sideways to position. Keep the 
head erect and pull upon the chest with the arm movements. 



392 School Gymnastics 



3. 



LESSOX VII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Stretching and clicking bells obliquely — One ! 8 — 8 
—8! 

b. Charge I — obliquely forward. 8 — 8. 
^OTE. — Charging obliquely forward. 

t c. Combine I 8—8—8. 

4. Eising on toes, clicking opposite bells over head, and 
changing places — One ! 32. 

5. Trunk bending sideways and clicking bells over head — 
One ! 32. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



3 a. STRETCHING AND CLICKING BELLS OBLIQUELY 

1, stretch the right arm diagonally upward, and the left di- 
agonally downward, the bells continuing the line of the arms ; 
keep the head erect and pull hard upon the chest ; there should 
be no movement of the trunk or head ; 2, click the little finger 
ends of the bells at elbow height, directly in front of the body ; 
3, stretch the arms again obliquely ; 4, click ; continue to 8. 



Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 393 

3 h. CHARGING OBLIQUELY FORWARD 

1, take a long step obliquely forward, and bend the knee on 
that side so as to carry the entire weight of the body ; the rear 
knee should be straight, both heels upon the floor, and the trunk 
erect; the partners should work with opposite feet, and will 
thus pass each other in charging ; 2, heels together. The bells 
should be on the hips during this exercise. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING AND STRETCHING ARMS 

OBLIQUELY 

1, charge obliquely forward, and stretch the arm on that side 



394 



School Gymnastics 




obliquely upward and the other arm obliquely downward ; 
2, heels together and click the bells. 



Tenth Series, Dufiib-bells — Boys ami Girls 395 



LESSON VIII 



1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 



3. 



a. Stretching and clicking bells obliquely — One ! 8 — 8 

—8. 
h. Charge ! — obliquely forward. 8 — 8. 
c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
a. Swinging^ opposite bells sideways and clicking over 

head— One ! 8—8. 
h. Foot ! — cross forward — on toes — cross forward — place. 

Note. — Cross step and rising on toes. 
c. Combine! 16—16. 

5. Trunk bending sideways and clicking bells over head — 
One ! 32. 

6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



4 a. SWINGING BELLS SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING OVER HEAD 

1, swing the opposite bells sideways to shoulder level, palms 
turned upward ; 2, click the thumb ends of these bells diago- 
nally over head ; 3, stretch the arms again sideways, with the 
palms upward; 4, position. The arm movements should lift 
and expand the chest. 



396 



School Gymnastics 

4 6. CROSS STEP AND RISING ON TOES 



1, cross step forward with opposite feet ; 2, rise on the toes ; 
3, heels down ; 4, position. 







4 c. COMBINATION OF CROSS STEP AND RISING ON TOES WITH 
BELLS SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING OVER HEAD 

Start with the bells on hips ; cross step forward with oppo- 
site feet and swing sideways the bells on that side, with the 
palms upward ; 2, rise on the toes and click the thumb end of 
partner's bell diagonally upward in the centre ; 3, heels down 
and bells again at the sides ; 4, heels together and bells on hips. 



Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 397 



LESSON IX 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

' a. Stretching and clicking bells obliquely — One ! 8 — 8 

3. J -^- 

I 6. Charge ! — obliquely forward. 8 — 8. 

[ c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
a. Swinging opposite bells sideways and clicking over 
head— One ! 8—8. 

4. \ h. Foot ! — cross forward — on toes — cross forward — place. 
8—8. 

c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

a. Facing, trunk twisting and clicking bells — One ! 

8—8. 
h. With foot ! — face — forward — place. 16 — 16. 
Note. — With point step forward. 

6. Marching. (Returnbells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. E/unning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



398 



School Gymnastics 



5 a. FACING, TRUNK TWISTING AND CLICKING BELLS 

Start with the bells on the hips. 1^ face sideways, partners 
working in the same direction ; 2, twist the trunk toward the 
centre and click the thumb ends of the outside bells forward 
at shoulder height ; 3, rotate the trunk backward to its normal 
position, and return the bells to the hips ; 4, twist and click ; 
continue to 7; 8, face partner. Keep the chest high and 
prominent throughout this exercise. 



^ 




j^#- 



bh. FACING AND TRUNK TWISTING WITH POINT STEP 

FORWARD 

This differs from the preceding exercise only in the addition 
of the point step forward when the trunk is twisted. 



3. 



5. 



Tenth Series, dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 399 

LESSON X 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

r a. Swinging and clicking bells sideways — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

b. Charge! — reverse. 10 — 10. 
Note. — Reverse charging sideways. 

[ c. Combine ! 10 — 10. 
a. Swinging opposite bells sideways and clicking over 
head— One ! 8—8. 
4. \ b. Foot ! — cross forward — on toes — cross forward — place. 
8—8. 

c. Combine ! 10 — 10. 
f a. Facing, trunk twisting and clicking bells — One ! 8 — 8. 
I b. Foot ! — face — forward — place. 8 — 8. 

0. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



3 a. SWINGING AND CLICKING BELLS SIDEWAYS 

1, swing one bell sideways at shoulder level and turn the 
palm upward, partners working on the same side; 2, click 
the thumb end of partner's bell, keeping the elbows straight; 
3, stretch the arm again sideways with the palm upward; 4, 
click ; alternate the movements to 7 ; 8, position. 



3 6. REVERSE CHARGING SIDEWAYS 

1, face and charge directly to the side, both partners working 
in the same direction; 2, hold the position; 3, reverse the 
charge, i.e. straighten the bent knee, face in the opposite 



400 



School Gymnastics 



direction, throw the weight upon the other knee and bend it in 
the charge position ; 4, hold ; o, return to the first charge ; con- 
tinue to reverse the directions to 15; 16, position. The bells 
should be on the hips during this exercise. 

This is one of the best exercises for stimulating the circu- 
lation. 





3 c. COMBINATION OF REVERSE CHARGING SIDEWAYS WITH 

SWINGING AND CLICKING BELLS SIDEWAYS ^ 

1, face and charge toward the same side, and stretch sideways 
the arms on that side, with the palms upward; 2, hold the 
charge position, and click the thumb ends of the bells forward 
at shoulder height ; 3, face and charge in the opposite direction, 
returning the extended bells to the hips, and extending the other 



Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 401 




ones sideways ; 4, hold the charge position and click the bells ; 
reverse the charging to 15; 16, position. The illustrations 
show the positions on the first and fourth counts. 



402 



School Gymnastics 



3 



LESSON XI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

' a. Swinging and clicking bells sideways — One ! 8 — 

8—8. 
h. Charge ! — reverse. 16 — 16. 
c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
a. Swinging both bells sideways and clicking overhead — 

One ! 16. 
h. Point step ! — forward — sideways — backward — heels. 

Twice to each side. 

Note. —Point step and facing. 
c. Combine ! Twice to each side. 
a. Facing, trunk twisting and clicking bells — One! 8 

—8. 
h. Foot ! — face — forward — place. 8 — 8. 

6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



4. 



Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys ami Girls 403 

4 a. SWINGING BELLS SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING OVER HEAD 

1, swing both bells sideways at arm's length with the palms 
upward; 2, click the thumb ends of one's OAvn bells over head, 
elbow^s straight ; 3, extend the bells sideways again ; 4, position. 

This exercise is admirable for chest expansion. The pull 
upon the chest should be strong and the head should be held 
erect. 



4 6. POINT STEP AND FACING 

1, point step forward ; 2, face to the side, partners working 
in the same direction, and take the point step in front of the body 
as it then faces ; 3, face to the rear, and take the point step in 
front of the body as it then faces ; 4, heels together ; the pivot- 
ing should be on the ball of the stationary foot ; 5, 6, 7, return 
to the front, with the point step in each direction; 8, heels 
together. Bells on hips. 

4 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND FACING WITH SWINGING 
BELLS SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING OVER HEAD 

1, point step forward and click both bells sidew^a^^s at 
shoulder level, palms upward, from position at the sides; 2, 
face to the side with the point step in that direction, and click 
one's own bells over head ; 3, point step and face to the rear, 
and extend the bells again to the sides; 4, heels together and 
arms down at the sides ; 5, point step forward in the direction 
then facing, and extend the bells sideways ; 6, face to the side, 
point step in that direction, and click the bells over head ; 7, 
face and point step to the front, arms sideways ; 8, heels and 
arms to position. 



404 



School: Gymnastics 



LESSON XII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

r a. Swinging and clicking bells sideways — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

3. ] b. Charge ! — reverse. 16 — 16. 
[ c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
' a. Swinging both bells sideways and clicking over head 

One ! 16. 
\ b. Point step and facing ! — forward — to the side — to 
the rear — position. 16 — 16. 
c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
5. Facing and trunk bending inward — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 

— ^ (). Marching. (Ee- 
turn bells to 
place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Be- 
gin I Six times. 




5a. FACING AND 
TRUNK BENDING 
FORWARD 

1, partners face 
to the same side 
of the room, with 
bells on hips ; 2, 
bend the trunk 
sideways toward 
partner, and click 
the outside bells 
over head ; 3, trunk 
erect and bells on 

hips; 4, bend and click; continue the bending to 7 ; 8, face 

partner, both bells on hips. 

This exercise is very effective for the waist and chest. 



Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 406 



3. \ 



lesso:n^ XIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Swinging opposite bells sideways, clicking over head 

and returning — One ! 8 — 8. 
h. Rocking I — backward. 8 — 8. 
c. Combine ! IG — 16. 

' a. Swinging both bells sideways and clicking over head 
—One ! 16. 

4. { h Point step and facing ! — forward — to the side — to 
the rear — position. 16 — 16. 

c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

5. Facing and trunk bending inward — One I 8 — 8 — 16. 

6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. ilunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



3 a. SWINGING OPPOSITE BELLS SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING 

OVER HEAD 

1, swing opposite bells sideways, palms upward ; 2, click the 
thumb ends of these bells diagonally over head, the elbows 
stiff ; 3, bells again sideways ; continue to 7 ; 8, position. 
Be careful not to twist the shoulders when clicking the bells. 
Pull hard upon the chest and keep the head erect. 



406 



School Gymnastics 



Zb. ROCKING 

1, charge backward^ partners working with opposite feet ; 
the weight should be entirely on the rear foot, the knee on that 
side bent, and the forward knee straight ; 2, rock forward, i.e. 
transfer all of the weight to the forward foot and bend the 
knee on that side ; 3, return to the backward position ; continue 
to 7 ; 8, heels together. ^ 

This exercise is particularly stimulating for the circulation. 




3 c. COMBINATION OF ROCKING WITH SWINGING OPPOSITE BELLS 
SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING OVER HEAD 

1, charge backward, partners working on opposite sides, and 
extend sideways the bells on the side of the charge, palms 



Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 407 




upward ; 2, rock forward, and click partner's bell over head ; 
3, charge backward, and again extend the bells sideways ; 
continue to 7; 8, position. 



408 



School Gymnastics 



LESSON XIV 

1, Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

f a. Swinging opposite bells sideways, clicking over head, 



3, I 



and returning — One ! 8 — 8. 



I 6. Eocking ! 8—8. 
t c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
a. Clicking bells forward, over head and return — One! 
16—16. 

4. \ h. Twist! — cross forward — face- return — heels. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Foot-crossing and facing to rear. 
[c. Combine! 16—16. 

5. Facing sideways and trunk bending inward — One! 8 — 8 
—16. 

6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



Tetitb Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 409 

4rr. CLICKING BELLS FORWARD. OVER HEAD AND RETURN 

1, click the thumb ends of all four bells at shoulder height 
ill front, the elbows straight; click the same ends of one's own 
bells over head, elbows straight; 3, click again at shoulder 
height; 4, position. 

4?>. FOOT CROSSING AND FACING TO REAR 

1, cross one foot over the other, partners w^orking on the 
same side, and touch the foot by the toe, as in the point step, 
directly to the side of the stationary toe; 2, rise on the toes 
of both feet, face to the rear, pivoting on the balls of the feet, 
and low^er the heels to position; 3, rise on the toes, pivot to 
the front, and lower the heel that bears the weight; 4, heels 
together. 

4r COMBINATION OF FOOT CROSSING AND FACING TO REAR 
WITH CLICKING BELLS FORWARD AND OVER HEAD 

1, cross the feet and click the bells forward ; 2, rise on the 
toes, turn to the rear and click one's ow^n bells over head ; 3, 
face partner and click the bells in the centre ; 4, position. 



410 



School Gymnastics 



LESSON XV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

' a. Swinging opposite bells sideways, clicking over head 
and returning — One ! 8 — 8. 
h. Eocking! 16—16. 
c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
' a. Clicking bells forward, over head and return — One ! 

16—16. 
h. Twist! — cross forward — face — cross forward — heels. 

8—8. 
c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

5. Facing and trunk bending outward — One ! 16 — 16. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 411 




5 a. FACING AND TRUNK BENDING OUTWARD 

1, partners face to the same side ; 2, bend the trunk sideways 
away from partner and click the inside bells upward in the 
centre ; 3, trunk erect and bells on hips ; 4, bend and click ; 
continue to 15; 16, face to the centre, bells down. 



412 School Gymnastics 



LESSOI^ XVI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

r a. Anvil strike— One ! 16—16. 

3. \ b. Charge forward !— (opposite). 8 — 8. Bells on hips. 
[ c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

' a. Clicking bells forward^ overhead, and return — One ! 
16—16. 

4. \ b. Twist! — cross forward — face — cross forward — heels. 
8—8. 

c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

5. Facing and trnnk bending outward — One ! 16 — 16. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



3 a. ANVIL STRIKE 

1, nnmber ones extend one bell toward the centre at shoul- 
der level, the bell held in a vertical position ; at the same time 
nnmber twos swing the opposite bell in a circle starting down- 
ward and backward, and strike partner's extended bell; 2, num- 
ber twos hold the bell in the centre and nnmber ones circle and 
strike; continue to 15; 16, position. The trnnk should be 
rotated slightly toward the centre to avoid narrowing the chest 
with the working arms. The bell not in use should be held at 
the hip. Be sure that the circle is made with the arm fully 
extended and pidling upon the chest, and that the head is held 
firmly erect. 



Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys ami Girls 418 

Zb. CHARGING FORWARD 

1, charge forward, partners working with opposite feet and 
the bells held on the hips; 2, position. Have the step long 
enough to bring the thigh muscles well into action when the 
knee is bent. 




3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING FORWARD AND ANVIL STRIKE 

1, partners charge forward with opposite feet ; number ones 
extend one bell to the centre, number twos circle and strike, 
both working with the bell on the side of the moving foot; 
2, still holding charge position, number twos hold bell in the 
centre and number ones circle and strike; continue alternate 
striking, still holding charge position to 7 ; 8, position. Twist 
the trunk slisfhtly toward the centre while the arms are in action. 



414 School Gymnastics 



LESSOR XA^II 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

{ a. Anvil strike — One ! 16 — 16. 

3. \ b. Charge forward ! 16 — 16. 
U. Combine! 8—8. 

4. Pivoting and trunk bending inward — One ! 8 — 8. 

5. Facing and trunk bending outward — One ! 16 — 16. 

6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin! Six times. 



Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 415 




4. PIVOTING AND TRUNK BENDING INWARD 

1, rise on the toes, partners pivot to the same side on the 
balls of the feet, and lower the heels ; the feet will then be in 
a straight line, one directly behind the other ; 2, bend the trunk 
inward and click the ontward bells over the head, the inside 
bells remaining on the hips ; 3, trunk erect and bells on hips ; 
4; bend and click ; repeat to 7 ; 8, pivot to the front. 



416 



School Gymnastics 



LESSO^^ XVIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

f a. Anvil strike — One ! 16 — 16. 

3. j h. Charge forward ! — opposite. 16 — 16. 
Ic. Combine! 8—8. 

4. Pivoting and trunk bending inward and clicking bells — 
One! 8—8. 

o. Charging forward and trunk twisting and bending — One I 
8—8. 

6. Marching. (Keturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Kunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 




Tenth Series, Dumo-bells — Boys and Girls 41' 




5. CHARGING FORWARD AND TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING 

1, charge forward, past partner, twist the trunk toward the 
centre, and extend the rear bell sideways at shoulder height, 
palm upward; 2, holding the charge position, bend the body 
sideways, toward the bent knee, and click the rear bells over 
head; 3, trunk erect, still holding the charge position, and 
extend the arm again sideways ; 4, bend and click ; continue 
to 7 ; 8^ position. 



Eleventh Series 

Eighth Year, Boys 

Dumb-bells — 1 pound 

LESSON I 

Note. — For stretching, tactics, floor formation, effects of 
exercises, etc., see Explanatory Notes. 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Raising bells forward, both — One ! 8. 

b. Sideways ! 8. 
Note. — Raising bells sideways. 

c. Upward! 8. 
Note. — Raising bells upward. 

d. Foot! 8—8. 
Note. — Raising foot forward. 

e. Sideways ! 8 — 8. 
]^OTE. — Raising foot sideways. 

/. Backward! 8—8. 

]^0TE. — Raising foot backward. 
rj. Combine ! 16. 

4. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

5. Stretching. 

6. Breathing — begin ! Four times. 



419 



3. \ 



420 



School Gymnastics 




BELLS IN POSITION FOR WORK 

The bells should be grasped 
by the steins and held naturally 
at the sides while marching to 
place. From this position all of 
the exercises are taken^ unless 
the position Bells on hips is 
specified, when the bells are 
placed horizontally at the hips, 
with the elbows well back so as 
to flatten the shoulder-blades 
and throw the chest forward. 



3 n. RAISING BELLS FORWARD 

1, raise the bells forward at arm's length in front, the bells 
held in a vertical position ; 2, lower the bells to the sides. Be 
sure to keep the hips back and the head well up during this 
exercise. Stretch the arm hard, but do not twist or rotate the 
trunk. 



3 h. RAISING BELLS SIDEWAYS 



1, raise the bells sideways to shoulder level, palms turned 
downward, the bells horizontal; 2, lower the arms to the sides. 
Pull hard upon the chest so as to lift and expand it. 



Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 421 

3 v. RAISING BELLS UPWARD 

1, raise the arms through the forward to a vertical position, 
pahns facing inward ; be sure to keep the head erect, the cliin 
in, and the hips back ; 2, lower the arms sideways to position, 
turning the palms down as they move. The chest should be 
consciously worked upon throughout the movements of the 
arms. This is one of the most effective exercises for the chest 
and shoulders. 



Zd. RAISING FOOT FORWARD 

1, raise the right leg forward from the hip, as far as can 
be done without tipping the trunk forward or backward ; the 
knee should be fully extended and the toe pointed (i.e. the 
instep stretched) ; 2, heels together. The bells should be 
placed on the hips for this and all other balance movements 
taken without an arm combination. They should be placed 
there on the first count without a special command and re- 
turned to position on the last count, unless the following exer- 
cise calls for the same position of them, as in the present 
instance. 



3e. RAISING FOOT SIDEWAYS 



1, raise the foot sideways, observing the same points as to 
erect trunk and stretched knee and instep, as in the previous 
exercise ; 2, heels together. 



3/. RAISING FOOT BACKWARD 

1, raise the foot backward and stretch the entire leg from 
the back, dropping the heel inward ; 2, heels together. 

All of these leg exercises cultivate strength and mobility of 
the hip, thus helping to a firm, erect carriage, and ease of 
movement. 



422 



School Gvmnastics 




■^ 

1 
j 


L^M^^%.^^-'^ 


i 


mI^^ 


3 g. COMBINATION OF RAIS- 


I^^OT 


ING FOOT AND ARMS 


Jpi.^^ 


FORWARDS , SIDEWAYS , 


Mt^^ 


BACKWARD, AND UP- 


j^^ 


WARD 



1, raise both arms for- 
ward to shoulder level 
and the right foot for- 
ward ; 2, position ; 3, raise 



both arms 
and the left 
foot f o r- 
ward ; 4, po- 
sition; 5, 
raise both 
arms and 
the right 
foot side- 
ways ; 6 J po- 
sition; 7, 8, 
repeat with 




U.- 



Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 



423 



the left foot ; 9, raise both arms 
upward and the right foot back- 
ward ; 10, 11, hold the position ; 

12, foot and arms to position; 

13, raise both arms upward and 
the left foot backward ; 14, 15, 
hold; 16, position. 

This is one of the best possi- 
ble exercises for increasing the 
diameter of the chest and for 
getting the shoulders and spine 
into a good position. 




6. BREATHING 



Raise the arms sideways to shoulder level while inhaling ; 
lower them to position while exhaling. The breathing should 
be slow and much deeper than the normal breath. 



424 School Gymnastics 



LESSOX II 

1. Str etching. 

2. Facings. 
]\[arcliin2f. 

[ a. Raising bells forward, sideways and upward, both — 
One! 32. 

Note. — In series, as for the combination in pre- 

3. \ vious lesson. 
b Foot! 32. 

^N^OTE. — Forward, sideways and upward, 
c. Combine! 32. 

a. Raising and turning bells sideways, right — One ! 
8—8—8. 
< b. On toes! 16. 

XoTE. — Rising on toes, 
c. Combine ! 1(3. 
^ a. Swinging bells sideways to shoulders, both — One ! 10. 

5. \ b. With trunk ! IG— 10— 16. 

I Note. — With trunk bending sideways. 

6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 



425 



4 a. RAISING AND TURNING BELLS SIDEWAYS 

1, raise the bell sideways to shoulder level, turning the 
palm upward ; 2, lower the bell to position, turning the palm 
down in the transition. Lift and pull upon the chest with this 
exercise ; keep the chin in. 

4&. RISING ON TOES 

1, rise as high as possible on the toes ; 2, heels down, quietly 
and without jarring. Keep the weight poised forward after 
the heels are lowered. Bells on hips. 




4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES WITH RAISING AND 
TURNING BELLS SIDEWAYS 

1, rise on the toes and raise the bells sideways, palms up- 
ward ; 2, heels and bells to position. 



426 



School Gymnastics 




i A V 




a. 



SWINGING BELLS SIDEWAYS TO SHOULDERS 



1, raise the bells as in the previous exercise, but continue 
the movement by bending the elbows after the palms are 
turned upward, and bringing the bells to the top of the shoul- 
ders in a horizontal position, one lobe toward the front and the 
other toward the rear ; 2, return to position through the full 
side extension. Be sure that the arm is stretched to its utmost 
when out at the side, so as to lift and expand the chest. 



Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 



421 




5 h. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND SWINGING 
BELLS SIDEWAYS TO SHOULDERS 

1, swing the bells sideways to the shoulders ; 2, bend the 
trunk directly to the right side from the waist, the head remain- 
ing in a line with the trunk ; 3, trunk erect ; 4, bells to position. 

This exercise expands the chest laterally and strengthens the 
waist muscles. It has a very stimulating effect upon the, circu- 
lation and digestion. 



428 School Gymnastics 



LESSON III 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

f a. Clicking bells over head and behind back — One' 16. 
^ j h. Charge: 16— IG. 

1 Note. — Charging forward. 

I c. Combine! 16 — 16. 

f a. Raising and turning bells sideways, both — One ! 8. 
4. \ h. On toes ! 16. 

i c. Combine ! 16. 

[a. Swinging bells sideways to shoulders, both — One! 16. 
• I h. With trunk !— side. 16—16—16. 

6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

Note. — See Explanatory Note 7. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



Zn. CLICKING BELLS OVER HEAD AND BEHIND BACK 

1, raise the bells sidew^ays and click the thumb ends over the 
head, the elbows f ally extended and the head erect ; 2, lower 
the arms and click the little finger ends of the bells behind, 
being sure to keep the head erect, the chin m, and the chest, 
but not the hips, prominent. 



Zh. CHARGING FORWARD 



1, take a long step forward, bend tUe forward knee, and 
throw all of the weight upon it ; keep the trunk erect, the rear 
knee straight, and the rear heel upon the floor ; 2, heels to- 



Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 



429 



gether. Bells on hips. The bend of the knee should be 
enough to bring the large muscles of the thigh into action and 
so quicken the circulation. 





3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING FORWARD AND CLICKING BELLS 
OVER HEAD AND BEHIND BACK 

1, charge forward and click the bells over the head ; 2, heels 
together and click the bells behind the back. 

This is one of the best all-over exercises in the series, and is 
particularly useful for the shoulder-blade and other back 
muscles. To get its full benefit in this way, especial care 
should be taken to keep the head erect and the chest promi- 
nent, without any sway -back tendency. 



430 



School Gymnastics 



3. 



LESSON IV 
Stretching. 

Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Clicking bells over head and behind back — One! 16. 

h. Charge! 16—16. 

c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

a. Swinging bells sideways to shoulders, under shoulders 
and return — both — One ! 16. 

h. On toes ! 16. 

Note. — Eising on toes. 

c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 

a. Trunk twisting, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

b. With arms ! 8—8—16. 

Note. — With raising and turning bells sideways 
as in 4, Lesson XL 

6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 



431 



4«. SWINGING BELLS SIDEWAYS 
TO SHOULDERS, UNDER SHOUL- 
DERS, AND RETURN 

1, swing the bells sideways 
to the top of the shoulders as 
in 5, Lesson II ; 2, extend the 
arms again at full length at 
the side at shoulder level, turn 
the palms downward, bend the 
elbows, and place the bells un- 
der the arms; 3, return the 
bells to the top of the shoul- 
ders, extending the arms fully 
at the side in the transition; 
4, stretch the arms sideways, 
turn the palms downward and 
lower them to position. 




4r. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND SWINGING BELLS 
SIDEWAYS TO SHOULDERS, UNDER SHOULDERS, AND RETURN 

1, rise on the toes, and swing the bells to the top of tlie 
shoulders ; 2, hold the position and place the bells under the 
arms ; 3, still remaining on the toes return the bells to the top 
of the shoulders ; 4, heels and arms down to position. 



5 a. TRUNK TWISTING 

1, twist or rotate the trunk to the side from the ankles ; the 
head should turn with the trunk but no farther ; 2, return to 
the front. Bells on hips. Keep the chest prominent and the 
shoulders level. The twisting should create a strong pressure 
upon the internal organs and so quicken their action. 



432 



School Gymnastics 




5 b. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING WITH RAISING AND 
TURNING BELLS SIDEWAYS 

1, twist the trunk to the right, and swing both arms np to 
the shoulder level at the sides, palms upward; 2. face the 
front, and lower the arms to position. Pull hard upon the 
chest with the arms. 



9. BREATHING 



While inhaling raise the arms forward to a vertical position ; 
while exhaling lower them sideways to position. 



9 



4. 



5. 



6. 



Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 433 

LESSON V 



1. Stretching. 



Facings. 
Marching. 

f a. Anvil strike, right arm forward — One! 8 — 8 — 8. 
! h. Foot I — forward — place. 8 — 8 — 16. 
Note. — Stretch step forward. 
c. Combine! 16 or 32. 
( a. Swinging bells sideways to shoulders, under shoulders 
I and return, both — One ! 16. 
1 h. On toes ! 16. 
[ c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 

[ a. Swinging bells sideways to shoulders, both — One ! 
] 16. 
16. With trunk I 16—16—32. 

Note. — With trunk bending sideways, as in 5, 
Lesson II. 
f a. Trunk twisting, left— One ! 8—8—8. 
j h. With arms 1 8—8—16. 

7. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



Za. ANVIL STRIKE 

1, extend the right arm at full length in front, holding the 
bell vertically ; at the same time swing the left bell in a full- 
arm circle backward and upward, pulling w^ell upon the chest ; 
keep the head "erect and the chin in ; 2, bring the left bell 
down so as to strike with its lower lobe the upper lobe of the 
right bell ; 3, drop the left bell to the side ; 4, continue the 
movement through the backward and upward circle and strike ; 
continue to 7 ; 8, return both bells to the sides. 



434 



School Gymnastics 



3 b. STRETCH STEP FORWARD 

I5 bend the left knee, the entire weight of the body resting 
npon it, and stretch the right foot forward, touching the toe 
only to the floor; keep the trunk and head erect; 2, heels 
together. Bells on hips. The bend of the knee in this exer- 
cise should be sufficient to bring the large muscular groups of 
the thigh into action, and so quicken the circulation. 




3 c. COMBINATION OF STRETCH STEP FORWARD AND THE ANVIL 

STRIKE 

1, stretch step forward with the right foot, extend the right 
bell forward and circle and strike with the left ; 2, heels 
together and bells at sides. 



Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 435 

LESSON VI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

f a. Anvil strike, right forward— One ! 8—8—8. 

3. ] h. Foot !— forward— place. 8—8—16. 
I c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 

a. Swinging bells to chest, sideways, and return, both- 
One ! 16. 
h. Pivoting! 8—8—8. 
c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

Bells on chest — Place ! 

Note. — This is the same position as that called 
for in the previous exercise. 
a. Swinging bells downward and upward alternately, 
both— One ! 16. 

5. \ b. Trunk !— forward— place— back— place. 16. 

Note. — Trunk bending forward and backward. 
. c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 

6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



4 a. SWINGING BELLS TO CHEST, SIDEWAYS AND RETURN 

1, raise the forearms forward by bending the elbows, and 
bring the bells to the chest in a vertical position ; 2, swing the 
bells sideways at shoulder level, the palms facing forward ; 
3, return the bells to the chest ; 4, bells down to position. In 
raising and lowering the bells from the chest, keep the elbows 
at the sides and the upper arms well back so as to contract the 
shoulder-blades and throw the chest forward. 



436 



School Gymnastics 



4 6. PIVOTING 

1, rise on the toes ; 2, pivot on the balls of the feet to the 
side; 3, still keeping the heels up, return to the front; 4, heels 
down. Bells on hips. 

This is one of the best balance exercises, as it brings the 
rotator muscles into action. 





4 c. COMBINATION OF PIVOTING AND SWINGING BELLS TO CHEST, 

SIDEWAYS AND RETURN 

1, rise on the toes and swing the bells to the chest ; 2, pivot 
to the side and swing the bells sideways ; 3, pivot to the front 
and return the bells to the chest ; 4, heels and bells down. 



5 a, SWINGING BELLS DOWNWARD AND UPWARD ALTERNATELY 

1, without jerking, swing the bells through the full forward 



Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 437 

position down to the sides ; 2, swing them through the full 
forward position to the chest, drawing the shoulder-blades 
backward when the bells are at the chest ; 3, stretch the bells 
directly upward ; 4, return the bells to the chest. 



5 h. TRUNK BENDING FORWARD AND BACKWARD 

1, bend the trunk forward from the hips, the back remaining 
straight and the head in line with it; 2, trunk erect; 3, bend 
the upper part of the trunk backward, being careful not to 
throw the hips or abdomen forward ; 4, trunk erect. Keep the 
bells at the chest for this exercise. 

This exercise works upon the back and abdomen. 



5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK 
BENDING FORWARD AND 
SWINGING BELLS DOWN- 
WARD AND UPWARD 

1, bend the trunk for- 
ward, keeping the back 
straight, and stretch the 
arms downward at right 
angles to the trunk ; 




438 



School Gymnastics 




2, trunk erect and bells at 
chest ; 3, bend the trunk 
backward and stretch the 
arms upward at right angles 
to the trunk ; 4, trunk erect 
and bells at chest. 



Eleventh Series, Duiub-bells — Boys 439 



LESSON VII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Swinging bells upward, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
h. Foot! — back — place. 8 — 8— IG. 

Note. — Stretch step backward. 
e. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
f a. Swinging bells to chest, sideways and return, both — 
i One! 16. 
\ b. Pivot ! 8—8—8. 
[ c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

Bells on chest — Place ! 
f a. Swinging bells downward and upward alternately. 
I both— One! 16. 
^' j b. Trunk ! — forward — place — back — place. 16. 
I c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 

6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



3 a. SWINGING BELLS UPWARD 



1, swing the right bell through the forward to the upward 
position, the elbow remaining stiff throughout; 2, lower the 
bell sideways to position. The movements should be felt in 
the chest and shoulder. 



440 



School Gymnastics 



Zb. STRETCH STEP BACKWARD 

This is the same as the stretch step forward except in direc- 
tion. Keep the weight entirely upon the forward foot, stretch 
the back knee and instep as far as possible, as the foot moves 
backward, without transferring any weight to it; keep the 
trunk erect. Bells on hips. 




3 V. COMBINATION OF STRETCH STEP BACKWARD AND SWINGING 

BELLS UPWARD 

1, stretch step backward with the right foot and swing both 
bells forward and upward; 2, heels together and lower the 
bells sideways to position. Keep the head erect. 

This IS one of the most effective exercises for correcting the 
posture of the shoulders, back, and chest. It is very stimu- 
lating for the circulation and respiration. 



Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 441 



5. 



LESSON VIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
jMarching. 

( a. Swinging bells upward, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 

3. \ b. Foot I^back— place. 8—8—16. 
i c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 

f a. Swinging bells to chest, sideways and return, both — 
I One! 16. 
• I b. Pivot ! 8—8—8. 
t c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

Bells on chest — Place ! 
f a. Swinging bells downward and upward alternately, 
both— One! 16. 

b. Trunk ! — forward — place — back — place. 16. 
[c. Combine! 16 or 32. 

Position ! 
r a. Swinging bells to shoulders, sideways and return, 
both— One ! 16. 

6. i b. Trunk I — twist— bend — up — front. 8 — 8. 

Note. — Trunk twisting and bending sideways. 

c. Combine! 8—8—16. 

7. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Punning. 

10. Breathing — Begin! Six times. 



U2 



School Gymnastics 



6 a. SWINGING BELLS TO SHOULDERS, SIDEWAYS AND RETURN 

1, swing the bells sideways to the top of the shoulders ; 
2j extend the bells sideways, palms upward, and lift and expand 
the chest ; 3, return the bells to the shoulders ; 4, bells down 



to position. 

6 6. TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING SIDEWAYS 

1, twist the trunk to the right side ; 2, bend the trunk to the 
right side ; 3, trunk erect ; 4, return to the front. Bells on hips. 

This exercise, because of the strong pressure exerted upon the 
digestive organs, is very serviceable for stimulating their action. 




6 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING SIDEWAYS 
AND SWINGING BELLS TO SHOULDERS AND SIDEWAYS 

1, twist the trunk to the right and swing both bells sideways 
to the shoulders ; 2, bend the trunk to the right side and extend 



Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 



443 




the bells sideways in line with the shoulders, palms upward ; 
3, trunk erect and bells on shoulders ; 4, face to the front, bells 
in position. 



444 School Gymnastics 



4. 



6. 



LESSON IX 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Oblique swinging and clicking, right arm up — One! 

8—8—16. 
h. Charge !— place. 8—8—16. 

Note. — Charging obliquely forward. 
c. Combine ! 16—16. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 
[ a. Swinging bells to shoulders, sideways and return, 
both— One ! 8. 

Note. — As in 6, Lesson A^III. 
h. On toes !— bend— up — place. 16. 

Note. — Rising on toes and bending knees, 
c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
{ a. Swinging bells downward and upward alternately, 
! both— One ! 16. 

I h. Trunk ! — forward — place — back — place. 16. 
i c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
a. Swinging bells to shoulders, sideways and return, 

both— One ! 16. 
h. Trunk ! — twist — bend — up — front. 8 — 8. 
[ c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

7. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 

Za. OBLIQUE SWINGING AND CLICKING 



445 



1, swing or stretch the arms in an oblique line, the right arm 
upward and the left downward and backward, pulling well 
upon the chest ; the palms should face the front ; 2, click the 
little finger ends of the bells obliquely forward. Keep the 
head firmly erect. 

3&. CHARGING OBLIQUELY FORWARD 

This differs from the charging forward only in direction. 
The charge should be toward a point midway between the 
forward and side- 
ways directions, the 
shoulders turning in 
the same direction. 
Bells on hips. Re- 
member that the 
effectiveness of any 
charging exercise, as 
regards the circula- 
tion, depends upon 
the degree of the 
bend in the knee. 




3c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING OBLIQUELY FORWARD, WITH 
OBLIQUE SWINGING AND CLICKING OF BELLS 



1, charge obliquely forward with the right foot, and stretch 



446 



School Gymnastics 





the right arm obliquely upward and the left downward and 
backward ; 2, heels together and click the bells. 



Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 447 

4 ft. RISING ON TOES AND BENDING KNEES 

1, rise on the toes ; 2, keeping the heels from the floor and 
the trunk erect, bend the knees ; 3, straighten the knees, the 
heels still remaining off of the floor ; 4, heels down. Bells 
on hips. 

This is one of the best exercises for cultivating erect car- 
riage of the trunk. It also works strongly upon the circulation. 




4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND BENDING KNEES 
WITH SWINGING BELLS TO THE SHOULDERS AND SIDEWAYS 

1, rise on the toes and swing the bells sideways to the shoul- 
ders ; 2, bend the knees and extend the bells sideways, palms 
upward; 3, straighten the knees and return the bells to the 
shoulders ; 4, heels and bells down. 



448 School Gymnastics 



LESSOX X 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

f a. Oblique swinging and clicking, right up — One ! 
! 8-8-16. 

h. Charge !— place. 8—8—16. 
[ c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

f a. Swinging bells to shoulders, sideways and return, 
! both— One! 8. 
j h. On toes ! — bend — up — place. 16. 
t c. Combine ! 16. 

Position ! 
f a. Clicking bells over head and behind back — One ! 8. 
5. ] ISToTE. — As in 3, Lesson IV. 

[ h. With trunk ! — forward — up — backward — up. 

XoTE. — Trunk bending forward and backward. 
f a. Swinging bells to shoulders, sideways and return, 
both— One ! 16. 
h. Trunk ! — twist — bend — up — front. 8 — 8. 
^ c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 

7. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

8. Stretching. 

9. Running. 

10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



6. 



Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Bovs 



449 




5 b. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING FORWARD AND BACKWARD 
WITH CLICKING BELLS OVER HEAD AND BEHIND BACK 

1, bend the trunk forward and click the bells over the head; 
2, trunk erect, and click the bells behind the back ; 3, bend the 
trunk backward and click the bells over the head; 4, trunk 
erect, and click the bells behind the back. 

This exercise works strongly upon the muscles of the back 
and abdomen. 



4. 



5. 



450 School Gymnastics 

LESSON XI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

f a. Oblique swinging and clicking, right up — One ! 
8—8—16. 

Note. — As in 3, Lesson IX. 
h. Charge ! — reverse — return — reverse. 16—16. 

Note. — Reverse charging obliquely forward. 
c. Combine! 16—16. 
Bells on hips — Place ! 

a. Swinging bells to shoulders, upward and return, both — 
One ! 8. 

b. On toes! — bend — up — place. 16. 
Note. — Rising on toes and bending knees as in 

previous lesson. 

c. Combine ! 16. 

Position ! 

fa. Clicking bells over head and behind back — One! 8. 
[ b. With trunk ! — forward — up — backward — up. 

6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



3 6. REVERSE CHARGING OBLIQUELY FORWARD 

1, charge obliquely forward to the right ; 2, straighten the 
knees ; 3, pivot so as to face and charge obliquely to the rear 
on the opposite side ; 4, straighten the knees ; 5, reverse the 
charge to the oblique forward position again ; 6, straighten the 
knees ; 7, reverse to the oblique backward charge ; 8, position. 
Bells on hips. 

This is one of the most stimulating exercises for the circu- 
lation. 



Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 



451 



3 c. COMBINATION OF RE- 
VERSE CHARGING OB- 
LIQUELY FORWARD AND 
OBLIQUE SWINGING AND 
CLICKING OF THE BELLS 

1, charge obliquely for- 
ward to the right, and 
stretch the arms obliquely, 
the right arm upward ; 





2, straighten the knees and click 
the bells; 3, reverse the charging 
and stretch the arms obliquely with 
the left upward ; 4, straighten the 
knees and click the bells ; continue 
to alternate as above to 7 ; 8, posi- 
tion. 



452 



School Gymnastics 



4«. SWINGING BELLS TO SHOULDERS, UPWARD AND RETURN 

1, swing the bells sideways to the shoulders, stretching the 
arms to the utmost and pulling upon the chest in the transi- 
tion ; 2, stretch the arms upward \ 3, bells again on the shoul- 
ders; 4, bells sideways and dow^nward to position. 




4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND BENDING KNEES WITH 
SWINGING BELLS TO SHOULDERS AND UPWARD 

This differs from the balance exercise of the previous lesson 
only in the direction in which the arms are stretched when the 
knees bend. The balance work is more difficult in the present 
exercise, and particular care should be taken to move steadily 
and to keep the chest and head erect. 



Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 



453 



3 



4. 



LESSON XII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

f a. Oblique swinging and clicking, right up — One ! 
8—8—16. 
h. Charge! — reverse — return — reverse. 16 — 16. 
c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

a. Swinging and turning bells sideways, both — One ! 8. 
Note. — As in 4, Lesson II. 

b. On toes ! — pivot — bend — hold — up — pivot — down. 16 
—16. 

Note. — Pivoting and bending knees. 

c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
f a. Clicking bells over head and behind back — One ! 8. 

Note. — As in 3, Lesson IV. 
h. AYith trunk ! 

Note. — AVith trunk twisting and bending sideways 
as in previous lessons. 
I c. Sideways ! 16. 

Note. — Trunk bending sideways with clicking 
bells over head. 

6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



4 6. PIVOTING AND BENDING KNEES 

1, rise on the toes ; 2, pivot to the side ; 3, keeping the heels 
off of the floor, bend the knees; 4, hold this position; 5, 
straighten the knees ; 6, pivot to the front ; 7, heels down : 
8, hold. Bells on liips. 



454 



School Gymnastics 




4 c. COMBINATION OF PIVOTING AND 
BENDING KNEES WITH SWINGING 
AND TURNING BELLS SIDEWAYS 

1, 2, rise on the toes and pivot to 
the side with the bells on the hips ; 
3, bend the knees and extend the 
bells sideways, palms upward; 4, 
hold; 5, straighten the knees and 
return the bells to the hips ; 6, 7, 8, 
pivot to the front, lower the heels 
and hold the position, the bells re- 
maining on the hips. 



5 c. TRUNK BENDING SIDE- 
WAYS WITH CLICKING 
BELLS OVER HEAD 

1, bend the trunk to the 
side and click the bells 
over the head; 2, trunk 
erect and click the bells 
behind the back. Alter- 
nate the direction of the 
bending. 

This is one of the strong- 
est exercises for the waist 
muscles ; it expands the 
chest on the convex side and 
is very stimulating for the 
circulation and digestion. 




Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 455 



LESSON XIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

f a. Swinging bell over head, right — One ! 8 or 16. 
I h. Charge I — reverse — return — place. 16 — 16. 
Note. — Reverse charging sideways. 
c. Combine ! 16—16. 
f a. Pivoting and bending knees, right — One ! 16 — 16. 
■ ^ h. With arms ! 16—16 



3. \ 



Position ! 
r a. Clicking bells over head and behind back — One ! 8. 

5. \ h. With trunk ! — forward — up — back — up — left — up- 
i right— up. 32. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



3 a. SWINGING BELL OVER HEAD 

1, raise the right arm upward and bend the elbow so as to 
form a right angle, the forearm being over the head, and the 
bell held vertically at the opposite side of the head ; at the 
same time raise the left arm sideways at shoulder level, with 
the palm facing to the front, the bell held vertically ; 2, reverse 
the position of the arms; continue to reverse the arm positions 
to 15 ; 16, position. Pull hard upon the chest with the arm 
movements. 



456 



School Gymnastics 

Zb. KEVEKSE CHARGING SIDEWAYS 



1, charge directly to the right side ; 2, transfer the weight 
to the left foot and bend that knee in the charge position ; 
3, return to the first position; 4, heels together. Bells on 
hips. Bear in mind the necessity of strong knee action for 
the result upon the circulation. 




3 c. COMBINATION OF REVERSE CHARGING SIDEWAYS AND 
SWINGING BELL OVER THE HEAD 

1, charge to the right side, extend the right arm sideways at 
full length, and bend the left arm over the head ; 2, reverse 
the position to the opposite side ; 3, return to the right side ; 
4, heels and arms to position. 



Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 45' 



LESSON XIV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

r a. Swinging bell over head, right — One ! 8 or 16. 

3. { b. Charge ! — reverse — return — place. 16 — 16. 
Ic. Combine! 16—16. 

f a. Pivoting and bending knees, right — One ! 16 — 16. 
• I b. With arms ! 16—16. 

f a Anvil strike, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 

I b. Charge ! — twist — twist — twist — place. 16 — 16. 

I Note. — Charging and trunk twisting. 

[c. Combine! 16—16. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



5 b. CHARGING AND TRUNK TWISTING 

1, charge forward with the right foot and twist the trunk to 
the left ; 2, hold the position ; 3, twist the trunk to the right ; 
4, hold ; 5, twist to the left ; 6, hold ; 7, position ; 8, hold. 
Bells on hips. 



458 



School Gymnastics 




5 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING AND TRUNK TWISTING WITH 

THE ANVIL STRIKE 

1, charge forward with the right foot, twist the trunk to the 
left, extend the left arm in front and begin the circle with the 
right one ready for the anvil strike ; 2, circle and strike with 
the right arm ; 3, twist the trunk to the right, extend the right 
arm forward of the body as it then faces and begin the circle 
with the left arm ; 4, circle and strike with the left ; continue 
to alternate the directions to 15 ; 16, position. 



3. 



Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 459 

LESSON XV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Swinging and holding bells upward and downward, 

both— One ! 16. 
h. Charge I — bend — up — place. 16 — 16. 

Note. — Charging and bending trunk forward, 
c. Combine! 16—16. 

a. Swinging bells sideways and clicking forward, both — 
One ! 16. 
4. \ b. On toes ! 16 or 32. 

Note. — Eising on toes. Bells on hips, 
c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
( a. Anvil strike, left— One ! 8—8—8. 
6. ^ b. Charge ! — twist — twist — twist — place. 16 — 16. 
[ c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



3 a. SWINGING AND HOLDING BELLS UPWARD AND DOWNWARD 

1, swing bells forward and upward to the vertical position ; 
2, hold ; 3j swing the bells downward and backward, keeping 
the chest high and the chin well dj^awn in; 4, hold. 



Zb. CHARGING AND BENDING TRUNK FORWARD 

1, charge forward; 2, hold; 3, still holding the charge posi- 
tion, bend the trunk forward, keeping the head and back in a 
straight line; 4, hold ; 5, trunk erect; 6, hold; 7, heels together; 
8, hold. Bells on hips. 



460 School Gymnastics 




3 e. COMBINATION OF CHARGING AND BENDING TEUNK FORWARD 
WITH SWINGING BELLS UPWARD AND DOWNWARD 

1, charge forward and swing the bells forvv^ard and upward 
to a vertical position; 2, hold the position; 3, bend the trunk 
forward and touch the bells to the floor; 4, hold; 5, trunk 
erect and swing the bells again up to the vertical position; 
6, hold; 7, heels together and bells to position at the sides; 
8, hold. 

4 a. SWINGING BELLS SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING FORWARD 

1, swing the bells sideways at shoulder level^ palms to the 
front; 2, click both ends of the bells forward {i.e. bells vertical). 



4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES WITH SWINGING BELLS 
SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING FORWARD 

1, swing the bells sideways while rising on the toes ; 2, click 
them forward as the heels come down. 



Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 461 



LESSOX XVI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

r a. Swinging and holding bells upward and downward, 
both— One ! 16. 
h. Charge ! — bend — up — place. 16 — 16. 
c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

a. Clicking bells over head, swinging sideways, and re 
turning — One ! 8 — 16. 
. Trunk forward ! 16—16. 

XoTE. — Trunk bending forward, and raising foot 
backward. 
. Combine! 16—16. 
r a. Anvil strike, left— One ! 8—8—8. 

5. \ h. Charge ! — twist — tw^ist — twist — place. 16 — 16. 
t c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



4«. CLICKING BELLS OVER HEAD. SWINGING SIDEWAYS, AND 

RETURNING 

1, click the thumb ends of the bells over head ; 2, extend the 
arms sideways at shoulder level, palms upward; 3, click again 
over head ; 4, bells down sideways to position. Be sure to keep 
the head erect. The arms should pull strongly upon the chest 
throughout. 



462 



School Gymnastics 




4&. TRUNK BENDING 
FORWARD AND 
RAISING FOOT BACK- 
WARD 

1, bend the trunk 
forward and raise 
the right leg back- 
ward, stretching the 
knee and instep as 
much as possible ; 
the body should 
form a straight line 
from the head to the 
extended foot; 

2, hold the position ; 

3, trunk erect and 
heels together; 

4, hold. Bells on 
hips. 



4 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING FORWARD AND RAISING 
FOOT BACKWARD WITH CLICKING BELLS OVER HEAD AND 
SWINGING SIDEWAYS 

1, bend the trunk forward, click the bells over head, and raise 
the foot backward ; 2, hold the position of the trunk and the 
foot, and extend the arms sideways at shoulder level ; 3, still 
holding the trunk and foot position, click the bells again over 
the head ; 4, position. 

This exercise is particularly effective for the muscles around 
the hip, and those of the back which hold the trunk erect and 
flatten the shoulder-blades. 



Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 463 



3. 



LESSON XVII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
jVIarching. 

r a. Raising and turning bells sideways, both — One ! 8 
or 16. 

XoTE. — As 4, in Lesson 11. 
L h. With charging I — twist and bend — up — place. 16 — 16. 
Note. — Charging with trunk twisting and bending 
to floor. 
r a. Clicking bells over head, swinging sideways, and re- 
. I turning — One ! 8 or 16. 
I h. Trunk forward ! 16—16. 
[c. Combine! 16—16. 
r a. Anvil strike, left— One ! 8—8—8. 

5. \ b. Charge ! — twist — twist — twist — place. 16 — 16. 
L c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



464 



School Gymnastics 




3 6- CHARGING WITH TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING TO FLOOR 

1, charge forward with the right foot, and extend the arms 
sideways at shoulder level, palms upward ; 2, hold the position ; 

3, twist the trunk to the left, bend it sideways to the right, and 
touch the right bell to the floor, the left arm stretched upward ; 

4, hold the position ; 5, as 1 ; 6, hold ; 7, position ; 8, hold. 
This is one of the most effective all-over exercises. It works 

strongly upon the circulation and respiration. 



Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 465 



LESSOX XVIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

r a. Raising and turning bells sideways, both — One ! 8 
o I or 16. 



4. 



Note. — As 4, Lesson II. 
[ h. With charging ! — twist and bend — up — place. 16 — 16. 

a. Clicking bells over head, swinging sideways, and re- 
turning — One ! 8 or 16. 

b. Trunk forward ! 16 — 16. 

c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

' a. Swinging bells to chest, sideways and return, both — 
One ! 8 or 16. 

5. \ h. Trunk ! — twist — back — up — place. 8 — 8 — 16. 

XoTE. — Trunk twisting and bending backward. 
ic. Combine! 8—8—16. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



5 a. SWINGING BELLS TO CHEST, SIDEWAYS AND RETURN 

1, raise the forearm and bring the bells to the chest in a 
vertical position, as in 4, Lesson VI ; 2, swing the bells side- 
ways at shoulder level, palms to the front ; 3, return the bells 
to the chest ; 4, bells down to position at the sides. 



466 School Gymnastics 

5 h. TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING BACKWARD 

1, twist the trunk to the right ; 2, bend the trunk backward ; 
3, trunk erect ; 4, face to the front. Bells on hips. 




5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING BACKWARD 
WITH BELLS TO CHEST AND SIDEWAYS 

1, twist the trunk to the right and swing the bells to the 
chest ; 2, bend the trunk backward and swing the bells side- 
ways ; 3, trunk erect, and bells again at the chest ; 4, face to 
the front, bells downward to position. 

This exercise works strongly upon the abdominal muscles. 



Twelfth Series 

Eighth Year, Girls 
Dumb-bells — 1 pound 

LESSOR I 

Note. — For stretching, tactics, floor formation, effects of 
exercises, etc., see Explanatory Notes. 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Swinging bell forward to shoulder, right — One ! 

8—8—16. 
h. Tap step ! — forward — place. 8 — 8 — 16. 

Note. — Tap step forward, 
c. Combine! 8—8—16. 

4. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 

5. Stretching. 

6. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



467 



468 



School Gymnastics 




BELLS IN POSITION FOR WORK 

The bells should be grasped by the 
stems and held naturally at the sides 
while marching to place. From this 
position all of the exercises are taken, 
unless the position, hells on hips, is 
specified, when the bells should be 
placed horizontally at the hips, the 
hands bent under so as to point the 
bent wrists forward and downward ; 
the elbows should be kept well back, 
so as to flatten the shoulder-blades 
and throw the chest forward. 



3 a. SWINGING BELL FORWARD TO SHOULDER 

1, swing the bell forward at arm's length, bend the elbow and 
bring the bell to the top of the shoulder in a horizontal position, 
one lobe toward the front and the other toward the rear ; 2, swing 
the bell forward and downward to position. The elbow should 
be fully extended in the transition, so that the arm pulls upon 
the chest. 



3 6. TAP STEP FORWARD 

This is like the point step of previous series, except that the 
toe does not remain upon the floor ; it should tap the floor in a 
light, easy way, with no weight upon it, and remain extended, 
with the toe well pointed downward and raised from the floor, 
and the knee stiff, until the return count is given. 1, tap 
forward; 2, heels together. 



Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 



469 



This exercise cultivates an erect carriage if the hip action is 
strong and sustained. Keep the chest well forward and high, 
avoiding any tendency to a sway-back position. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF TAP STEP AND 
SWINGING BELLS FORWARD TO 
SHOULDERS 

1, tap step forward with the right 
foot and swing both bells forward to 
the shoulders; 2, foot and bells to 
position. Alternate the feet on the 
last sixteen counts. 




6. BREATHING 

Eaise the arms sideways to shoulder level while inhaling ; 
lower them to position while exhaling. The breathing should 
be slower and deeper than the normal. 



470 School Gymnastics 



LESSON II 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

[ a. Swinging bell sideways to shoulder, right — One I 
j 8—8—16. 

3. \ b. Tap step !— side— place. 8—8—16. 
I Note. — Tap step sideways. 

[c. Combine! 8—8—16. 
a. Swinging bells forward to shoulders, anvil strike, and 
return — One ! 16. 

4. \ h. On toes! — pivot — return — place. 16 — 16. 
Note. — Rising on toes and pivoting. 

c. Combine! 16—16. 

5. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

6. Stretching. 

7. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 



471 



3«. SWINGING BELL SIDEWAYS TO SHOULDER 

This differs from the first exercise in the previous lesson 
only in the direction in which the arms are raised, which is to 
the side instead of forward. Extend the elbow fully in the 
transition, and turn the palm upward as the arm is raised. 
The chest should be lifted and expanded by the movement. 
The position of the bells on the shoulders is the same as in 
the swinging forward to shoulder. 



3 6. TAP STEP SIDEWAYS 



This differs from the tap step forward only in direction. 
Tap the foot directly to the side of its normal position. 
Stretch the entire leg from the hip in doing this, but be careful 
that the, whole weight is held upon the stationary foot. 



3 c. COMBINATION OF TAP 
STEP SIDEWAYS AND 
SWINGING BELLS SIDE- 
WAYS TO SHOULDERS 

1, tap step sideways and 
swing the bells sideways 
to the shoulders ; 2, posi- 
tion. 




472 



School Gymnastics 



4 a. SWINGING BELLS FORWARD TO SHOULDERS, ANVIL STRIKE 

AND RETURN 

1, swing both bells forward to the shoulders ; 2, extend the 
right arm at full length in front, holding the bell vertically ; 
at the same time raise the left bell at arm's length upward, 
and bring it down so as to strike with its lower lobe the upper 
lobe of the right bell ; 3, return both bells to the shoulders ; 
4, bells forward and downward to position. Alternate the 
arms for the anvil strike. 

4&. RISING ON TOES AND PIVOTING 

1, rise on the toes ; 2, pivot to the side on the balls of the 
feet and lower the heels ; 3, rise on the toes ; 4, pivot to the 
front, heels down. Keep the weight poised over the forward 
part of the feet when the heels are lowered. 







,luV. 



1 mil 






i 



4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON 
TOES AND PIVOTING WITH 
SWINGING BELLS FORWARD TO 
SHOULDERS, ANVIL STRIKE AND 
RETURN 

1, rise on the toes and swing 
both bells forward to the shoul- 
ders ; 2, pivot to the right side, 
put the heels down, extend the 
right arm and make the anvil 
strike with the left bell ; 3, rise 
on the toes and return the bells 
to the shoulders ; 4, pivot to the 
front, heels and bells down. 



Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 473 



3 



4. 



LESSON III 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

f a. Swinging bell forward to shoulder, right — One ! 
8—8—16. 
h. Tap step ! — forward — place. 8 — 8 — 16. 

c. Combine! 8—8—16. 

d. Bells sideways ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
Note. — Swinging bells sideways to shoulders. 

e. Tap step ! — side — place. 8 — 8 — 16. 
/. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
a. Swinging bells forward to shoulders, anvil strike and 

return — One ! 16. 
h. On toes ! — pivot — return — place. 16 — 16. 
^ c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
f a. Clicking bells over head — One ! 8. 

5. \h. Trunk !— twist. 8—8—16. 
I Note. — Trunk twisting. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

Note. — See Explanatory Note 7. 

9. Breathing — ^Begin ! Six times. 



CLICKING BELLS OVER HEAD 



1, swing the bells upward at the side and click the thumb 
ends over the head; 2, return the bells to position. Extend 
the arms to their full length in the transition, so as to affect 
the chest ; keep the head erect. 



474 



School Gymnastics 



5 h. TUTTNK TWISTING 

1, twist or rotate the trunk to the right, from the ankles ; 
2, return to the front. The head should turn with the trunk, 

but no farther. The bells should be 
placed upon the hips for this exercise 
without any special command, and re- 
turned to the sides on the last count. 
Be sure that the elbows are well back, 
so as to throw the chest forward. The 
twisting should be as far as possible, so 
as to make a strong pressure upon the 
internal organs, sufficient to overcome 
any sluggish tendency in their action. 




5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING 
AND CLICKING BELLS OVEB HEAD 

1, twist the trunk to the right and 
click the bells over the head; 2, posi- 
tion. 



Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 475 



LESSON IV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

[a. Swinging bell sideways, palm up, right— One! 
I 8—8—16. 

3. ] h. Foot!— back. 8—8—16. 
Note. — Point step obliquely backward. 

c. Combine ! 8—8—16. 

a. Swinging bells forward to shoulders, anvil strike and 
return — One ! 16. 

h. On toes ! — pivot — return — place. 16 — 16. 
I c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
r a. Clicking bells over head — One ! 8. 

5. ] h. Trunk !— twist. 8—8—16. 
[c. Combine! 8—8—16. 

6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 



3 a. SWINGING BELL SIDEWAYS, PALM UP 

1, swing the bell up to the shoulder level at the side, the 
arm extended and the palm turned upward; pull hard upon 
the chest ; 2, return to position. 



476 



School Gymnastics 



Zh. POINT STEP OBLIQUELY BACKWARD 

1, touch, the toe obliquely backward, stretching the entire 
leg from the hip ; turn the head and drop it backward so as to 
look back over the shoulder toward the foot ; 2, foot and head 
to position. Keep the shoulders squarely to the front 




3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP OBLIQUELY BACKWARD AND 
SWINGING BELLS SIDEWAYS 

1, point step obliquely backward; extend the arms side- 
ways with the palms turned upward ; turn the head and look 
backward over the shoulder at the foot ; 2, position. 



9. BREATHING 

While inhaling, raise the arms forward to a vertical posi- 
tion ; while exhaling, lower the arms sideways to position. 
Keep the head erect; pull upon the chest with the arms. 



Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls ^11 



3. 



4. 



LESSON V 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

r a. Swinging bell sideways, palm up, right — One 
8—8—16. 
5. Foot!— back. 8—8—16. 
c. Combine! 8—8—16. 

a. Clicking bells forward and over head — One ! 8 — 8. 
h. Stamp ! — stamp — step— heels — step. 32. 

Note. — Stamping twice and follow step. 
c. Combine ! 32. 

Clicking bells over head — One ! 8. 
, h. Trunk !— twist. 8—8—16. 
ic. Combine! 8—8—16. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



[ a. 
\ h. 



4 a. CLICKING BELLS FORWARD AND OVER HEAD 

1, click the thumb ends of the bells forward at shoulder 
level ; 2, click the same ends over head ; alternate to 7 ; 8, posi- 
tion. Keep the head erect. Pull hard upon the chest with 
the arms. 

4 6. STAMPING TWICE AND FOLLOW STEP 

1, stamp with the right foot, the emphasis coming mainly 
upon the ball of the foot ; 2, repeat ; 3, step forward with the 
right foot, and draw the left toe up to the right heel ; 4, step 



478 School Gymnastics 

again with the right foot ; 5, 6, 7, 8, repeat with the left foot, 
still moving forward with the follow step; repeat, moving 
backward. The follow step is like the polka step, and should 
have its rhythm. 



4 c. COMBINATION OF STAMPING AND FOLLOW STEP WITH CLICK- 
ING BELLS FORWARD AND OVER HEAD 

Click the bells forward and over head, respectively, while 
stamping ; place them on the hips for the follow step. 



3. 



Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls ' 479 



LESSON VI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Anvil strike, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 

6. Foot ! — oblique — place. 8 — 8 — 16. 

Note. — Tap step obliquely forward. 
,c. Combine! 8—8—16. 
f a. Clicking bells forward and over head — One ! 8 — 8. 
4. j h. Stamp ! — stamp — step — heels — step. 32. 
Ic. Combine! 32. 

f a. Clicking bells forward and backward — One ! 8 — 8. 
I h. Trunk ! — forward — place. 8. 
I Note. — Trunk bending forward. 

I c. Combine. 16. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



9 6. TAP STEP OBLIQUELY FORWARD 

1, tap step obliquely forward, right, turning the shoulders in 
the direction of the foot ; 2, heels together. Bells on hips. 



480 



School Gymnastics 




ft 



3 c. COMBINATION OF TAP STEP OB- 
LIQUELY FORWARD AND ANVIL 
STRIKE 

1, take the tap step obliquely 
forward with the right foot, at 
the same time turn the shoulders 
and extend the right arm ob- 
liquely forward at shoulder level 
in the direction of the foot, the 
bell vertical, and make the anvil 
strike with the left bell ; 2, heels 
together, bells down to position 
and shoulders to the front. 



5 a. CLICKING BELLS FORWARD AND BACKWARD 

1, click the thumb ends of the bells at arm's length obliquely 
down in front ; 2, click the bells behind. Avoid any forward 
movement of the head or shoulders as the bells are clicked 
behind. 



5 h. TRUNK BENDING FORWARD 

1, bend the trunk forward, the back and head in a straight 
line ; 2, trunk erect. Bells on hips. 

This exercise is admirable for strengthening the muscles 
that hold the trunk erect. 



Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 



481 



5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING 
FORWARD AND CLICKING BELLS FOR- 
WARD AND BACKWARD 

1, bend the trunk forward and click 
the bells in front of the head ; 2, trunk 
erect and click the bells behind. 





This exercise is one 
of the best for the 
shoulder-blades and 
back. 



482 School Gymnastics 



LESSON VII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

r a. Anvil strike, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 

3. ^ h. Foot !— oblique— place. 8—8—16. 
Ic. Combine! 8—8—16. 

a. Circling bells outward and clicking — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
h. Step ! — point — step— point — back— two— three — heels. 
32. 

Note. — Stepping and pointing foot forward, 
c. Combine ! 32. 
C a. Clicking bells forward and backward — One ! 16. 

5. \ b. Trunk ! — forward — place. 8. 
I c. Combine ! 16. 

6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



4. 



4«. CIRCLING BELLS OUTWARD AND CLICKING 

1, circle the arms upward and outward ; 2, click the thumb 
ends of the bells down in front. The arms should be stretched 
to their full extent during the circle, so as to lift and expand 
the chest. 



Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 

4 6. STEPPING AND POINTING FOOT FORWARD 



483 



1, step forward with the right foot ; 2, extend and point the 
left foot, i.e. stretch it downward without touching the floor, 
as in the tap step ; 3, step forward with the left foot ; 4, extend 
and point the right foot ; 5, 6, 7, walk backward to place ; 8, heels 
together. Bells on hips. 



4 c. COMBINATION OF STEPPING AND 
POINTING FOOT FORWARD WITH 
CIRCLING AND CLICKING BELLS 

1, step forward with the right 
foot, swing the arms outward and 
upward ; 2, point the left foot and 
click the bells; 3, step with the 
left foot and circle the arms ; 4, 
point the right foot and click the 
bells ; 5, 6, 7, 8, walk backward to 
place, the bells on the hips. 

The carriage should be firmly 
erect during this exercise, and the 
movements should be light and 
dainty. 




484 School Gymnastics 



5. 



3. \ 



LESSON VIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

' a. Clicking bells forward and over head — One ! 16. 

Note. — As in 4, Lesson IV. 
6. Foot ! — oblique — heels — back — heels. 16 — 16. 

Note. — Point step obliquely forward and backward 
alternately. 
c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

a. Circling bell outward and clicking — One ! 16. 
h. Step ! — point — step — point — back — two — three— heels. 

32. 
c. Combine! 32. 
a. Swinging bell sideways to shoulder, right — One ! 8 — 8. 

Note. — As in 3, Lesson 11. 
h. Trunk !— twist— place. 8—8—8. 
c. Combine! 8—8—16. 

6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



3 h. POINT STEP OBLIQUELY FORWARD AND BACKWARD 

ALTERNATELY 

1, point step obliquely forward; turn the head and look at 
the foot ; 2, heels together ; 3, point step obliquely backward ; 
turn the head and look at the foot over the shoulder ; 4, heels 
together. 



Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 



485 





3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP OBLIQUELY FORWARD AND 
BACKWARD WITH CLICKING BELLS FORWARD AND OVER HEAD 

1, point step obliquely forward ; bend forward at the hips 
and click the bells over the forward foot; 2, heels together, 
bells on hips ; 3, point step obliquely backward, and click the 
bells over the head; turn the head and look back over the 
shoulder at the foot ; 4, heels together and bells on the hips. 



5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING AND SWINGING BELLS 
SIDEWAYS TO SHOULDERS 

1, twist the trunk and swing both bells sideways to the 
shoulders ; 2, position. 



486 



School Gymnastics 



3. 



4. 



6. 

7. 
8. 
9. 



LESSOX IX 

Stretching. 

Facings. 

Marching. 

r a. Clicking bells forward and over head- 
^ ^ ' ^ ^ • " ^ -back — heels. 



■One ! 16. 
16—16. 



c. 



a. 



\ b. Foot ! — oblique — heels- 

ic. Combine! 16—16. 

' a. Circling bells outward and clicking — One ! 16. 

b. Step ! — point — step — point — back — two — three — heels. 
32. 

Combine ! 32. 
Bells on hips — Place ! 

Swinging bells sideways to shoulders, right — One ! 
8—8—16. 

5. i b. Trunk — side — place. 8 — 8 — 8. 

ISToTE. — Trunk bending sideways. 

c. Combine! 8—8—8. 
Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
Stretching. 
Running. 
Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 

5 6. TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 



487 



1, bend the trunk directly to the side from the waist, the 
head remaining in line with the trunk ; the feet should remain 
firmly upon the floor and the arms stiff ; 2, trunk erect. 




5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND SWINGING 
BELLS SIDEWAYS TO SHOULDERS 

1, bend the trunk to the side, and swing the bells sideways 
to the shoulders ; 2, trunk erect and bells on the hips. 

This is an excellent exercise for strengthening the muscles 
around the waist, for expanding the chest on the sides, and 
for stimulating the digestive organs and the circulation. 



488 School Gymnastics 



, LESSON X 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

f a. Swinging bells sideways, palms upward, both — One ! 8. 
! h. Charge! — forward — place. 8 — 8 — 16. 
1 Note. — Charging forward. 

.c. Combine! 8—8—16. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 
{ a. Clicking bells and bending head alternately — One ! 32. 
h. With foot !— cross— place — cross — place; head — up — 



I right — up. 

[ Note. — Cross step forward. 

f a. Swinging bells sideways to shoulder — right — One ! 

i 8—8—16. 

I h. Trunk !— side— place. 8—8—8. 

I c. Combine ! 8—8—8. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin I Six times. 



3 a. SWINGING BELLS SIDEWAYS, PALMS UPWARD 

1, swing the bells up to the shoulder level at the sides, arms 
extended and palms upward ; 2, position. The elbows should 
be fully stretched and the chest lifted by the movement. 



Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 



489 



Zh. CHARGING FORWARD 

1, take a long step forward, bend the knee and throw all of 
the Ave ight upon it; keep the trunk erect, the rear foot upon 
the floor and the rear knee straight ; 2, position. Bells on the 
hips. 

If this exercise is taken correctly, so as to make a consider- 
able bend in the knee, the large muscles of the thigh will be 
brought into action and through them the circulation will be 
much quickened. 




3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING FORWARD AND SWINGING BELLS 

SIDEWAYS 

1, charge forward, and swing both bells sideways, palms 
upward ; 2, position. 

This is an admirable all-over exercise for both the posture 
and general physiological results. 



490 School Gymnastics 

4 a. CLICKING BELLS AND BENDING HEAD ALTERNATELY 

1, click both ends of the bells twice quickly in front ; 2, bells 
on the hips ; 3, 4, repeat ; 5, bend the head to the right side ; 
6, head up ; 7, 8, repeat, the head bending to the left side. 




4 h. CROSS STEP FORWARD WITH 
CLICKING BELLS 

1, cross the right foot over in front 
of the left and touch the toe in a point- 
step on a line in front of the left toe ; 
keep the knees stiff and the shoulders 
to the front ; click the bells twice, rap- 
idly, while doing this ; 2, heels together 
and bells on the hips ; 3, 4, repeat with 
the left foot ; 5, bend the head to the 
right ; 6, head up ; 7, 8, repeat the 
head bending to the left. The cross 
step helps to ease and grace in walk- 
ing by the strength and mobility which 
it cultivates in the hip joint. 



Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 491 



LESSOK XI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

{ a. Swinging bells sideways, palms upward, both — 
^ i One! 8. 

I b. Charge ! — forward — place. 8 — 8 — 16. 

[c. Combine! 8—8—16. 

f a. Clicking bells and bending head alternately — One ! 32. 
4- \ h. With foot ! — cross — place — cross — place ; head — up 

I — right — up. 

{ a. Swinging bell sideways to shoulder, extending and 

I returning, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
6. \ b. Face !— bend. 16—16. 

I Note. — Facing and trunk bending sideways. 

[c. Combine! 16—16. 

6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



5 a. SWINGING BELL SIDEWAYS TO SHOULDER, EXTENDING AND 

RETURNING 

1, swing the bell sideways to the shoulder ; 2, extend it side- 
ways at arm's length, the palm upward; 3, return to the 
shoulder ; 4, swing the bell outward and downward to position. 



492 School Gymnastics 

5 h. FACING AND TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 

1, face to the right side ; 2, bend the trunk to the right side ; 
3, trunk erect; 4, face to the front. 




5 c. COMBINATION OF FACING AND TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 
WITH SWINGING BELLS TO SHOULDERS AND EXTENDING 
SIDEWAYS 

1, face to the side and swing the bells sideways to the 
shoulders ; 2, bend the trunk sideways and extend the arms 
at shoulder level, palms upward ; 3, trunk erect and bells on 
the shoulders ; 4, face to the front, bells down to position. 

This exercise is very stimulating to the circulation and the 
digestive organs. It is particularly useful for overcoming any 
sluggishness in these functions incident to much sitting. 



Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 493 



LESSON XII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. * 
Marching. 

r a. Clicking bells forward and over head — One ! 16. 

3. ' h. Rocking ! 8—8. 
ic. Combine! 8—8. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 
' a. Clicking bells and bending head alternately — One ! 

32. 
5. With foot ! — cross — place — cross — place ; head — up — 
right — up. 
' a. Swinging bells sideways to shoulder, extending and 
returning, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
h. Face!— bend. 16—16. 
. c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



Zh. ROCKING 

1, charge forward; 2, without changing the place of the feet 
upon the floor, straighten the knee, transfer the weight to the 
rear foot and bend the rear knee ; 3, rock forward {i.e. return 
to the first position) ; continue to alternate to 7 ; 8, heels 
together. 

If the step is long enough to admit of a good bend of the 
knee, this exercise is very serviceable for quickening the 
circulation. 



494 



School Gymnastics 



3 c. COMBINATION OF ROCK- 
ING AND CLICKING BELLS 
FORWARD AND OVER 
HEAD 

1, charge forward and 
click the bells over head ; 
2, rock backward (bend 
the rear knee), bend the 





trunk forward, and click 
the bells over the forward 
foot; alternate to 7; 8, 
position. 

This is one of the most 
vigorous all-over exercises 
in the series. 



5. 



Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 495 



LESSON XIII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

r a. Clicking bells forward and over head — One ! 16. 

3. \ b. Eocking ! 8—8. 
i c. Combine ! 8. 

a. Oblique swinging and clicking of bells, right arm up 
—One ! 8—8—16. 
. I b. Foot I — oblique — hold — place — hold. 16 — 16. 

Note. — Stepping obliquely forward and rising on 
toes. 
. c. Combine ! 16—16—16. 

f a. Swinging bell sideways to shoulder, extending and re- 
I turning, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
j b. Face !— bend. 16—16. 
[ c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



4 a. OBLIQUE SWINGING AND CLICKING OF BELLS, RIGHT ARM UP 

1, swing or stretch the arms in an oblique line, the right 
upward and the left downward and backward; the palms 
should face the front ; 2, hold the position ; 3, click the little- 
finger ends of the bells obliquely forward ; 4, click the thumb 
ends of the bells ; 5, swing the arms obliquely. The arms 
should not be brought to position until the last count of the 
alternation. Keep the head erect. Stretch the arms fully so 
as to affect the chest and shoulder-blades. 



496 



School Gymnastics 



4 h. STEPPING OBLIQUELY EORWAKD AND RISING ON TOES 

1, step obliquely forward to the right with the right foot, 
and rise on the toe of the extended foot; 2, hold the position; 
3, heels together ; 4, hold the position. Bells on hips. 




4 c. COMBINATION OF STEPPING OBLIQUELY FORWARD AND RISING 
ON TOES, WITH OBLIQUE SWINGING AND CLICKING OF BELLS 

1, step obliquely forward on the right toe, and swing the 
arms to the oblique position, the right arm upward ; 2, hold the 
position ; 3, heels together and click the little-finger ends of 
the bells ; 4, hold the position of the feet and click the thumb 
ends of the bells. 



Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 497 



LESSON XIV 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

a. Clicking bells forward and over head — One ! 16. 

h, Eocking! 8—8. 

c. Combine ! 

a. Oblique swinging and clicking of bells — right arm up 

_One ! 8—8—16. 
h. Foot ! — oblique — hold — place — hold. 16 — 16. 
c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

Bells on hips — Place ! 
a. Trunk bending sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
h. With arm ! 16. 

6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Eunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



4. \ 



498 



School Gymnastics 




5 h. TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 
WITH ARM IN HALF CIRCLE 

1, bend the trunk to the right 
side and raise the left arm in a 
half circle over the head, the 
left bell remaining on the hip ; 
2, trunk and bell to position. 

This exercise is admirable for 
strengthening the muscles of the 
trunk as well as for a quicken- 
ing effect upon the general physi- 
ological functions. 



Tu^elfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 499 



LESSON XV 



1. Stretching. 



Facings. 

Marching. 

a. Swinging bells backward and clicking over head — One ! 

32. 

h. Charge back! — forward— hold — hold. 16 — lf>. 

Note. — Charging backward and stepping forward. 

. c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

f a. Oblique swinging and clicking of bells, right arm 

! ^^p_One! 8—8—16. 
4 { 

I b. Foot! — oblique^hold — place — hold. 16 — 16. 

[ c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

f a. Trunk bending sideways, right I — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 

*'• j b. With arm ! 16. ^ 

6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



500 School Gymnastics 

3«. SWINGING BELLS BACKWARD AND CLICKING OVER HEAD 

1, swing the bells downward and backward at the sides, the 
arms parallel ; 2, swing them forward and upward to a vertical 
position ; 3, click the four lobes of the bells twice, quickly, over 
head ; 4, repeat the clicking ; 5, swing downward and backward 



3 h. CHARGING BACKWARD AND STEPPING FORWARD 

1, charge backward ; the position is the same as in the second 
count of the rocking explained in Lesson XII ; 2, throw all 
of the weight upon the forward foot, and straighten the knee 
as in stepping forward ; 3, 4, hold the forward position ; 

5, charge backward as in 
1 ; alternate to lo ; 16, 
position. The bells should 
remain upon the hips. 




3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARG- 
ING BACKWARD AND 
STEPPING FORWARD 
WITH SWINGING BELLS 
BACKWARD AND CLICK- 
ING OVER HEAD 

1, charge backward, 
swing the bells downward 
and backward and bend 
the trunk slightly forward 
from the waist ; 2, throw 
the weight upon the for- 
ward foot, straighten the 
forward knee and swing 
the bells forward and up- 
ward ; 3, hold the position 



Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 



501 



and click the bells twice, quickly, over head : 4, repeat the click- 
ing; 5, charge backward and swing the bells downward and 
backward. 




This is an admirable all-over exercise, but is particularly 
useful for the back, including the shoulder-blades. 



502 School Gymnastics 



LESSON XVI 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

f a. Swinging bells backward and clicking over head — 



3. 



One ! 32. 
W>. Charge back !— forward — hold — hold. 16 — 16. 
[ c. Combine I 16 — 16. 
a. Swinging bells sideways, palms upward, and clicking 

over head — One ! 

4. \ h. On Toes ! 16. 

I Note. — With rising on toes. 1, Eise on the toes ; 

[ 2, heels doAvn. Bells on hips. 
Bells on hips — Place I 

5. Kneeling and trunk bending forward and sideways — One ! 
16—16. 

Position ! 

6. Marching ! (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Kunning. 

9. Breathing — Begin I Six times. 



Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 50o 

4<r SWINGING BELLS SIDEWAYS. PALMS UPWARD. AND CLICKING 

OVER HEAD 

Ij swing the bells sideways to shoulder level, arms extended 
and palms upward; 2, click the thumb ends of the bells over 
head: 3, bells again extended sideways; 4, position. ]\ill 
strongly upon the chest throughout. Keep the chin well 
drawn in. 



4 V. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES WITH SWINGING BELLS 
SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING OVER HEAD 

1. rise on the toes and swing the arms out at the sides ; 2, hold 
the foot position and click the bells over head ; 3, remain on 
the toes and extend the arms again at the sides ; 4, heels and 
bells to position. 



5. KNEELING WITH TRUNK BENDING FORWARD AND SIDEWAYS 

1, 2, kneel on the right knee; 3, bend the trunk forward 
from the hips, the back and head in a straight line ; 4, trunk 
erect ; 5, bend the trunk to the right side ; 6, trunk erect ; 
7, bend the trunk to the left side ; 8, trunk erect ; 9-14, re- 
peat the bendings; 15, 16, rise to position, with the weight 
upon the forward foot while rising. Repeat, kneeling on the 
left knee, and taking the side bending first to the left side. 
Keep the bells upon the hips. 



504 



School Gymnastics 



LESSOR XVII 

1. Stretching. 

2. Facings. 
Marching. 

' a. Swinging bells backward and clicking over head — 

One! 32. 
1 h. Charge back ! — forward — hold — hold. 16 — 16. 
L c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

r a. Swinging bells sideways, palms npward, and clicking 
over head — One ! 
h. On toes !— 16. 
L c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 

Bells on hips — Place \ 
{ a. Kneeling and trunk bending forward and sideways 

5. I —One! 16—16. 

i h. With clicking ! 16—16. 

6. Marching. (Return the bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



4. 



Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 



505 




■ 


1 


1 


■ 


H 


m 


f IftJ 


ll^^^^^l 


^^^^^^^B 


\jff ^jM 


■HpP^ 


p^&^^^H 


P 






/^H 


^Sm^mi 1! 


w^S^ 


, ^v 


1 


m- 4 


■H 


H^k. 




^x ^ 


^ 


1^' 





5 b. KNEELING AND TRUNK BENDING FORWARD AND SIDEWAYS 

WITH CLICKING BELLS 

Click the bells over the head while bending, and return them 
to the hips when the trunk is erect. 

This exercise calls for strong localized work of the trunk 
muscles. 



506 School Gymnastics 



4. 



LESSON XVIII 



1. Stretchinsf. 



Facings. 
Marching. 

fa. Swinging bells backward and clicking over head — 

I One! 32. 

I h. Charge back ! — forward— hold — hold. 16 — 16. 

[ c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 

f a. Stamping, clicking, and follow step, right foot — One ! 

[ Stamp — stamp — click — click ; 1 — 2 — o ; 1 — 2 — 3. 

f a. Kneeling and trunk bending forward and sideways 

5. ] —One! 

[h. With clicking! 

6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 

7. Stretching. 

8. Running. 

9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 



4 a. STAMPING, CLICKING, AND FOLLOW STEP 

1, stamp with the right foot; 2, stamp with the left foot; 
3, click the thumb ends of the bells ; 4, click the opposite ends 
of the bells ; 5, 6, follow step forward wdth the right foot lead- 
ing, the bells on the hips ; 7, 8, follow step forward with the 
left foot leading. On the next eight counts repeat the stamp- 
ing and follow step, but take the latter backward to place. 
Repeat, facing and moving toward the right on the first count, 
and then returning to place; repeat to the left and then to 
the rear. In returning from the rear with the follow step, 
face the front on the last count. INIake the movement light 
and dainty. 



5 m^ 



